JP7390021B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine typified by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine) and an enclosed game machine.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, the playing area of the game board is equipped with obstacles that change the direction in which game balls fall, as well as winning holes, starting holes, and variable winning holes through which game balls can win. Common. When a game ball wins in these games, the player is given benefits such as paying out prize balls (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Furthermore, some gaming machines of this kind are equipped with a unit provided with a variable ball entrance.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-200302

However, in conventional game machines, there is room for improvement in the variable ball entry unit provided with the variable ball entry hole.

In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine having a variable ball entrance unit with features.

The gaming machine of the present invention that solves the above object is:
A game machine equipped with a variable ball entrance unit provided with a first variable ball entrance and a second variable ball entrance,
Equipped with a ball entrance,
The variable ball entrance unit has a first movable part and a second movable part,
The first variable ball entry opening allows the game ball to enter the ball more easily when the first movable part is at the third position than when the first movable part is at the first position;
The second variable ball entry opening allows the game ball to enter the ball more easily when the second movable part is at the fourth position than when the second movable part is at the second position,
The first movable part has a front end located further forward in the first position than in the third position,
The second movable part has a front end located further forward in the fourth position than in the second position,
The first variable ball entry hole is a variable ball entry hole located upstream in the rolling direction of the game ball than the second variable ball entry hole,
The ball entry port includes a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port,
The first ball entrance provides a gaming value to the player when the ball enters the opening,
The second ball entrance may be used to conduct a lottery when a ball is entered;
The first ball entry port is provided at a position where there is a possibility that the game ball may enter the ball while heading toward the second variable ball entry port without entering the first variable ball entry port. and is located at a different location from the above location.
A game ball that does not enter the second variable ball entry port is more likely to enter the second ball entry port than the out port;
It is characterized by

According to the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a characteristic variable ball entrance unit.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view of the pachinko machine seen from the back side. (a) is a schematic front view of the game board seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. FIG. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. An example of a display pattern of a pachinko machine, in which (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special drawing 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special drawing 2, and (c) shows a decorative pattern. (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display pattern of a common map. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of ordinary symbols, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of special symbols 1 and 2, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of special symbols 1 and 2. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of a distribution table. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the first sub-control unit of the pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the second sub-control unit of the pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart, (c) is a flowchart of second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of second sub-control unit image control processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio/setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a dip switch board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd performance movable unit 8 with the hand movable body 81 in an initial position. (a) is a perspective view showing the stage 244 and stage cover 245 from the front side when the game board 201 is sectioned along the line AA' shown in FIG. be. It is a diagram showing the second performance movable unit 8 with the hand movable body 81 raised to the maximum raised position. 7 is a diagram showing the operation of the hand movable body 81. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the second performance movable unit 8, with the unit base 80 omitted and the hand movable body 81 in the initial position, as seen from the rear side; It is a perspective view of the production movable unit 8, with the unit base 80 omitted from the illustration, and a state in which the rotation protrusion 881 has finished rising up the inclined part 8711 of the side groove 871, as seen from the rear side. (a) is a perspective view when the front side member of the hand movable body 81 that has been raised to the maximum raised position is removed and looked up from slightly below, and (b) is a perspective view of the back side member 811 of the hand movable body 81 and the LED board 813. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a removed state seen from slightly above. It is a diagram for explaining the falling operation of the first effect movable unit 7. (a) is a perspective view of the first effect movable unit 7 shown in FIG. It is a perspective view seen from the side. It is a perspective view of logo movable body 712 seen from the rear side. It is a perspective view of the logo movable body 712 shown in FIG. 18(c) seen from the rear side. It is a diagram showing a state in which a character movable body 713 performs a performance motion. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which a logo movable body 712 is removed from an elevating unit 71. FIG. (a) is an enlarged view from diagonally above showing how the locking protrusion 703 enters the locking groove 7132b shown in FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the motor 7111 moves slightly to the right side by driving the motor 7111. (a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the logo movable body 712 is removed from the elevating unit 71 in which the character movable body 713 performs a performance operation, and (b) is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper gear 715 shown in (a) is removed. , in which an interlocking lever 7134 disposed behind the upper gear 715 is visible. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game machine shown in FIG. 3 viewed diagonally from above on the front side. 27 is a plan view of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 26 viewed from directly above. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the game board 200 with the back base 260 removed from the rear side. , is an exploded perspective view for explaining the attachment structure of the first fixing pin 261 and the second fixing pin 262, and the first conveyance fixing member 263 and the second conveyance fixing member 264. It is a perspective view showing an enlarged upper end portion of the game board 200 to which a first fixing pin 261 and a second fixing pin 262 are attached. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the lamp unit 9 shown in FIG. 3 viewed diagonally from above and to the right. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the lamp unit 9. FIG. (a) shows a perspective view of the front side of the light emitting part 9a in the lamp unit 9 on the left side, a cross-sectional view schematically showing the structure of the light emitting part 9a on the right side, and (b), FIG. 6 is a diagram showing how light emitting diodes DO on the outer circumferential side emit light. (a) is a diagram showing how the inner light emitting diode DI emits light, and (b) is a diagram showing how both the outer light emitting diode DO and the inner light emitting diode DI, which are mounted on a common lighting board 92, are lit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing how light is emitted. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which an attacker front plate 2301 is removed from the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 3. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the back side of the attacker front plate 2301 removed in FIG. 35. FIG. 35(a) is a cross-sectional view of the attacker unit 23 taken along the line B-B' shown in FIG. 35(a), showing the state seen from directly above. (a) is a perspective view showing the state after the second variable winning hole 235 of the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. It is a perspective view showing the situation after the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 of the attacker unit 23 shown in the drawing changes to the winning easy state. (a) is a diagram showing the attacker unit 23 in which the second variable winning opening 235 is in a winning difficult state, and (b) is a diagram showing the attacking unit 23 in which the second variable winning opening 235 is in an easy winning state. be. 3 is a diagram for explaining a light emitting structure of an attacker unit 23. FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the front frame door 106 and the door 108 with a ball storage plate removed from the main body 104 shown in FIG. 1, as seen diagonally from above and to the left. (a) is a perspective view showing the dish component 128 from the rear side, and (b) is a perspective view showing the movable dish member 129 from the rear side, similar to the dish component 128 shown in (a). (c) is a perspective view showing the movable plate movable member 129 and the plate forming member 128 from the downstream side when they are in the initial position as in FIG. 41. It is a figure which shows a mode that the movable member 129 for dishes moves step by step. It is a figure which showed the mechanism by which the movable member 129 for dishes moves when the ball sink button 131 is pressed down. It is a diagram showing step by step how the movable piece 1292 comes into contact with one game ball retained in the ball storage tray 126. It is a diagram showing step by step how the movable piece 1292 comes into contact with one game ball staying on the upstream side of the ball storage tray 126. It is a diagram showing step by step an example where two game balls are retained in the ball storage tray 126. It is a diagram showing step by step an example where the game ball stays upstream of the game ball that the movable piece 1292 has contacted. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of eliminating ball jamming in the ball storage tray 126 using the movable piece 1292. FIG. 1 is a front view of an enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front side (player side). It is a diagram showing an enlarged view of the variable winning a prize opening unit. It is a figure showing various ball detection sensors provided in variable winning a prize mouth unit 6. It is a plan view of the variable winning a prize opening unit seen from above. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating how the shutter member in a storage state changes to a non-storage state. 6 is a diagram for explaining manual operation of the interlocking member 64. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a movable mechanism including a shutter member 62 and an interlocking member 64. FIG. It is a functional block diagram of a control part. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a stop pattern of a special map, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display pattern of a general map. It is. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500, and (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the dip switch board 198. FIG. 1 is a front view of an enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. (a) is a diagram showing a modification of the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 3, and (b) is a diagram showing a modification of the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. It is a perspective view showing a state. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the back side of the attacker front plate 2301. (a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the front plate 2301 of the attacker and the front plate of the winning light emitter 237 are removed from the attacker unit 23 when the shutter member is in the non-storage state, and (b) is a perspective view showing the state in which the shutter member is in the non-storage state. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which an attacker front plate 2301 is removed from the attacker unit 23 in a storage state. 3 is a diagram showing a drive unit included in the attacker unit 23. FIG. It is a perspective view showing a common drive unit 231U of the special figure 1 starting opening (variable), a common drive unit 234U of the first variable winning opening 234, and a common driving unit 235U of the second variable winning opening 235 from diagonally above. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). 74 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 73 seen from the back side. FIG. (a) is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front, (b) is an enlarged view of the main control lamp board 207, and (c) is a cover plate 231 of the special 1 starting chucker 23. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the back side of the camera as viewed diagonally from the lower right. 76 is a diagram showing a state in which a lower right transparent plate 2591, an upper right transparent plate 2592, and a left transparent plate 2691 are removed from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 75. FIG. It is a perspective view when looking at the rotating body unit 28 from the back side of the game board. 78 is a diagram showing the rotating body unit 28 shown in FIG. 77. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the state of the electric distribution unit 26 and the state of the rotating body unit 28. FIG. It is a diagram showing the flow of a game ball as a result of hitting left-handed. It is a figure which shows the example of the game explanation displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. It is a diagram showing another example of the game explanation displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. 81 is a diagram showing a first modification of the example shown in FIG. 80. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a second modification of the example shown in FIG. 80. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a modification of the third ball direction changing section 263 and the first ball direction changing section 261. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the distribution front area|region 125 was changed. It is a figure which shows the example where the upstream part of the 3rd ball path|route 2603 in the electric distribution unit 26 was changed. (a) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the third ball path 2603 when sectioned in the vertical direction, and (b) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the third ball path 2603 when the entrance 2603s portion of the third ball path 2603 is sectioned in the horizontal direction. It is a figure showing the cross-sectional shape of. It is a partially enlarged side view when the third ball path 2603 is cut in the vertical direction. It is a diagram showing the process until the game ball enters the general winning hole 227 provided in the middle of the third ball path 2603, and the state in which the game ball could not enter. It is a diagram showing a modified example of the third ball path 2603, and is a cross-sectional view when the third ball path 2603 is cut in the vertical direction, with the left side of the page being the front side and the right side of the page being the back side. It is a figure which shows another example in which the entrance opening of the game ball which opened towards the rear side (inner side) was provided in the middle of a ball path. It is a diagram illustrating an example in which the game ball is moved laterally in the middle of the ball path and then enters the entrance for the game ball that is opened toward the rear side (inner side). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second upstream ball delaying section 2653 and the fourth ball direction changing section 264 taken along a vertical plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and (b) is a sectional view of the second upstream ball delaying section 2653 and the fourth ball direction changing section 264; FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the ball, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the game ball in the ball behavior stabilizing section 266, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the game ball in the ball behavior stabilizing section 266. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of a ball. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the second upstream ball delay section 2653 when viewed diagonally from above. It is a partial sectional view showing a modification of a ball delay part. 7 is a sectional view showing a modification of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266. FIG. The game board 200 is shown with various members overlapping the first three-dimensional film effect 271, the second three-dimensional film effect 272, the third three-dimensional film effect 273, and the fourth three-dimensional film effect 274 removed. It is a diagram. 99 is a diagram showing a state in which the first three-dimensional film effect body 271 and the third three-dimensional film effect body 273 are removed from the state shown in FIG. 98. FIG. It is a figure which shows the 1st three-dimensional film production body 271 itself. It is a perspective view of the second three-dimensional film presentation body 272 when viewed from the slightly right side. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which a three-dimensional portion 2712 of a first three-dimensional film presentation body 271 is fixed to a mounting portion 2723 of a second three-dimensional film presentation body 272; FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting structure of the third three-dimensional film production body 273. It is a figure which shows the LED board attached to the frame board. 7 is a diagram showing each lens mounting base mounted on each LED board 2772 to 2774. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing each lens mounted on each lens mounting base 2762 to 2764. FIG. 1 is a front view of an enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 to 50. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 1 to 50 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 1 to 50, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 50, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 1 to 50.
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described using FIG. 1. Note that this figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine in which a player can earn a profit when a predetermined condition is met, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, and a ball storage tray door 108. A device 110 and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the player side).

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member in a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (such as an island facility) provided at a game machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge part 112, and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base body. . Further, the main body 104 is formed into a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk at a store (gaming parlor) in which this pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close this main body 104, and a main body open sensor 1041 is provided to detect when the main body 104 is opened.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge part 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely. This is a door member with an opening. A clerk at the game parlor can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 is also provided to detect when the front frame door 106 is opened. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U are provided on the front side. is installed. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door body. Note that a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 at the front of the Pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be openable and closable. This ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pushing a release lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a ball storage dish door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage dish door 108 is opened. The ball storage tray door 108 includes a ball storage tray 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with a passageway for guiding the game balls to the firing device 110. , a ball extraction button 130 that allows the game balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 to be ejected from the ball storage tray 126 by the player's operation, and a ball removal button 130 that allows the game balls that have been guided to the firing device 110 by the player's operation to be ejected from the game board. A ball firing handle 134 that launches the ball into the game area 124, a performance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices according to the player's operation, and a button lamp 138 that is built into the performance button 136 and causes the performance button 136 to emit light. , and a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game parlor. Although not shown in FIG. 1, a return operation button is also provided on the right side of the ball lending operation button 140 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance. Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 in which a cross key and a decision button are arranged is also provided.

The firing device 110 includes a firing rod 146 that is attached below the main body 104 and rotates when the ball firing handle 134 is operated by the player, and a firing mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , is provided. This firing device 110, while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, releases the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). This corresponds to an example of a firing means.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 seen from the back side.

The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has a ball tank 150 which has an opening opening upward and is used to temporarily store game balls. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding balls falling through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The dispensing device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. This dispensing device 152 is detachable and connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when attached to a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and descended into the payout device 152, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Accordingly, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that conveys the game ball by applying a driving force to the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor that detects the passing of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, it sends either a high or low signal. The other signal, either high or low, is output to the payout control section 600 (see FIG. 4). The game balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach a ball storage tray 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fulfillment of the granting conditions, the game value (game balls) in an amount corresponding to the granting conditions is awarded (paid out) to the player using this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing for the overall game, and a main board case 158 that stores processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub-board case 162 that houses a first sub-board 160 constituting a first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to presentation based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. A second sub-board case 166 that accommodates a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to production, and a payout control unit 600 (which performs control processing related to payout of game balls). 4) and a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 that is equipped with an error release switch 168 that cancels an error when operated by a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing regarding the launch of game balls (see FIG. 4). A launch board case 176 houses a launch board 174 constituting the launch board 174 (see FIG. 4), and a power switch that constitutes a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices and turns the power on and off by the operation of a gaming clerk. 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 houses a power supply board 182, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. A CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving is provided.

Further, on the main board 156, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and an accessory ratio/setting display 196 are provided. When the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to a setting change mode in which at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities can be set. can. In the setting change mode, the current settings are displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the settings by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the configuration may be such that the settings can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board that is mounted on the main board 156 and placed inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. As shown in FIG. 12(A), the accessory ratio/setting display 196 has 2-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged above and below, and a 1-digit 7-segment LED on the right side as a module. The accessory ratio monitor is an indicator that notifies the accessory ratio (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current settings. The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a single-color red LED, but it may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. Note that at least a portion of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200 so as to be visible to the player.

Further, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 3(a) is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes called the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and when viewed from the front, the left hand is sometimes called the left, and the right hand is sometimes called the right. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the up-down direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the higher one being referred to as the top and the lower one being referred to as the bottom. Although not shown in FIG. 3, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side is sometimes referred to as the front side or front side, and the back side is referred to as the rear side or back side. There are cases.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front side, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted as the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104, but for example, the left side part 200a of the game board 200 in the front view is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 in the front view (hinge part 112 side), and the left side part 200a in the front view is inserted here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the right side 200b of the game board 200 when viewed from the front is pressed against the main body 104 while rotating the game board 200 with the center of rotation as the rotation center. There are cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a game board 201 serving as a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 201. If detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, stopping of the game to make it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which game balls can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104. In the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the shot game ball.

Areas of the game board 200 other than the game area 124 may be referred to as non-game areas. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, at least the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the game ball launch intensity is maximized can be called the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of a production device or the like within the game area 124. The game area 124 is called a downstream area in that game balls flow down during a game, and the non-gaming area is sometimes called a non-drift area in that game balls do not flow down during a game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a downstream area, but an area where the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a presentation device or the like may be called a non-flow area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged approximately in the center of the gaming area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the gaming area 124, and as shown in FIG. 3(b), a normal symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol are provided on the main control lamp board 254. Display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, normal symbol retention lamp 216, first special symbol retention lamp 218, second special symbol retention lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp RK, electric support medium lamp An RD, a right-handed lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR are provided. Note that, hereinafter, the ordinary pattern may be referred to as a "normal pattern" and the special pattern may be referred to as a "special pattern".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative patterns and various displays used for production, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and a production display area 208d. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the performance display area 208d displays images used for performance. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display, a reel (drum) display, a leaf display, a plasma display, and a projector.

As shown in FIG. 3(b), the ordinary figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying ordinary figures, and is constituted by two vertical LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are each composed of eight LEDs in two stages, upper and lower.

The normal pattern holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of normal pattern fluctuation games (details will be described later) that are on hold, and allows the normal pattern fluctuation games to be held up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). There is. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure variable games, and makes it possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. In addition, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and makes it possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special symbol variable games. .

Further, the high probability medium lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a jackpot is likely to occur, or a high probability state. The electric support lamp RD indicates that the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shortened and that the electric tulip blade member 2311 (see FIG. 35), which will be described later, is in an electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time. This is a lamp for. The right-hand hitting display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a state where he or she can obtain benefits by playing right-handed, in a jackpot game state, a variable probability state, and an electric support state. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when the jackpot is won.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3(a) is provided with a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in an area where game balls can roll. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 208 to the stage 244 from the warp exit 242b. The stage 244 is provided below and in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, and is a stage on which the game ball that has passed through the warp device 242 exhibits movements such as reciprocating motion and rotational motion. In this stage 244, the game ball reciprocates or rotates, which increases the residence time of the game ball. A stage cover 245 is provided on the stage 244. The stage 244 and stage cover 245 will be further described later.

Further, in the upper part of the game area 124, the first performance movable unit 7 is disposed so as to be supported by the main body 104. Further, a second effect movable unit 8 is disposed below and to the rear of the stage 244 and is supported by the main body 104, but the second effect movable unit 8 is not visible in FIG. 3(a). . The first effect movable unit 7 at the top and the second effect movable unit 8 hidden on the rear side will also be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3(a), a part of the upper part of the game area 124 is covered with a decorative cover 203. Further, the upper right part of the game area 124 is covered with a decorative upper right cover 205, and a regular figure starting opening 228 is arranged at the back (rear side) of the decorative upper right cover 205. The normal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124, and one is arranged on the right side of the game board 200. It is set up. The ball that has passed through the normal game starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, but when the ball enters, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one) are paid out, and the entered game ball is It is also possible to guide it to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharge it to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal pattern fluctuation game using the normal pattern display device 210.

Furthermore, one first special figure starting port 230 is provided at the lower center of the game board 200. This first special figure starting port 230 is provided at the right end of the lamp unit 9 extending to the left. Although the details of the lamp unit 9 will be described later, a general prize opening is also arranged in this lamp unit 9. Although the general winning hole is not shown in the figure, there are other places in the gaming area.When a ball enters the general winning hole, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it Assuming that a prize has been won, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (for example, 4 balls) into the ball storage tray 126 as prize balls. The players can freely take out the balls discharged into the ball storage tray 126, and with these configurations, prize balls are paid out to the players based on winnings. The balls that enter the general winning hole are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In addition, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into the first special figure starting port 230 provided one at the lower center of the game board 200, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. A number of balls (for example, 4 balls) are discharged into the ball storage tray 126 as prize balls, and a special pattern variable game using the first special pattern display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Note that an attacker unit 23 is provided at the lower right portion of the game area 124, and this attacker unit 23 is also separately provided with an electric chew type first special figure starting opening. Hereinafter, the first special pattern starting port 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200 will be referred to as the first special pattern starting port (fixed) 230, and the electric chew type first special pattern starting port provided separately in the attacker unit 23 will be referred to as the first special pattern starting port (fixed) 230. The opening is sometimes referred to as the first special figure starting opening (variable) 231 to distinguish between the two. The first special figure starting port (variable) 231 will be described in detail in the description of the attacker unit 23, which will be described later.

In addition, the attacker unit 23 is provided with a second special pattern starting hole 232 and a plurality of variable winning holes (attackers) 234, 235 in addition to the first special pattern starting hole (variable) 231. Due to its arrangement, the first special figure starting hole (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center shown in FIG. 3(a) has a configuration that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter when the game ball is hit to the right. . On the other hand, in the center of the stage 244 mentioned above, there is a special route 244a that makes it easier for the ball that has reached the stage 244 to enter the first special figure start opening (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200. It is provided. Note that it is also possible to aim at the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230 from the left side without passing through the stage 244. Therefore, the first special figure starting hole (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200 is a starting hole through which a ball can be expected to enter by hitting the ball to the left.

Furthermore, in the game area 124, a disc-shaped ball hitting direction converting member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged. An out port 240 is provided for guiding balls that have not won a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging them to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, and the firing rod is activated. Then, the ball passes through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and is launched into the game area 124 using a firing mallet. The ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing its traveling direction by the ball hitting direction conversion member 236, a game nail, etc., and either enters various winning holes or starting holes, or enters any winning hole or starting hole. The player reaches the out port 240 without winning the starting port or by simply passing through the regular pattern starting port 228. Further, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out ball detection sensor SWout is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104 to detect the passage of accepted game balls. Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All the game balls ejected from the game board 200 (including the game balls ejected from the out port 240 and the game balls that have entered various winning holes) are received in this ejected ball receiving port, and are passed through a predetermined ejection path. Although the game ball is configured to be ejected to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the out port 240, only the game ball ejected from the out port 240 may be configured to pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of this pachinko machine 100 will be explained in detail using FIG. 4. Note that this figure shows a functional block diagram of the control section. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a main control unit 300 that mainly controls the performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) sent by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 performs control; a second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400; A payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control section 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The main control section 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control section 300 . The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a timer. a counter timer 312 for measuring times and times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit is assumed to have two counters built-in). It is equipped with. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the number in the range of 0 to 65535 every time it receives the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built into the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

The basic circuit 302 also receives signals output by various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors that detect game balls passing through each starting port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a ball storage tray full sensor. A sensor circuit 322 receives and outputs amplification results and comparison results with a reference voltage to the CPU 304, random number generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the like. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the second special symbol display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the regular symbol display device 210, and various status display sections 328 (for example, , regular map holding lamp 216, special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, high precision medium lamp RK, electric support medium lamp RD, right-hand hitting lamp RM, round display lamp RR, etc.) drive circuit 330 and a predetermined movable member, for example, a driving means for driving the blade member 2311 (see FIG. 35) of the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 as a normal electric accessory, or as a special electric accessory. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including drive means for driving door members 2341, 2351 (see FIG. 38) of the variable winning openings 234, 235 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number generation circuit 318.

In addition, when the ball detection sensor detects that a ball has won in the first special figure starting port 230, 231, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output to. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting opening 230, 231 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value memory corresponding to the special figure 1. stored in the register. Furthermore, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting hole 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly calculates the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting hole 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to special figure 2.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, game status) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the pachinko machine 100.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main processing of the main control unit, which will be described later), is started.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting commands to the payout control unit 600, and with this configuration, the Communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Note that the information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control section 300 and the payout control section 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but it is configured such that the first sub-control unit 400 cannot send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but it is configured such that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good too.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands and the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various performance data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various performance data in separate ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be included in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game table frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450. The game board lamp 442 includes a light emitting diode D (see FIG. 17) arranged in the second performance movable unit 8 and light emitting diodes DO, DI, and DL arranged in the lamp unit 9 (see FIG. 32). , and light emitting diodes D1 to D3 (see FIG. 40) arranged in the attacker unit 23.

The basic circuit 402 also includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a first production movable unit 7 in the upper part shown in FIG. A drive circuit 422 for controlling the motors of various performance devices such as the second performance movable unit 8, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. ing. The sensor circuit 428 is a basic circuit that receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of various presentation devices, etc., and button sensors 426 that detect presses of various buttons that constitute the presentation button 136 and the operation key unit 190. 402. Note that when the button sensor 426 detects that the volume adjustment button 1903 (see FIG. 41) is pressed, a detection signal is output to the volume switch 163.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A VDP (Video Display Processor) that reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, connected to the basic circuit 502 is a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like. A memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is constituted by a recording medium (for example, an EEPROM, a flash memory, etc.) that can maintain a stored state even if the power is cut off. Thereby, for example, information for displaying a display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 initializes or changes settings. Note that a RAM whose stored information evaporates when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control section 600, firing control section 630, and power supply control section 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control section 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via an interface section 606. The payout control unit 600 also provides prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls have been paid out. Ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1041 that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. When 106 is open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, it outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 receives a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that instructs to permit or stop firing, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Based on the control signal that instructs the firing intensity according to the amount, the firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 is controlled, and the ball feeding device 634 that supplies balls from the ball storage tray 126 to the firing device 110 is controlled. Take control.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC power, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, , capacitor). Note that power of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the emission control unit 630 at a predetermined voltage. Although power at a certain voltage is supplied here, power at a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 5(a) to 5(d), the first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, and general symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed as stopped. We will explain the types of special and regular maps.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first starting hole sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting hole 230, 231, and the ball enters the special figure 2 starting hole 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the ball. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 causes some of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) to blink. "Fluctuation display" (special figure fluctuation game). In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 causes a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) to blink. 2 fluctuation display" (special figure fluctuation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of variation of special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special figure display device 212 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the start of variation of special figure 2 After lapse of time, the second special figure display device 214 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed several times in a row.

In addition, a specification that starts the variable display of special drawings (pachinko machines with such specifications is sometimes called a ``simultaneous variable machine.'')

FIG. 5(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special drawing 1. In FIG. 5(a), four types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure D" are shown. In FIG. 5(a), the white portions in the figure represent lamps that are turned off, and the black portions represent lamps that are turned on.

Two types of jackpot symbols ("special pattern A" and "special pattern B") are prepared as the stop pattern mode of special pattern 1. "Special drawing A" is a 6th round (R) normal jackpot symbol, and when "special drawing A" is stopped and displayed, the first variable prize opening 234 is opened, the jackpot game state is entered, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the control state becomes a special pattern low probability regular pattern high probability state. In addition, "Special drawing B" is a 6R guaranteed variable jackpot symbol, and when "Special drawing B" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable prize opening 234 is opened, and after the jackpot game ends, the control The state becomes a special map high probability state and a regular map low probability state. Although two types of jackpot symbols are prepared, it goes without saying that three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared. Further, a jackpot that is substantially difficult to win in some rounds (for example, it is difficult to win due to a short opening) may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the decision as to whether or not it is a jackpot in a special figure variable game is made by drawing hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether it is a normal jackpot or a variable probability jackpot is made by drawing software random numbers. The difference between a normal jackpot and a variable probability jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot in the next special symbol variable game is high (probability variable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot). Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high will be referred to as the special pattern high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special pattern probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low will be referred to as the special pattern high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special pattern probability change" or simply "probability change"). This is called a low probability state. In addition, as will be described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special pattern low probability state and the special pattern high probability state, and the fluctuation time of the special pattern is greatly different between the special pattern low probability state and the special pattern high probability state. It is composed of Further, after the end of the jackpot game, the game may shift to a time saving state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of a jackpot in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next jackpot, etc. Refers to the state. Although time saving will be described in detail later, a time saving state is referred to as a high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "probability state"), and a state that is not in a time saving state is referred to as a low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on the condition that the jackpot game ends. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is only a state related to regular cards, and the "time saving state" is a state related to special charts or a state related to general cards and special charts. A time-saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to on, it is an electric support state and a normal rate high probability state. In a state with a high probability of a common figure, it is easier to win a variable game of a common figure compared to a state with a low probability of a common figure (a certain probability of a common figure). For example, the probability of winning a general figure fluctuation game is 0/100 (in other words, you will always lose) in a general figure low probability state (non-electronic support state), but in a general figure high probability state (electronic support state) ), it increases to 100/100 (that is, it is always a hit). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the regular figure fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-electric support state (general figure change short). For example, the fluctuation time of the regular figure fluctuation game is 10 seconds in the non-electric support state, but is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. In addition, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time for one opening of the blade member 2311 (see Fig. 35) of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer (the electric chew opening period extension). For example, an electric chew open period of 0.5 seconds in the non-electric support state is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, in the electrically supported state, the blade member 2311 is more likely to open than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2311 that opens only once in the non-electric support state for one winning in the general drawing starting port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then again for 2 seconds). open). By extending the opening period of the electric chute and increasing the number of times the electric chute is opened, the probability of a ball entering the special map 1 starting hole (variable) 231 increases. Note that the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the non-electric support state is maintained. This is because, especially in jackpot games, game balls are picked up by an electric chew with a small number of prize balls, and the first variable prize opening 234 or the second variable prize opening 235 (these variable prize openings are sometimes referred to as "attackers") This is because if the number of winnings of game balls in .) is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. In addition, in the electric support state (time saving state), all of the following are carried out: changing the fixed size, changing the shortening time, extending the open period of the electric chute, and increasing the number of times the electric chute is opened, but at least one of these is performed. If this happens, the player will be in a highly advantageous state, and may be placed in an electric support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if one of the following is performed, which increases the probability of a ball entering the special map 1 starting port (variable) 231, an extension of the electric chute open period or an increase in the number of times the electric chute is opened, the electric chute is set as an electric support state (time saving state). Good too. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 changes between a difficult winning state in which game balls are difficult to enter and an easy winning state in which game balls are easy to enter. In this special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231, the entrance is in an easy-to-win state for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. When "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed, after the end of the subsequent jackpot game, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is played 50 times, and on the 51st time, the non-electric support state (normal figure (low probability state). On the other hand, if a jackpot without electric support (“special map B”) is won, the state does not shift to electric support after the end of the jackpot game.

In this way, when the "special pattern A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state after the jackpot game ends. Further, when the "special pattern B" is stopped and displayed, after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to the special pattern high probability normal pattern low probability state.

Furthermore, regarding the special pattern 1, a small winning pattern (``special pattern C'') is also prepared in addition to the jackpot pattern. When a small hit is made with "Special Figure C", the door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 opens 12 times for 0.06 seconds after the symbols stop. Note that the opening time and number of openings of the door member 2351 can be set as appropriate. In the small winning game, if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the second variable prize opening 235, or if a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, the small winning game will start. is completed, and the door member 2351 is not opened thereafter. During the small winning game, the state shifts to a special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state. A small win is a win in which the control state does not change before and after the small win game, and after the small win game ends, it returns to the control state before the start of the small win game.

In addition, as mentioned above, since it is a simultaneous variation machine, when the special figure 1 becomes a small hit and shifts to a small winning game, a situation may occur where the special figure 2 is being displayed in a variable manner. In this case, when the special figure 1 becomes a small hit, the variable display of the special figure 2 is interrupted, and when the small winning game related to the small win ends, the variable display of the special figure 2 is restarted. In addition, when special figure 1 becomes a jackpot and moves to a jackpot game, special figure 2 is displayed in a fluctuating manner, or special figure 1 becomes a jackpot and moves to a jackpot game, and special figure 1 is displayed in a fluctuating manner. A certain situation may occur, but in this case, if one of the special symbols hits the jackpot, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol will be forcibly terminated, the result of the fluctuation display will be discarded, and the result of a loss will be displayed. That will happen.

Furthermore, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. “Special drawing D” is a losing pattern.

FIG. 5(b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special drawing 2. In this figure 5(b), five types of special patterns are shown from "special pattern a" to "special pattern d", and three of them are jackpot patterns ("special pattern a" to "special pattern d"). Figure c"). "Special drawing a" is a 6R normal jackpot symbol, and when "special drawing a" is stopped and displayed, the first variable prize opening 234 is opened, which shifts to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special pattern with low probability and regular pattern with high probability. In addition, "Special figure b" is a 6R guaranteed variable jackpot symbol, and when "Special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the first variable prize opening 234 is opened and the jackpot game state is entered, and after the jackpot game ends, the control The state becomes a special map high probability state and a regular map low probability state. "Special drawing c" is a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot symbol, and when "special drawing c" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable prize opening 234 is opened, and after the jackpot game ends, The control state becomes the special pattern high probability/regular pattern low probability state. Note that a jackpot that is substantially difficult to win in some rounds (for example, it is difficult to win due to a short opening) may be prepared. Further, in the special drawing 2, three types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared.

Also, in the special pattern 2, a small winning pattern ("special pattern d") is prepared in addition to the jackpot pattern. When a small hit is made with "Special drawing d", the door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 opens only once for 0.06 seconds after the symbol stops. Here, when compared with the small winning symbol ("Special Drawing C") of Special Drawing 1, the small winning pattern of Special Drawing 1 ("Special Drawing C") is higher than the case of winning a small winning ("Special Drawing d" is stopped) with Special Drawing 2. When "Figure C" is displayed in a stopped state, more game balls can easily enter the second variable winning hole 235, and more balls can be won. In other words, the game is such that a small hit on special map 2 does not give a ball out, but a small hit on special map 1 gives a ball out. Note that the opening time and number of openings of the door member 2351 can be set as appropriate.

FIG. 5(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns, ``Decoration 1'' to ``Decoration 10.'' The ball has won in the special figure 1 starting hole (fixed) 230, the special figure 1 starting hole (variable) 231, or the special figure 2 starting hole 232, that is, the special figure 1 starting hole (fixed) 230 or the special figure 1 starting hole (Variable) The condition is that the first starting port sensor detects that a ball enters the starting port 231, or that the second starting port sensor detects that a ball enters the special figure 2 starting port 232. , "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... A ``fluctuating display of decorative patterns'' may be performed in which the display is changed in the order of ``decoration 9'' → ``decoration 10'' → ``decoration 1'' →... That is, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays decorative patterns in a variable manner, separately from the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214. Then, a stop pattern mode that is a combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the normal game state and electric support state in which special figure 1 is mainly displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of special figure 1, and special figure 2 is mainly displayed in a variable manner. In the variable probability state, the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, in the normal game state and the electric support state, even if the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and only in the fourth symbol or the second special symbol display device 214, which will be described later, is the variable display of the symbol. is carried out, and in the probability change state, even if the special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative pattern is not displayed in a variable manner, and only in the fourth symbol or the first special figure display device 212, the variable display of the symbol is carried out.

A mode other than when the first special pattern display device 212 confirms a 6R probability variable jackpot in the normal gaming state or the electric support state, and when the second special pattern display device 214 confirms a 10R probability variation jackpot in the probability variation state. When notifying a jackpot or small hit, three decorative patterns with the same number other than "decoration 3 - decoration 3 - decoration 3" and "decoration 7 - decoration 7 - decoration 7" are displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns arranged in rows (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, when the first special pattern display device 212 confirms a 6R probability variable jackpot (“special pattern B”) in the normal gaming state or electric support state, the second special pattern display device 214 in the probability variation state indicates a 10R probability variable jackpot (“special pattern B”). When confirming that it is a "special figure c"), "Decoration 3 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, when notifying a losing pattern of "special pattern D" or "special pattern e", a combination of decorative patterns other than the combinations of decorative patterns described above (for example, a random pattern) is displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. (eyes) to stop display.

Hereinafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display from the start of this "fluctuating display of decorative patterns" to the stop display of the stop pattern mode of the decorative pattern will be referred to as the variable display of decorative patterns (hereinafter referred to as "fluctuating decorative pattern display"). ). The variable display of decorative patterns is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 5(d) shows an example of the stopping pattern mode of the ordinary symbol. There are two types of stop display modes for common symbols: "common symbol A" which is a winning symbol, and "common symbol B" which is a losing symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228, the normal pattern display device 210 causes the normal pattern display device 210 to alternately light two LEDs arranged vertically. ``Fluctuating Display'' (Fluctuating Game of Common Figures). After the variable time has elapsed, either one of the winning symbol "Public symbol A" and the losing symbol "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5(d), the white part in the figure shows the location of the lamp that is turned off, and the black part shows the location of the lamp that is turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "fluctuation display of a common symbol" until the stop display of the stopped pattern of a common symbol may be referred to as a variable display of a common symbol.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described using FIG. 6. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electric support determination random value, a special figure symbol determination random value, and the like. Further, this RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random numbers. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special symbols on hold, special symbol winning random numbers, various judgment (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special symbols may be referred to as the reserved number of special symbols storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage section for special symbols that is divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) in which the start of the winning/failure judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random value storage area for ordinary figures is also provided. As will be described later, in the starting information storage unit for special figures, a plurality of types of starting information are made into one set, and these starting information are stored one set at a time in each area in order of winning (in order of reservation).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values. Note that the WDT 314 is set to a value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 is supplying to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output when is less than a predetermined value (here, 9V). When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Note that even if the supply voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or more.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the timer circuit 312 a numerical value that determines the cycle for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and a process of setting a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing to output a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, etc. are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power cutoff (before the power cutoff), and if the state before the power cutoff is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to execute initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state will return to the state before the power cut (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 was operated by a clerk at the game store or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the RAM clear switch 180 has been operated). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115). If it is determined that the setting is correct (step S115; Yes), a setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio/setting display 196 flash and indicate "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7 segments on the setting monitor are incremented, and when the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor are showing "6". When it does, it returns to "1". At least one of settings 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is confirmed by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. At this time, the setting values displayed on the setting monitor are erased. Thereafter, after the settings are finalized, the setting values can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. Although the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio/setting display 196, it may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or may be notified by audio output, for example. Further, although the settings are set in six stages from settings 1 to 6, settings other than the six stages may be used, or the settings may not be changed. Further, although the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", the setting value before the power is turned off may be retained, and the retained setting value may be displayed.

Further, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side, ( Step S115; No), the process moves to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, initialization processing is performed to bring the basic circuit 302 into an initial state (step S119). Here, if the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and if this power status information does not indicate suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (e.g. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0). (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and if the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal) executes an initialization process to bring the pachinko machine 100 into an initial state. In this initialization process, interrupts are disabled, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (main setting), and all storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Note that even if initialization is performed, the setting values set in the setting change process (step S117) are retained. Furthermore, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the settings selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command described later, is a command that indicates that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. , is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the regular figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter, respectively, are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as a winning random number is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number winning random number, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same way. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121, except while performing a timer interrupt process that starts at every predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, power restoration processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read out and reset to the stack pointer (main setting). In addition, after reading out the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage and resetting them in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) that was executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power outage. Further, a RAM 308 installed in the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at power-off, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (here, approximately once every 4 ms). Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the values of each register of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically activated (here, 32.8 ms) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (here, 32.8 ms) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). The restart is performed approximately once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The information is stored in a signal state storage area partitioned for each sensor 320. To explain using the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process before the previous time (approximately 4 ms ago) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned into the previous detection signal storage area, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor. ) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, partitioned for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area described above. to be memorized. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of a detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in the storage areas of the detection signal storage area before the previous time, the storage area of the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times, repeating activation at very short intervals of approximately 2 ms. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is checked. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area before the previous time, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area described above. That is, when the game ball begins to pass the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. Considering erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (here, information indicating that there was no detection signal the day before last, there was a detection signal last time, and there was a detection signal this time). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (here, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time. (Information indicating that , and it is determined that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232 or passed through the regular figure starting port 228. That is, it is determined that the ball has entered the general winning hole, these variable winning holes 234, 235, and these starting holes 230, 231, 232, 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of a detection signal for the past three times in the first starting hole sensor that detects the ball entering the first special figure starting hole (fixed) 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, It is determined that a prize has been won in the first special figure starting opening (fixed) 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and subsequent processing associated with winning in the first special figure starting opening (fixed) 230 is performed. However, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned prize determination pattern information, the process associated with winning the prize in the first special symbol start opening (fixed) 230 from then on is not performed. Branch to subsequent processing. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (here, information indicating that there was a detection signal two days ago, there was no detection signal last time, and there was no detection signal this time). After it is determined that a prize has been won once, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, then it will be determined whether or not it matches the entered award determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S121 above is updated, and then the general figure winning random number value and the Update the random number counter for generating each special figure random number value. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as a winning random number is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number winning random number, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained, and the value is stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a winning random number that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and 1 is added to the obtained value, and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is the same as the initial value set last time (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number winning random number, and the value is set as the initial value. In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random number, the initial value set this time is stored in the initial value storage area mentioned above in order to determine when the random number counter for generating the winning random number has made one round. I'll keep it. In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating random number winning random numbers for general drawings has completed one round, it also determines that the random number counter for generating random numbers for special drawings has completed one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

In step S211, performance random number updating processing is performed. In this performance random number update process, a random number counter for generating a random number value for performance used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, a regular symbol display symbol update timer is used to measure the time for fluctuating and stopping display of symbols on the regular symbol display device 210, a symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214. Various types including a special display symbol update timer for measuring the time of fluctuation/stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning performance time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end performance period, etc. Update timer.

In step S215, winning opening counter updating processing is performed. In this winning hole counter update process, when a prize is won in the winning holes 234, 235 or the starting holes 230, 231, 232, the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or each starting hole in the RAM 308 is updated. Read the value, add 1 to it, and set it in the original award ball count storage area.

Furthermore, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if predetermined conditions are satisfied, multiple types of starting information are acquired. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage section provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (pending order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. is the power-on information (if it is on, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are the encryption information. The number of payout requests after conversion processing is shown.

In step S221, a normal figure state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the ordinary figure. For example, in the normal pattern state update process during the normal pattern fluctuation display (when the value of the above-mentioned normal pattern display pattern update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs constituting the normal pattern display device 210 are turned on and off alternately. Performs drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of normal symbols (a common symbol variable game).

In addition, in the normal pattern state update process at the timing when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed (timing when the value of the normal pattern display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the winning pattern will be displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 are turned on and off so as to be in the display mode, and when the winning flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the display mode of the losing symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of two LEDs. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area in which various settings are made not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the above-described lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and settings are made in the setting area to indicate that the normal figure is being displayed in a stopped state. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (the symbol A shown in FIG. 5(d)) or the losing symbol (the symbol B shown in FIG. 5(d)). Perform display. Furthermore, after that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the general figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 m seconds). With this setting, the fixed and displayed symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the regular symbol variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a hit, the normal pattern hit flag is turned on as described later. When this ordinary figure per flag is on, in the ordinary figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 is In addition to setting the normal figure operating state in the setting area, the solenoid (Figure 4 A signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the open state is output to some of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG.

In addition, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the attacker unit A signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the closed state is sent to the solenoid (a part of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4) for opening and closing the blade member 2311 of the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 provided in the 23. At the same time, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the general figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general figure inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a loss, the normal pattern loss flag is turned on as described later. When this general figure loss flag is on, even in the general figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set "Normal map inactive" in the setting area of RAM 308. In the ordinary figure state update process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the routine moves to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a common map related lottery process is performed. In this general drawing related lottery process, the opening/closing control of the general drawing variable game and the first special drawing starting port (variable) 231 is not performed (the general drawing state is inactive), and the holding general drawing When the number of fluctuating games is 1 or more, the result of the fluctuating game is determined to be a win or a non-win by random number lottery based on the random number winning random number stored in the random value storage area mentioned above. A winning determination is made to determine whether the game is won, and if the winning is determined, a winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of non-winning, the winning flag is set to off. Note that regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general figure timer random value, and based on the acquired general figure timer random value, the general figure display device 210 selects a normal figure from among a plurality of variable times. One time period for displaying the figure in a variable manner is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the ordinary figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the ordinary figure variable display time. The number of pending normal pattern fluctuation games is stored in a storage area for the number of normal pattern fluctuations provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit is determined, the number of pending normal pattern fluctuation games is stored. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this ordinary figure reservation number storage area. It also erases the random numbers used for hit determination.

Subsequently, special figure pre-reading processing (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased starting information for each of the special figure 1 and special figure 2, pre-determines the stop symbols and variation time before the validity determination process, and performs the preliminary determination. The result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage section in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed depending on the state of the special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process during the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined number of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 Performs lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 6R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special pattern probability variation flag, and a regular pattern probability variation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbols in the special drawing 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is on, the special figure The probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is off, the special pattern c and 6R jackpot flags shown in Figure 5(b) are on, the special pattern probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the general pattern probability fluctuation flag is off. In this case, special pattern b, 6R jackpot flag is on, special pattern probability fluctuation flag is off, regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is on, special pattern a, small hit flag is on, special pattern d, loss. When the flag is on, the LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 are controlled to turn on and off so that the mode of each special figure e is displayed, and the special figure 2 stop display is displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Configure settings to indicate this. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a 10R probability variable jackpot symbol (special symbol e), a 6R probability variable jackpot symbol (special symbol b), a 6R normal jackpot symbol (special symbol a), and a small winning symbol (special symbol). The confirmation display of one of the losing symbols (special symbol e) is performed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 which is a simultaneous variation machine, the variation display of special figure 1 may be performed while the variation display of special figure 2 is being displayed, but the jackpot symbol will be displayed at the timing when the variation display time of special figure 2 has elapsed. In the case of a stop display, regardless of the lottery result of Special Figure 1, the lottery result will be discarded in Special Figure 1 at the timing of displaying the jackpot symbol of Special Figure 2, and the winning symbol will be stopped and displayed. . In addition, when the variable display of special figure 1 is being performed while the variable display of special figure 2 is being displayed, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed, the special figure 2 The progress of the variable display time of special figure 1 will be interrupted at the timing of the small winning symbol display, and as a result, the time from the start of the variable display of special figure 1 until the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped and displayed will be interrupted. The time will be extended by the time from the stop display of the small winning symbol of special drawing 2 to the end of the small winning game.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time saving times stored in the time saving number storage section provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time saving flag is on, the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is also turned off during a jackpot game (during a special game state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the symbol that stops the fluctuating display is special figure 2. The process ends after additionally storing special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is a special figure 2 identification information in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 is Set the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, and wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image notifying the player that a jackpot will start. For this purpose, information indicating the prize-winning performance period is set in the storage area of the timer for special figure 2 standby time management provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning performance period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234). 332), outputs a signal to keep the door member 2341 open, and also sets information indicating the opening period in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening opening setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special map 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 2341 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (a part of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the first variable prize opening 234, and the door provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the closing time management timer. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening closing setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that repeats the opening/closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (in this example, 10 rounds or 6 rounds) and starts at the timing when it ends, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) is performed. In other words, in order to set the decorative symbol display device 208 to stand by for a period during which an image notifying the player of the end of the jackpot is displayed, the performance standby is stored in the storage area of the performance standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period. Further, if the regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the number of time reductions (for example, 50 times) is set in the time reduction number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and Turn on the time saving flag. Incidentally, if the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage section, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. Further, if the special symbol probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned ON at the same time as the end of the jackpot game.

The time saving mentioned here means that the pachinko machine becomes in an advantageous state for the player because the time from ending the jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation game to starting the next jackpot is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to on, the state is in a high probability state (probability variation). In the high probability state of common symbols, the probability of winning in the common symbol fluctuation game is higher than in the low probability state of common symbols. In addition, the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation game is shorter in the normal pattern high probability state than in the normal pattern low probability state (normal pattern variable short). Furthermore, in the general figure high probability state, compared to the general figure low probability state, the opening time for one opening of the pair of blade members 2311 of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer (electric chew spread). . In addition, the pair of blade members 2311 are more likely to open in the high-probability state of the common figure than in the low-probability state of the common figure. The state in which any of these ``Fuzu definite change'', ``Furuzu change shortness'', and ``Electric tulip expansion'' is set is called the ``den support'' (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the normal pattern low probability state is maintained. This means that if the normal ball is in a high probability state during the jackpot game, the special drawing 1 starting hole (variable) 231 will be activated until a predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning hole 234 during the jackpot game. There is a problem that many game balls enter the jackpot, and the number of game balls that can be obtained during a jackpot (number of balls played) increases, which increases the gambling nature, and this is to solve this problem. It is. In addition, since the number of prize balls that land in the special drawing 1 starting hole (variable) 231 is "1", the number of balls that come out during a jackpot game will not increase, so you can save time even during a jackpot game. You can leave the flag on.

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 inactive setting area of the RAM 308 is Set inside.

Although the example of the jackpot game using the first variable winning hole 234 has been described above, the same applies to the small winning game using the second variable winning hole 235.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, a loss flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set special map 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) regarding the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process, except that "special figure 2" is read as "special figure 1", so the explanation is Omitted. In addition, the order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure status update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. The special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229) is performed when the variable game of special drawing 2 is not being performed, the state of special drawing 2 is inactive, and the jackpot game of either special drawing 1 or special drawing 2 is not in progress. , and the number of pending special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more as a starting condition, using the first special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area. is executed. The special drawing 1 related lottery process is performed when the variable game of special drawing 1 is not being performed, the state of special drawing 1 is inactive, the jackpot game of either special drawing 1 or special drawing 2 is not in progress, and the lottery process is suspended. The starting condition is that the number of special figure 1 variable games being played is 1 or more, and the game is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number in the special figure 1 random value storage area. . In other words, special figure 1 can start a variable game regardless of whether special figure 2 is in a variable game, and special figure 2 can start a variable game regardless of whether special figure 1 is in a variable game. It is configured so that a variable game can be started regardless of the situation (simultaneous variable game).

The first sub-control unit 400 notifies the result of the determination of the validity of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the probability variable state, the lottery result of the lottery based on the prize winning in the special figure 2 starting hole 232 is notified. The notification is given priority over the notification of the lottery result based on winnings in the special drawing 1 starting hole (fixed) 230 and the special drawing 1 starting hole (variable) 231, and in the normal gaming state and the time saving state. , notification of the lottery results based on winnings in the special pattern 1 starting hole (fixed) 230 and special pattern 1 starting hole (variable) 231 is notification of lottery results based on winnings in the special pattern 2 starting hole 232. will be given priority over. However, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 variable game in the variable probability state becomes a jackpot, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 starting hole 232 is announced, or once the special figure 2 starts. The notification of the lottery results based on winnings in the opening 232 is interrupted, and the notification of the lottery results based on winnings in the special drawing 1 starting opening (fixed) 230 and the special drawing 1 starting opening (variable) 231 is executed. There may be cases. In addition, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variable game in the normal game state and the time saving state is a jackpot, a lottery based on winnings in the special figure 1 starting hole (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 starting hole (variable) 231 will be performed. In parallel with the notification of the lottery results, or after interrupting the notification of the lottery results based on winnings in the special pattern 1 starting hole (fixed) 230 and the special pattern 1 starting hole (variable) 231, the special pattern 2 starts. In some cases, notification of the lottery result based on winnings in the slot 232 is performed.

In the case of the special figure 2-related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (previously stored) pending position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2 (set of winning random number and special chart 2 random number), and based on the special chart 2 winning random number in the obtained special chart 2 starting information and the value of the special chart probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308, A determination is made as to whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss (win/fail judgment) using the win/fail judgment table stored in . Next, the main control unit 300 selects the special figure 2 using the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information and the determined validity judgment result. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the variable display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 stores in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined result of the judgment, the stopped symbol, the number of reserved special symbols 2 at the time of judgment of the judgment, the acquired random value for determining the special pattern fluctuation time, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random number storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random number storage area, and Subtract 1 from the special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area in FIG. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information taken out from the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision is made based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You can do it like this.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. In addition, the order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the above-mentioned special figure status update process and special figure-related lottery process are performed independently on special figure 1 and special figure 2, so that multiple special figures are changed simultaneously. The present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the state of one special symbol, a lottery process or a variable game regarding the reservation of the other special symbol may not be performed. As will be described later, when a plurality of special symbols are to be changed at the same time, in the normal game state and the time saving state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is made to perform an effect display that matches the variable display of the special symbol 1, while the special symbol 2 is No effect display is performed regarding the variable display of , and in the variable probability state, the decorative pattern display device 208 is made to perform an effect display that matches the variable display of special figure 2, while no effect display is performed regarding the variable display of special figure 1. However, the decorative pattern display device 208 may be provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special pattern, or a plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided to display the lottery results of each special pattern. The lottery results may be displayed separately. Further, when fluctuations regarding a plurality of special symbols are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped first may influence the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, where bit 15 is strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), and bits 11 to 14 are strobe information. Command type (in this example, basic command, winning opening command, out ball command, firing position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure stop type command (special figure 1 and special figure 2) A command sent at the start of variation, which specifies which of special map 1 and special map 2 will be stopped and displayed first), special map start command, special map end command, big prize opening opening command, jackpot round number designation command, power restoration command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, setting command, and other information that can identify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) ).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, loss flags, timer numbers selected in special figure-related lottery processing, etc. When the figure fluctuation start command is set, stop symbol information that allows the stop symbols to be specified is included. In the case of a special figure fluctuation stop command, it includes the values of various jackpot flags, small hit flags, loss flags, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, it includes the number of jackpot rounds, etc. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a prize in the special drawing 1 starting hole (fixed) 230, whether there is a prize winning in the special drawing 1 starting hole (variable) 231, and special drawing 2 starting. This includes whether or not there is a prize in the opening 232, whether or not there is a prize in the first variable winning hole 234, whether there is a prize in the second variable winning hole 235, etc. In the case of a prefetch result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special figures 1 and 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area, and the stop symbols stored in the prefetch result storage section. In the case of a setting command, it includes setting information, etc.

In addition, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data includes the values of various jackpot flags, small hit flags, and loss flags stored in the RAM 308, selected in the special drawing 1-related lottery process and the special drawing 2-related lottery process. The information indicating the timer number, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small win flags, loss flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps (442, 452), and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the effect control information stored in the RAM 308. Set information such as the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are being played. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps (442, 452), and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the effect control information stored in the RAM 308. Set information such as the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are being played. In the above-described big winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described big winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase process, the command data includes special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, advance notice information (advance notice information, fake Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to an information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via an information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a ball storage tray full error, is monitored. do. When a front frame door opening error or a ball storage tray full error is detected, a device that indicates the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a ball storage tray full error in transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Set information. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the first special figure starting opening (variable) 231, the first variable winning opening 234, and the second variable winning opening 235, or via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the regular map display device 210, the special map 1 display device 212, the special map 2 display device 214, the various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process moves to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. to return to. On the other hand, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as restoration data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, it becomes HALT state.

Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The determination table will be explained with reference to FIG. 8. Here, FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of ordinary symbols, and FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of special symbols 1 and 2. Yes, and FIG. 8(c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special symbol determination distribution table.

The ordinary figure validity determination table shown in FIG. 8(a) is the ordinary figure validity determination table used when determining the ordinary figure validity. Note that this table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 8(a), when this correctness determination table is used, there is no winning value in the low probability state of the normal figure, that is, the probability of winning is 0%, and the probability of winning is 0%. In the high probability state, the possible range of the random number is 0 to 65,535, and the winning value is 0 to 65,535. That is, the probability of winning is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). In addition, in a low probability state (when time saving is not activated), the probability of winning may be set to a certain level (for example, 1%), and in a high probability state (when time saving is activated), there is a constant probability of winning. It may also be possible to set it to be a failure with a probability of (for example, 1%).

The table for determining the validity of special figures 1 and 2 shown in FIG. The record to be referred to is selected depending on whether it is in a special figure low probability state or a special figure high probability state. Note that this table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the special pattern low probability state of setting 1, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (approximately 1/200) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special drawings 1 and 2, and in the special pattern high probability state, As a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special drawings 1 and 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (approximately 1/199).

In the special pattern low probability state of setting 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 341/65536 (approximately 1/193) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special drawings 1 and 2, and in the special pattern high probability state, As a result of the success/failure determination of the jackpot lottery for special drawings 1 and 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (approximately 1/192).

In the special pattern low probability state of setting 3, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 363/65536 (approximately 1/181) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, and in the special pattern high probability state, As a result of the success/failure determination of the special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 jackpot lottery, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (approximately 1/180).

In the special pattern low probability state of setting 4, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 375/65536 (approximately 1/175) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, and in the special pattern high probability state, As a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special drawings 1 and 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (approximately 1/174).

In the special pattern low probability state of setting 5, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 451/65536 (approximately 1/146) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special drawings 1 and 2, and in the special pattern high probability state, As a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special drawings 1 and 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (approximately 1/145).

In the special pattern low probability state of setting 6, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (approximately 1/94) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, and in the special pattern high probability state, As a result of the success/failure determination of the jackpot lottery for special drawings 1 and 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (approximately 1/93).

In addition, regardless of any of settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether it is in a special pattern high probability state or a special pattern low probability state, 6580/65536 will be determined as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special pattern 1. A small win that opens and closes 12 times is selected with a probability (approximately 1/10), and a small win that opens and closes once is selected with a probability of 6580/65536 (approximately 1/10) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special drawing 1. be done. In addition, it is also possible to prevent a small win from occurring in special figure 1, and to cause a small win to occur only in special figure 2 (a small win that opens 12 times and a small win that opens and closes once). Further, the probability of a small hit may be made different for each setting.

In this way, in all settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special pattern high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the special pattern low probability state, but it is set so that it can be equated with almost the same probability. ing. Also, the jackpot probability differs depending on the settings; the higher the setting, the easier it is to hit the jackpot, and the lower the setting, the harder it is to hit the jackpot. Therefore, the lower the setting is, the harder it is to get a jackpot, but when the state shifts to a variable probability state, the number of small wins tends to be greater than when the setting is high, and it may be possible to provide different game characteristics.

In either setting, the jackpot probability is set to be almost the same in the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state, but the major difference is the variable display time of the special figure 2. For example, a variation time of 1 to 5 seconds is selected as the variation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure high probability state. In the special pattern high probability state, when the ball is hit to the right, many game balls are likely to enter the second special pattern starting port 232, and a large number of variable displays of the special pattern 2 can be displayed, and as a result, , the system is designed to increase the frequency of small wins. In the special figure high probability state, it can be said that the frequency of occurrence of small hits increases, so it is sometimes referred to as a "small hit rush." In addition, in a state where there are four (full) symbol fluctuation displays of special map 2 on hold, one time of special map 1 is longer than the time required to digest all the symbol fluctuation displays of special map 2. Since it takes longer to digest the symbol variation display, it is difficult for a jackpot to occur in special drawing 1. On the other hand, the variation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state is such that, for example, a variation time of 580 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the low probability state of the special chart, if you hit the right ball, the frequency of balls entering the special chart 2 starting port 232 and the small hit probability will not change, but the time until the result of the variable display of the special chart 2 is displayed is approximately Since this happens every 10 minutes, even if the player plays right-handed, it is actually disadvantageous for the player. In addition, in the special pattern low probability state, the fluctuation time of special chart 2 is set to 580 seconds for misses and small hits, but the fluctuation time for jackpots is shorter than that, for example, It is set to 227 seconds.

FIG. 8(c) shows an example of a distribution table for special symbol determination, and the stopping symbols are determined based on the result of the validity determination of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 as described above. Note that this table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special pattern determination allocation table, a random number range corresponding to the stopping pattern mode of the special pattern (see FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b)) is defined for each validity determination result.

First, if the result of the special figure 1 judgment is a jackpot, one of "special figure A" and "special figure B" is selected. As mentioned above, "Special drawing A" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning hole 234, and "Special drawing B" is a 6R certain variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234. Each selection rate is 1/2 regardless of the setting.

Moreover, if the result of the special figure 1 correctness determination is a small hit, "special figure C" is selected. As mentioned above, "Special Figure C" is a small win in which the second variable winning hole 235 repeats short openings up to 12 times.

Next, if the result of the special drawing 2 judgment is a jackpot, one of "special drawings a" to "special drawings c" is selected. As mentioned above, "Special drawing a" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning hole 234, "Special drawing b" is a 6R definite strange jackpot opened by the first variable winning hole 234, “Special drawing c” is a 10R variable jackpot that the first variable prize opening 234 opens. Regardless of the settings, each selection rate is 60/100 for "special map a", 5/100 for "special map b", and 35/100 for "special map c".

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 judgment is a small hit, "special figure d" is selected. As mentioned above, "special drawing d" is a small win in which the second variable prize opening 235 is briefly opened once.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained. FIG. 9A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 9(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300 or not.

In step S309 following step S307, production control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and according to the detection result, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190. Perform the process to change to .

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command for the various lamps 442, 452 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game platform frame lamp drive circuit 450. do. In this way, the light emitting diode D placed in the second effect movable unit 8 (see FIG. 17), the light emitting diodes DO, DI, DL placed in the lamp unit 9 (see FIG. 32), and the light emitting diode D placed in the attacker unit 23. Light emission control of the light emitting diodes D1 to D3 (see FIG. 40) is performed.

In step S317 following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the performance data read in step S309 includes a command to the first performance movable unit 7 at the top shown in FIG. 3(a) or the second performance movable unit 8 hidden at the rear side, , outputs this command to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, settings are made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 9B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 9C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (here, once every 2 ms), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period. Execute with. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 explained in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S343 following step S341, the control command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing for updating the random value for effect is performed. etc.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained. FIG. 10A is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 10(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), etc. are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400 or not.

In step S409 following step S407, production control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the decorative pattern display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If necessary, the performance data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 10(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 10(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (here, once every 2 ms), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period. Execute with. In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S443 following step S441, other processes such as updating the random number value for effect are performed.

FIG. 10D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 of VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process advances to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameter settings are performed based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), The process advances to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, the specific configuration of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. Here, FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the dip switch board 198. It is.

As described above, the accessory ratio/setting display 196 is configured to include the accessory ratio monitor and the setting monitor, and the accessory ratio monitor is configured to display the continuous accessory ratio (RY) and the accessory ratio (RY). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor is displaying the current setting value.

Here, the continuous accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls (i.e., safe balls) to be acquired that is due to the operation of the accessory when the accessory operates continuously (i.e., the first It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the variable winning hole 234 and winning a prize. In addition, it may be the ratio of the number of game balls won by winning into the first variable winning hole 234 to the number of out balls. In addition, the accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls (i.e., safe balls) to be acquired that are due to the operation of the accessory (i.e., the first special figure starting opening (variable) 231, the first variable winning opening 234, and the 2. It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the variable winning hole 235 and winning a prize. In addition, the first variable winning hole 234, the second variable winning hole 235, the first special pattern starting hole (fixed) 230, the first special pattern starting hole (variable) 231, and the second special pattern starting hole 232 for the number of out balls. It may also be the ratio of the number of game balls that are won by winning in the general winning slot.

As a result of calculating the continuous role object ratio, if it is determined that the continuous role object ratio exceeds 60%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the continuous role object ratio will be displayed blinking, and then a security signal ( RY) is output. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal that is output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. Note that the signal may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly conduct the type application test for gaming machines.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the accessory ratio will be displayed blinking, and then the security signal (YH ) is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal that is output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In addition, when the continuous character object ratio or the character object ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is made to blink, but the emitted light color may be changed, for example.

As shown in FIG. 11(B), eight dip switches are arranged on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each dip switch can be read and the appearance probability of the effect can be changed. You can set the appearance rate, entry rate of production mode, etc.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235 is not opened in the jackpot game, but only in the small winning game, but a jackpot that is opened by the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235 is prepared. It's okay. For example, as the jackpot for special drawing 2, a 3R jackpot (actually 1R jackpot), a 6R jackpot, etc., opened by the attacker of the second variable winning hole 235 instead of the first variable winning hole 234, may be prepared. .

Further, although small winnings were provided for both special drawings 1 and 2, small winnings may be provided only for special drawings 2. In other words, only for the special drawing 2, the second variable winning hole 235 may be provided with a small win in which the short opening is repeated a certain number of times (for example, 12 times) at maximum, and a small win in which the short opening is only made once. . By doing this, in the special pattern high probability regular pattern low probability state, the special pattern 1 starting opening (variable) 231 does not become the winning easy state, and the attacker of the first variable winning opening 234 is in the winning difficult state, and the first If the attacker of the 2 variable winning hole 235 is also in a difficult-to-win state, most of the game balls hit to the right will enter the 2nd special pattern starting hole 232 and win the jackpot or small hit in the special pattern 2 variable game. be able to. In particular, since the winning probability of a small winning game is higher than the winning probability of a jackpot game (for example, about 10 times higher), the second variable winning opening 235 can be used a certain number of times (for example, 12 times) at maximum. It is easy to win a small winning game that repeats short openings, and you can expect to earn a lot of balls in this small winning game.

Next, the second performance movable unit 8 will be explained. The second performance movable unit 8 has a hand movable body 81 that is shaped like a witch's hand. This hand movable body 81 is a movable body that can perform an ascending and descending motion and a rotation motion of collapsing toward the front side.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the second effect movable unit 8 with the hand movable body 81 in the initial position.

In the initial position, the hand movable body 81 is located below and on the rear side of the stage 244. FIG. 12(a) is a sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 3, with the left side being the front side. In FIG. 3, the entire second performance movable unit 8 is hidden behind the camera, but in FIG. The second effect movable unit 8 is illustrated.

A decorative symbol display device 208 (see FIG. 3), which is a liquid crystal display device (not shown), is attached to the further rear side of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 12(a). The hand movable body 81 in the initial position does not overlap the decorative pattern display device 208 from the front side, but is located below the lower edge of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 12(b) is a diagram showing the second effect movable unit 8, the stage 244, and the stage cover 245 extracted from the part surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 12(a). 13(a) is a perspective view of the game board 201 cut along the line AA′ shown in FIG. 3, showing the stage 244 and the stage cover 245 from the front side, and FIG. It is a perspective view shown from the side. In FIG. 13(a), the left front side of the figure is the front side, and in FIG. 13(b), the right front side of the figure is the rear side.

The stage 244 shown in FIG. 13 is provided in the gaming area 124. The gaming area 124 is an area between the transparent plate member 118 provided on the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. 1 and the rear surface 201b of the gaming board 201. The stage 244 is attached to the edge 201e of the opening provided in the game board 201, and is housed within the thickness of the game board 201, as shown in FIG. 13(a). A special route 244a is also shown in FIG. 13(a), and the special route 244a is a route through which game balls are ejected from the stage 244 to the front side. The stage cover 245 is a transparent cover having a back cover part 2451 and an upper cover part 2452. Note that the stage cover 245 may be a translucent cover. The back cover part 2451 protrudes toward the opening side along the edge 201e of the opening provided in the game board 201, and prevents the game ball from moving to the rear side of the stage 244. Further, the upper cover portion 2452 covers the stage 244 from above and prevents the game ball from moving above the stage 244. As shown in FIG. 13(a), the upper cover portion 2452 protrudes forward beyond the stage 244. That is, the front end 2452f of the upper cover portion 2452 is located further forward than the front surface 201f of the game board 201.

As shown in FIG. 12, the tip (fingertip) of the hand movable body 81 in the initial position is directed directly upward. That is, the posture (initial posture) of the hand movable body 81 in the initial position is such that the tip (fingertip) is facing directly upward. In FIG. 12(b), the height position of the lowest end of the stage 244 is shown by a thick two-dot chain line, and the height position of the tip (fingertip) of the hand movable body 81 in the initial position is shown by a thin two-dot chain line. There is. As is clear from the relationship between these two-dot chain lines, the tip (fingertip) of the hand movable body 81 in the initial position is located above the stage 244. Although the back cover portion 2451 is protruding, it is transparent, so that a player sitting in front of the game board 200 can see the tip of the hand movable body 81 in the initial position through the transparent back cover portion 2451. It is possible. Further, when there is a game ball on the stage 244, the game ball overlaps a part (tip portion) of the hand movable body 81 at the initial position from the front side. Note that the back cover portion 2451 may be opaque, and in this case, from the perspective of the player sitting in front of the game board 200, the hand movable body 81 in the initial position is visible from the opaque back cover portion 2451. This makes it difficult to see.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the second effect movable unit 8 with the hand movable body 81 raised to the maximum raised position. FIG. 14(a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 3 like FIG. 13(a), and the left side is the front side. FIG. 14(b) is a diagram showing the second effect movable unit 8, the stage 244, and the stage cover 245 extracted from the part surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 14(a).

The hand movable body 81 shown in FIG. 14 moves up to the maximum raised position and rotates toward the front side, so that the tip portion (fingertip portion) of the hand movable body 81 is located above the stage 244. ing. That is, as will be described later, the hand movable body 81 performs an action of turning the wrist while rising, and the tip portion (fingertip portion) advances forward. As shown in FIG. 14, the tip (fingertip) of the hand movable body 81 at the maximum raised position faces obliquely upward. That is, the posture of the hand movable body 81 at the maximum raised position (maximum movement posture) is such that the tip (fingertip) faces diagonally upward.

The finger portion of the hand movable body 81 at the maximum raised position overlaps the lower side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 (not shown here) from the front side. That is, the finger portion of the hand movable body 81 at the maximum raised position is located above the lower edge of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In FIG. 14(b), the vertical plane vp1 facing the front side is illustrated by a thick two-dot chain line. This vertical plane vp1 is a plane substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118 provided on the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. 1, and is a plane facing the player sitting in front of the game board 200. A plurality of vertical planes (vp1, vp2, etc.) overlap the stage 244 in the front-rear direction, and the vertical plane vp1 shown by the thick two-dot chain line in FIG. This vertical surface is a surface that extends along the back cover section 2451 on the front side of the back cover section 2451 of the stage cover 245 . A part of the hand movable body 81 shown in FIG. 14(b) is located at a position on this vertical plane vp1, and the tip portion of the hand movable body 81 that has been rotated forward is on this vertical plane vp1. Beyond that, it protrudes further forward. The frontmost end of the hand movable body 81 that has performed the rotation operation has reached a position near the vertical plane vp2 indicated by the thin two-dot chain line, which extends to the frontmost side of the stage 244, but the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. It may advance forward until it comes into contact with the transparent plate member 118 provided thereon, or until one step before it comes into contact with it. That is, a part of the hand movable body 81 may be located in front of the game ball on the stage 244, or a part of the hand movable body 81 may be located in front of the game ball on the game board 200. It may be located forward of the tip of the nail.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the operation of the hand movable body 81. In FIG. 15, the diagonally right front side of the figure is the front side.

FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the hand movable body 81 is at the initial position, which is the same state as the second effect movable unit 8 shown in FIG. 12. In addition to the hand movable body 81, the second performance movable unit 8 includes a unit base 80, a drive motor 82, a rotating member 83, a lifting arm 84, a movable base 85, and a slide base 86 (see FIG. 15(b) and FIG. 16). , and a side guide 87.

FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the second performance movable unit 8, with the unit base 80 omitted and the hand movable body 81 in the initial position, as seen from the rear side, and diagonally to the left of the figure. The side becomes the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), a drive motor 82 is attached to the left side of the unit base 80. Further, one end portion (left end portion) of the lifting arm 84 is rotatably supported by the unit base 80 below the drive motor 82. The other end portion (right end portion) of the lifting arm 84 is connected to a slide base 86 (see FIG. 17(b)), and the wrist side of the hand movable body 81 is attached to the slide base 86. FIG. 16A shows a part of the mounting screw 861 that attaches the hand movable body 81 to the slide base 86.

Further, the hand movable body 81 is locked to a movable base 85 installed behind the hand movable body 81 via a slide base 86. The movable base 85 shown in FIG. 16(a) is movable up and down along a slide rail 803 attached to the unit base 80 (see FIG. 15), and movable grooves 852 are provided on both sides of the slide rail 803. There is. A locking protrusion 862 is inserted into the movable groove 852 from the slide base 86 to which the hand movable body 81 is attached so as to be movable up and down within the movable groove 852. Therefore, the hand movable body 81 can move up and down with respect to the movable base 85.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), the unit base 80 is provided with a pair of upper and lower guide grooves 801 spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction, and a back projection 851 on the back surface of the movable base 85 (see FIG. 16). is inserted into the vertical guide groove 801, and the movable base 85 is vertically movable relative to the unit base 80. Therefore, the hand movable body 81 can also move up and down with respect to the unit base 80 via the movable base 85.

A rotary lever 88 shown in FIG. 16(a) is attached to the hand movable body 81, and a rotary protrusion 881 is provided at the end of the rotary lever 88. The rotation protrusion 881 is inserted into a side groove 871 provided in the side guide 87 so as to be able to move up and down within the side groove 871. The side groove 871 is provided with a sloped portion 8711 that slopes rearward as it goes upward from the lower end, and a vertical portion 8712 that extends straight upward is provided above the sloped portion 8711.

The rotating member 83 has a gear portion 831 and an arm portion 832. The gear portion 831 meshes with a rotating gear 821 (see FIG. 16(a)) of the drive motor 82. The arm portion 832 has an intermediate protrusion 8321 (see FIGS. 15(b) and 16(a)) at the intermediate portion, and a tip protrusion 8322 at the distal end portion. As shown in FIG. 15, the intermediate protrusion 8321 is inserted into an arcuate guide groove 802 provided in the unit base 80. Further, the tip protrusion 8322 is inserted into a linear guide groove 841 provided in the lifting arm 84. The tip of the arm portion 832 shown in FIG. 15(a) faces downward, and the intermediate protrusion 8321 of the arm portion 832 is located at the lower end side of the arc-shaped guide groove 802. Further, the lifting arm 84 shown in FIG. 15(a) extends in the left-right direction at the lower end portion of the unit base 80. That is, the elevating arm 84 is in a lying state, and the tip projection 8322 of the arm portion 832 shown in FIG. 15(a) is located on the left end side of the linear guide groove 841.

When the drive motor 82 rotates forward, the gear portion 831 rotates, and the intermediate protrusion 8321 of the arm portion 832 is guided by the arcuate guide groove 802 to rotate. As a result, the tip protrusion 8322 of the arm portion 832 slides toward the right side of the linear guide groove 841, and the elevating arm 84 is moved to the other end opposite to the rotatably supported end (left end). Perform a pivoting motion so that the end portion is lifted. Note that a spring member 843 is provided at one end portion (left end portion) of the lifting arm 84 to bias it in a direction opposite to the rotation direction. When the other end portion of the lifting arm 84 is lifted against the biasing force of the spring member 843, the hand movable body 81 first moves when the locking protrusion 862 shown in FIG. By rising along the groove 852, it moves upward. Eventually, when the locking protrusion 862 rises until it comes into contact with the upper edge of the movable groove 852, the movable base 85 moves up along the pair of upper and lower guide grooves 801 provided in the unit base 80 shown in FIG. By doing so, the hand movable body 81 continues to rise.

As the hand movable body 81 rises, the rotation protrusion 881 shown in FIG. 16 moves up the inclined portion 8711 of the side groove 871. As the rotation protrusion 881 ascends the inclined portion 8711 of the side groove 871, the distance between the wrist portion of the hand movable body 81 and the unit base 80 becomes narrower, and the hand movable body 81 is moved up the rotation provided on the slide base 86. It gradually rotates toward the front side to ensure a space around the moving axis 864 (see FIG. 17(b)).

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the rotation protrusion 881 has finished moving up the inclined portion 8711 of the side groove 871. The hand movable body 81 shown in FIG. 15(b) rotates so as to fall forward, and appears to have turned its wrist.

FIG. 16(b) is a perspective view of the second effect movable unit 8, with the unit base 80 omitted and the rotation protrusion 881 having finished rising up the inclined portion 8711 of the side groove 871, as seen from the rear side. The diagonally left front side in the figure is the rear side.

The locking protrusion 862 shown in FIG. 16(b) is in contact with the upper edge of the movable groove 852, and the movable base 85 is raised until it comes out of the slide rail 803. Furthermore, the rotation protrusion 881 shown in FIG. 16(b) has reached the boundary between the inclined portion 8711 and the vertical portion 8712 of the side groove 871.

FIG. 15(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the hand movable body 81 has been raised to the maximum raised position, and is the same as the second effect movable unit 8 shown in FIG. 14.

Further, FIG. 17(a) is a perspective view of the hand movable body 81 that has been raised to the maximum raised position, when the front side member is removed and the hand movable body 81 is looked up from slightly below. In FIG. 17(a), the diagonally right front side of the figure is the front side.

The hand movable body 81 has a front member including the back of the hand and a back member 811 including the palm of the hand, which are screwed together. FIG. 17A shows an LED board 813 in which a plurality of light emitting diodes D are mounted in a row in the left and right direction inside the hand movable body 81 from which the front side member has been removed. This LED board 813 is provided on the wrist, and the plurality of mounted light emitting diodes D face toward the fingertips. A light guide plate in the shape of a slightly smaller hand (not shown here) is disposed inside the back side member 811 and the front side member of the hand movable body 81, and the light from the light emitting diode D is transmitted through the thickness surface of the light guide plate ( (end face). The light emitting diode D shown in FIG. 17(a) faces obliquely upward. This is because the light emitting diode D is built into the wrist part of the hand movable body 81, and as the hand movable body 81 rotates so as to fall forward, the light emitting diode D also faces diagonally upward. It's in a similar position. On the other hand, when the hand movable body 81 is in the initial position as shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. It has become. The posture of the light emitting diode D continues to change while the hand movable body 81 is rotating. The light emitting diode D built into the wrist portion of the hand movable body 81 may emit light when the hand movable body 81 is at its initial position, or may emit light while the hand movable body 81 is moving up or down. For example, the hand movable body 81 may emit light when it reaches its maximum raised position, or it may emit light while it is at its maximum raised position. Since the posture of the light emitting diode D continues to change while the hand movable body 81 is rotating, the direction in which light is emitted from the light emitting diode D also continues to change.

FIG. 17(b) is a perspective view of the hand movable body 81 with the back side member 811 and the LED board 813 removed, as seen from slightly above. The side becomes the front side.

FIG. 17(b) shows a connection structure between the other end portion (right end portion) of the lifting arm 84 and the slide base 86. The slide base 86 is provided with an escape groove 863 extending in the left-right direction. A protrusion 842 provided at the other end (right end) of the lifting arm 84 is inserted into the relief groove 863 so as to be movable in the left-right direction within the relief groove 863. When the hand movable body 81 is in the initial position, the protrusion 842 of the lifting arm 84 is located at the right end of the relief groove 863, but the other end (right end) is lifted by the rotation of the lifting arm 84. Then, the protrusion 842 moves to the left in the relief groove 863, and when the hand movable body 81 rises to the maximum raised position, the protrusion 842 reaches the left end of the relief groove 863.

FIG. 17(b) also shows a rotation axis 864, which is the center of rotation of the hand movable body 81 as the rotation protrusion 881 moves up the slope 8711 of the side groove 871. There is. A rotation lever spring 865 is attached to this rotation shaft 864. The rotating lever spring 865 biases the hand movable body 81 in the direction opposite to the direction in which it rotates forward, and as the hand movable body 81 rises from the initial position, it is influenced by the biasing force of the rotating lever spring 865. It resists and rotates forward.

When the drive motor 82 rotates in the reverse direction, the tip projection 8322 of the arm portion 832 slides toward the left side of the linear guide groove 841, and the lifting arm 84 rotates so that the other end (right end) is pushed down. Then, the hand movable body 81 descends toward the initial position. Further, when the rotation protrusion 881 descends along the inclined portion 8711, the hand movable body 81 performs a rotation operation of rising rearward. In other words, perform a motion that appears to return the wrist to its original position.

According to the above description,
“A movable body [e.g., hand movable body 81],
A game area where the game ball flows down [for example, the game area 124],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body is placed in a first position [for example, an initial position] that is rearward of a certain area provided in the game area (hereinafter referred to as the "first area") [for example, the stage 244]. It is possible to locate
At least a portion of the movable body [e.g., the fingertip portion] is arranged on a vertical plane facing forward that spans the rearmost side of the first region [e.g., a vertical plane indicated by a thick two-dot chain line in FIG. plane vp1] is capable of being located at a second position [e.g., maximum elevation position];
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, the motion of the movable body can be emphasized and shown to the player using the game ball in the first area as a comparison target.

Note that at least a portion of the movable body may be capable of being positioned on a vertical plane that spans the most front side of the first region and is composed of a front side surface and a rear side surface. .

At least a portion of the movable body may be able to be located forward of the first region.

At least a portion referred to herein may be the front end of the movable body, or may be a portion behind the front end.

A part of the movable body may be able to be located at the second position, or the entire movable body may be capable of being located at the second position. It's okay.

The second position may be above the first region, below the first region, on the left side, or on the right side. It's okay. That is, it may be any position extending radially from the first region.

Also,
"The movable body has a light emitting means [for example, an LED board 813],
The light emitting means is a means whose attitude changes when the movable body moves from one of the first position and the second position to the other [e.g. The posture changes between the posture facing the
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The light emitting means is a light emitting diode mounted on a substrate [for example, LED board 813],
When the movable body moves from one of the first position and the second position to the other, the direction of light emission from the light emitting diode changes;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"Comprising a first drive means [for example, a drive motor 82],
The movable body moves from one of the first position and the second position to the other by a first operation (for example, forward rotation) of the first driving means [for example, from the initial position to maximum raised position],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``Comprising a stage cover [e.g., stage cover 245],
The first region is a stage [e.g., stage 244],
The second position is a position above the stage,
The stage cover is something that prevents the game ball from moving to the rear side of the stage [for example, the back cover part 2451],
The stage cover is something that also prevents the game ball from moving above the stage [for example, the upper cover part 2452],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the stage is an area where the game ball stays for a long time. For example, this may be an area where the game ball reciprocates within the stage, resulting in a longer residence time for the game ball, or where the game ball moves downward more slowly than when it is bounced by a game nail on the game board and flows down. It may be the area you are heading towards.

Further, a part of the movable body may be located in front of the game balls on the stage, or in front of the tips of the game nails on the game board. good.

Also,
“The stage cover is transparent or translucent,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``Equipped with presentation means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
When the movable body is located at the first position, the movable body does not overlap the presentation means,
When the movable body is located at the second position, at least a portion (for example, a finger portion) of the movable body overlaps the presentation means;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, when the movable body is located at the first position, it does not overlap the presentation means from the front side, and when it is located at the second position, at least a portion of the movable body overlaps the presentation means. They overlap from the front side.

When the movable body is located at the second position, the movable body may partially or entirely overlap the presentation means.

The presentation means may be a display means.

The stage may be provided below the display means.

The movable body may further include a movable part. For example, a movable part may be provided in which the fingers of the hand movable body 81 extend.

a second movable area provided in the game area (hereinafter referred to as "second area") that can be located on the rear side of a certain area (for example, the same stage 244 as the first area); [For example, when the movable body is a right hand, the second movable body may be a left hand movable body], and at least a part of the second movable body is a left hand movable body. It may be possible to position it on a vertical plane facing the front side and spanning the rearmost side of the area.

The second area may be the same area as the first area, or may be a different area.

Next, the first performance movable unit 7 will be explained.

FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the falling operation of the first effect movable unit 7.

The first performance movable unit 7 has an elevating unit 71, and a left base 72 and a right base 73 that support the elevating unit 71 on the left and right sides. As shown in FIG. 3, the left base 72 and the right base 73 are hidden by a decorative panel or the like and are not visible to the player. A left motor 721 is arranged above the left base 72, and a right motor 731 is arranged above the right base 73.

FIG. 18(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the elevating unit 71 is at the initial position. That is, it shows the same state as the state of the first effect movable unit 7 shown in FIG. FIG. 19(a) is a perspective view of the first effect movable unit 7 shown in FIG. 18(a) seen from the rear side, and the front right side in the figure is the rear side. Further, since FIG. 19(a) is a diagram seen from the rear side, the left side of the diagram is the right side when viewed from the front side, and the right side of the diagram is the left side when viewed from the front side. In the explanation using FIG. 19(a), the left and right direction will be explained based on the view from the front side. In FIG. 19A, the rear cover members are removed from the left base 72 and the right base 73, and the internal structures of the left base 72 and the right base 73 are shown. As shown in FIG. 19(a), inside the left base 72, there is a left running belt 722 that circulates by the drive of the left motor 721, and a left push-up member 723 fixed to the left running belt 722, which are arranged in the front and rear. Left guide rods 7241 and 7242, each extending in the vertical direction, are arranged. Inside the right base 73, a right running belt 732 that circulates by the drive of the right motor 731, a right push-up member 733 fixed to the right running belt 732, and a right push-up member 733 are arranged in the front and rear, each extending in the vertical direction. Right guide rods 7341 and 7342 are arranged.

Further, a lock unit 74 is arranged between the upper end portion of the left base 72 and the upper end portion of the right base 73. The lock unit 74 is arranged at the rear side of the elevating unit 71 and is a unit for holding the elevating unit 71 at an initial position. The lock unit 74 includes a pre-lock cover 740f that forms the front surface of the lock unit 74, a post-lock cover 740b that forms the rear surface of the lock unit 74, a drive gear 741 provided on the post-lock cover 740b, and a drive gear 741 that is provided on the post-lock cover 740b. It has a lock arm 742 provided with a linear gear 7421 that meshes with the lock arm 742, and lever members 743 provided on both sides of the lock arm 742 in the left and right direction. The drive gear 741 rotates under the drive of a motor (not shown) provided between the pre-lock cover 74Of and the post-lock cover 740b. When the motor rotates in the forward direction, the lock arm 742 engaged with the drive gear 741 slides to the right in FIG. 19(a) (see arrow S1), and the lever member 743 rotates toward the rear (arrow (See R1). The left and right lever members 743 are each engaged with a lock member 744 (see FIG. 22). The locking member 744 protrudes from the pre-lock cover 74Of toward the elevating unit 71, and the protruding portion of the locking member 744 engages with the elevating unit 71 to hold the elevating unit 71 at the initial position. When the lever member 743 rotates toward the rear side, the lock member 744 retreats and is disengaged from the lifting unit 71, so that the lifting unit 71 is no longer held at the initial position and falls. When the motor that drives the drive gear 741 rotates in the forward direction until the lock member 744 is disengaged, the motor switches to the opposite direction, the lock arm 742 slides to the left, and the lever member 743 moves forward. Rotate towards the side. As a result, the locking member 744 returns to the forwardly protruding position.

Furthermore, the left base 72 is provided with a left slider 725 that connects to the left end of the lifting unit 71, and the right base 73 is provided with a right slider 735 that connects to the right end of the lifting unit 71. A left guide rod 7241 on the front side is inserted into the left slider 725 . A right guide rod 7341 on the front side is inserted through the right slider 735. The elevating unit 71 performs a falling operation by having the left slider 725 guided by the left guide bar 7241 on the front side and the right slider 735 being guided by the right guide bar 7341 on the front side. Further, the left slider 725 is connected to the tip of a band member 7450 (see FIG. 19(b)) provided on the left constant force spring 745L, and the right slider 735 is connected to the tip portion of a band member 7450 (see FIG. 19(b)) provided on the right constant force spring 745R. The tip portion of the band member 7451 (see FIG. 19(b)) is connected. These constant force springs 745L, 745R are provided for the purpose of reducing the falling speed of the elevating unit 71, and keep the pulling torque of the band members 7450, 7451 constant.

FIG. 18(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the elevating unit 71 is in the falling position. At the falling position, the elevating unit 71 overlaps the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, which is a liquid crystal display device, from the front side. However, this falling position is above the maximum raised position of the hand movable body 81 in the second effect movable unit 8 shown in FIG. There is no interference with the fingertip portion of the body 81.

The elevating unit 71 is equipped with two types of movable bodies: a logo movable body 712 and a character movable body 713. The logo movable body 712 and the character movable body 713 are arranged side by side in the front-back direction. That is, the logo movable body 712 is placed relatively on the front side, and the character movable body 713 is placed relatively on the rear side. In FIG. 18(b), both the logo movable body 712 and the character movable body 713 arranged on the rear side thereof are located at the initial position and are in the initial posture. From a player sitting in front of the game board 200, the logo movable body 712 is easier to see than the character movable body 713 in the initial position, but the character movable body 713 in the initial position is It is difficult to see in comparison.

In the elevating unit 71 located at the falling position, the logo movable body 712 performs a production operation. The logo movable body 712 has a left logo portion 712L and a right logo portion 712R.

FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the logo movable body 712 viewed from the rear side, and the front right side in the figure is the rear side. Like FIG. 19(a), this figure 20 is also a view seen from the rear side, so the left side of the figure is the right side when seen from the front side, and the right side of the figure is the left side when seen from the front side. become. In the explanation here, the left and right direction will be explained based on the view from the front side.

FIG. 20(a) is a perspective view of the logo movable body 712 of the elevating unit 71 shown in FIG. 18(a), viewed from the rear side, and the front right side in the figure is the rear side. In FIG. 20(a), the rear side members (character movable body 713, etc.) of the elevating unit 71 are omitted from illustration.

The first performance movable unit 7 has a gear rack member 70. As will be described in detail later, the gear rack member 70 is a plate member that is movable in the left-right direction in response to the driving force of a motor (not shown). The gear rack member 70 shown in FIG. 20(a) is located at the initial position. Further, both the left logo portion 712L and the right logo portion 712R shown in FIG. 20(a) are located at the initial position and have an initial posture.

A logo movable body mounting plate 75 is provided between the left logo portion 712L and the right logo portion 712R and the gear rack member 70.

The gear rack member 70 is formed with a left groove 70L and a right groove 70R. A first left protrusion 712L1 provided on the rear surface of the left logo portion 712L is inserted into the left groove 70L. Furthermore, a first right protrusion 712R1 provided on the rear surface of the right logo portion 712R is inserted into the right groove 70R. The first left protrusion 712L1 of the left logo portion 712L in the initial position shown in FIG. 20(a) is located at the right end of the left groove 70L, that is, at the upper end of the slope provided in the left groove 70L. The first right protrusion 712R1 of the right logo portion 712R in the initial position shown in FIG. 20(a) is a portion extending further to the right from the right end of the right groove 70R, that is, from the upper end of the slope provided in the right groove 70R. It is located in

Further, a connecting portion 705 provided at the upper right corner (upper left corner in FIG. 20(a)) of the gear rack member 70 is connected to a second right protrusion 712R2 provided on the rear surface of the right logo portion 712R. .

FIG. 20(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the gear rack member 70 shown in FIG. 20(a) is removed.

In addition to the first left protrusion 712L1, a second left protrusion 712L2 is provided on the rear surface of the left logo portion 712L. A first left groove 751 and a second left groove 752 are formed in the logo movable body mounting plate 75 . Both the first left groove 751 and the second left groove 752 are arc-shaped grooves diagonally downward to the right (diagonally downward to the left in FIG. 20(b)). The first left protrusion 712L1 is inserted into the first left groove 751, and as shown in FIG. 20(a), the first left protrusion 712L1 is further inserted into the left groove 70L of the gear rack member 70. The first left protrusion 712L1 shown in FIG. 20(b) is located above the first left groove 751. A second left protrusion 712L2 is inserted into the second left groove 752, and the second left protrusion 712L2 shown in FIG. 20(b) is located above the second left groove 752.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 20(b), a first right groove 753 and a second right groove 754 are formed in the logo movable body mounting plate 75. Both the first right groove 753 and the second right groove 754 are linear grooves that are diagonally downward to the right (diagonally downward to the left in FIG. 20(b)). The first right protrusion 712R1 is inserted into the first right groove 753, and as shown in FIG. 20(a), the first right protrusion 712R1 is further inserted into the right groove 70R of the gear rack member 70. The first right protrusion 712R1 shown in FIG. 20(b) is located above the first right groove 753. Moreover, the second right protrusion 712R2 is inserted into the second right groove 754. The second right protrusion 712R2 shown in FIG. 20(b) is located above the second right groove 754.

FIG. 18(c) is a diagram showing how the logo movable body 712 performs a presentation operation. In this performance operation, the left logo section 712L rotates in a counterclockwise direction, and the right logo section 712R rotates in a clockwise direction. When the logo movable body 712 performs the performance action, the character movable body 713 becomes easier to see than before the performance action is performed.

FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the logo movable body 712 shown in FIG. 18(c) viewed from the rear side, and the front right side in the figure is the rear side. Like FIG. 20, this FIG. 21 is also a view seen from the rear side, so the left side of the figure is the right side when viewed from the front side, and the right side of the figure is the left side when viewed from the front side. In the explanation here, the left and right direction will be explained based on the view from the front side.

In FIG. 21(a), as in FIG. 20(a), the members on the rear side of the elevating unit 71 (character movable body 713, etc.) are not shown. The gear rack member 70 shown in FIG. 21(a) has moved to the right side (left side in FIG. 21(a)).

FIG. 21(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the gear rack member 70 shown in FIG. 21(a) is removed.

The first left protrusion 712L1 shown in FIG. 21(b) is guided by the arc-shaped first left groove 751 and is located at an intermediate position of the first left groove 751. Further, the second left protrusion 712L2 shown in FIG. 21(b) is guided by the arc-shaped second left groove 752 and is located at an intermediate position of the second left groove 752. Due to the movement of the first left protrusion 712L1 and the second left protrusion 712L2 provided on the rear surface of the left logo part 712L, the left logo part 712L moves in a counterclockwise direction (in the clockwise direction indicated by arrow Ra in FIG. 21). ).

Moreover, the first right protrusion 712R1 shown in FIG. 21(b) is guided by the first right groove 753 and is located at an intermediate position of the first right groove 753. Further, the second right protrusion 712R2 shown in FIG. 21(b) is guided by the second right groove 754 and is located at an intermediate position of the second right groove 754. By the movement of these first right protrusion 712R1 and second right protrusion 712R2 provided on the rear surface of the right logo part 712R, the right logo part 712R moves in a clockwise direction (in the counterclockwise direction indicated by arrow Rb in FIG. 21). direction).

When the gear rack member 70 moves to the left (right in FIG. 21), both the left logo portion 712L and the right logo portion 712R return to their initial positions.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing how the character movable body 713 performs a performance motion. FIG. 22 shows the lock member 744 which has returned to a position protruding forward from the front lock cover 740f.

When the presentation operation of the logo movable body 712 is completed, the character movable body 713 placed on the rear side starts its presentation operation. The character movable body 713 has a left character part 713L and a right character part 713R. Note that a sticker with a character's face printed on it is actually pasted on the front of both the left character part 713L and the right character part 713R.

The left side character part 713L is arranged in front of the right side character part 713R. The initial posture of both the left side character part 713L and the right side character part 713R is in a lying position. When the performance operation is started, the right side character part 713R performs a rotation movement in a clockwise direction so that the left side is lifted up. In the right side collar portion 713R shown in FIG. 22, the tip portion is raised to nearly 90° and rotated from the front side of the pre-lock cover 740f to a position where it overlaps the pre-lock cover 740f. The left side character part 713L rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the rotational movement of the right side character part 713R so that the right side is lifted. A mechanical explanation of the effect movement of the character movable body 713 will be described later.

FIG. 19(b) is a perspective view of the first effect movable unit 7 shown in FIG. 22 viewed from the rear side, and the front right side in the figure is the rear side. Like Figure 19(a), this Figure 19(b) is also a view seen from the rear side, so the left side of the figure is the right side when viewed from the front side, and the right side of the figure is the view from the front side. It will be on the left side of the time. In the explanation here, the left and right direction will be explained based on the view from the front side.

Also, in FIG. 19(b), as in FIG. 19(a), the rear cover members are removed from each of the left base 72 and right base 73, and the internal structure of each of the left base 72 and right base 73 is shown. It is shown. A left rear base portion 726 is attached to the left slider 725, and a right rear base portion 736 is attached to the right slider 735. A rear left guide rod 7242 is inserted through the left rear base portion 726, and a rear right guide rod 7342 is inserted through the right rear base portion 736. The left push-up member 723 fixed to the left running belt 722 is in contact with the left rear base part 726 from below, and the right push-up member 733 fixed to the right running belt 732 is in contact with the right rear base part 736 from below. It is in contact with the

When the performance movement of the character movable body 713 is completed, the character movable body 713 performs a return operation toward the initial position at the falling position, and when the return operation is completed, the logo movable body 712 also returns to the initial position. Execute the return operation.

Further, the elevating unit 71 performs an elevating operation from the drop position to the initial position. In this rising operation, the left side motor 721 and the right side motor 731 are driven in synchronization, and the left traveling belt 722 circulates, so that the left push-up member 723 rises, and the left rear base portion 726 is attached to the left push-up member 723 that is rising. is pressed. Further, as the right traveling belt 732 circulates, the right push-up member 733 rises, and the right rear base portion 736 is pushed by the rising right push-up member 733. The lifting unit 71 moves from the falling position to the initial position by having the left rear base part 726 guided by the left guide bar 7242 on the rear side and the right rear base part 736 being guided by the right guide bar 7342 on the rear side. Perform an upward movement while maintaining a horizontal position. The lifting unit 71, which has returned to the vicinity of the initial position, once pushes down the locking member 744 (see FIG. 22) protruding forward, and returns to the initial position. When the lifting unit 71 returns to the initial position, the locking member 744 also returns to the forwardly protruding position, and the locking member 744 engages with the lifting unit 71. In this way, the elevating unit 71 is held at the initial position.

FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing a state in which the logo movable body 712 is removed from the elevating unit 71. In FIG. 23, the front left side of the figure is the front side.

FIG. 23 shows a gear rack member 70 that is movable in the left-right direction. In this gear rack member 70, an upper rack gear 701 is provided at the center of the upper edge, and a lower rack gear 702 is provided toward the left side from the right end of the lower edge. Furthermore, a locking protrusion 703 that protrudes toward the rear side is provided at the upper right corner of the gear rack member 70. Note that the connecting portion 705 described using FIG. 20 is provided on the front side opposite to the locking protrusion 703.

The elevating unit 71 has a base plate 711 on the rear surface. A motor 7111 for moving the gear rack member 70 is attached to the base plate 711. Further, the elevating unit 71 is provided with a lower gear 714. The driving force of the motor 7111 is transmitted to the lower gear 714 through a gear train. The lower gear 714 meshes with the lower rack gear 702 of the gear rack member 70. The gear rack member 70 shown in FIG. 23 is in an initial position closer to the left side, and the lower gear 714 is meshed with the right end portion of the lower rack gear 702. That is, in FIG. 23, the gear rack member 70 shown from the rear side in FIG. 20(a) is shown from the front side.

Further, the elevating unit 71 is also provided with an upper gear 715. The upper gear 715 has a front gear 7151 and a rear gear 7152. The front gear 7151 is a gear that can mesh with the upper rack gear 701, but the front gear 7151 shown in FIG. 23 does not mesh with the upper rack gear 701.

Both the right side character part 713R and the left side character part 713L shown in FIG. 23 are located at the initial position, and are in a lying position (initial position). The right end portion of the right side collar portion 713R is rotatably supported by a base plate 711 on the rear surface, and a spring 7131 is attached around the rotation axis. This spring 7131 biases the right side collar portion 713R in a direction opposite to the direction in which the right side collar portion 713R rotates clockwise so that the left side thereof is lifted. Further, a right side character lever 7132 is attached to the right side character portion 713R.

FIG. 24(a) is an enlarged view of the right side character lever 7132 shown in FIG. 23 and its periphery from diagonally above.

The right side character lever 7132 is provided with a gear portion 7132a and a locking groove 7132b. The gear portion 7132a meshes with the rear gear 7152 of the upper gear 715.

The right side character lever 7132 attached to the right side character part 713R in the initial position is in a position facing diagonally downward to the left, as shown in FIG. 24(a). That is, it is in a posture facing toward the gear rack member 70 which is in the initial position closer to the left side, and this posture becomes the initial posture of the right side character lever 7132.

The locking protrusion 703 of the gear rack member 70 in the initial position is inserted into the locking groove 7132b of the right character lever 7132 in the initial position. The locking groove 7132b is a groove that is open in the right direction, but is closed in the vertical direction. As shown in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), the elevating unit 71 falls from the initial position to the falling position. At this time, as described above, although the falling speed of the elevating unit 71 is reduced by the left constant force spring 745L and the right constant force spring 745R shown in FIGS. 19 and 22, when it stops at the falling position, an inertial force acts. However, an upward bouncing force is applied to the lifting unit 71. As a result, the relative position of the right side character portion 713R with respect to the elevating unit 71 changes. In particular, since the right side character part 713R is longer than the logo movable body 712 and the left side character part 713L, when it bounces upward, the movement of the left end tends to be noticeable. As shown in FIG. 24(a), the front gear 7151 of the upper gear 715 does not mesh with the upper rack gear 701 of the gear rack member 70. As shown in FIG. Although details will be described later, the driving force (rotational force) of the motor 7111 is not transmitted to the right side character portion 713R. That is, a driving force transmission mechanism in which various gear members mesh so that the driving force (rotational force) of the motor 7111 is transmitted to the right side collar portion 713R has not yet been formed. If a driving force transmission mechanism is formed, deviation exceeding backlash is not allowed, but if a driving force transmission mechanism is not formed, deviation (bounce upward) of the right side collar portion 713R is allowed. become.

However, since the locking protrusion 703 of the gear rack member 70 has entered the locking groove 7132b of the lever 7132 for the right side collar, even if an upward bouncing force is applied to the right side collar portion 713R when the fall is stopped, the locking protrusion 703 collides with the lower wall of the locking groove 7132b, and the right side collar portion 713R is prevented from bouncing upward. As mentioned above, the left side character part 713L is linked to the rotational movement of the right side character part 713R, so if the right side character part 713R is prevented from bouncing upward, the left side character part 713L is also prevented from bouncing upward. It will be done.

FIG. 24(b) is a perspective view showing a state in which the gear rack member 70 has been moved slightly to the right by driving the motor 7111 from an initial position closer to the left. Also in FIG. 24(b), the front left side of the figure is the front side. In FIG. 24(b), the gear rack member 70 shown from the rear side in FIG. 21(a) is shown from the front side.

The gear rack member 70 shown in FIG. 24(b) is in a state where the lower gear 714 rotates clockwise (see arrow R2) and has moved slightly to the right (see arrow S2). As shown in FIG. 24(a), in the initial position of the gear rack member 70, which is closer to the left side, the locking protrusion 703 is inserted into the locking groove 7132b of the right side character lever 7132; The illustrated locking protrusion 703 has come out of the locking groove 7132b. That is, the locking protrusion 703 that was in the locking groove 7132b, which is open on the right side, has come out to the right as the gear rack member 70 moves to the right. Therefore, while the logo movable body 712 is performing the production operation, the locking protrusion 703 comes out of the locking groove 7132b, and the restriction of the locking protrusion 703 on the right side character part 713R is released.

Note that the front gear 7151 of the upper gear 715 shown in FIG. 24(b) is located right next to the upper rack gear 701 because the gear rack member 70 has moved slightly to the right, but the front gear 7151 of the upper gear 715 shown in FIG. has not yet been reached.

As the motor 7111 is further driven and the lower gear 714 continues to rotate clockwise, the front gear 7151 meshes with the upper rack gear 701 and the upper gear 715 starts rotating. When the upper gear 715 starts rotating, the right side character lever 7132 meshed with the rear gear 7152 starts rotating. That is, the right side character lever 7132, which has been in a position facing diagonally downward to the left, begins to rotate clockwise and changes to a position facing diagonally upwardly to the right. In accordance with the rotation of the right character lever 7132, the right character part 713R to which the right character lever 7132 is attached also starts rotating clockwise so that the left side is lifted. Therefore, after the execution of the presentation motion of the logo movable body 712 is completed, the execution of the presentation motion of the character movable body 713 is started.

FIG. 25(a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the logo movable body 712 is removed from the elevating unit 71 in which the character movable body 713 is performing a performance motion. Also in FIG. 25, the front left side of the figure is the front side. The character movable body 713 shown in FIG. 25 is the same as the character movable body 713 shown in FIG. 19(b) and the character movable body 713 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), an arc-shaped guide groove 7112 is formed in the base plate 711. A protrusion 7133 provided on the rear surface of the right side collar portion 713R is inserted into this arc-shaped guide groove 7112. The protrusion 7133 of the right side character portion 713R is guided by the guide groove 7112 to perform a rotational operation. The protrusion 7133 shown in FIG. 19(b) is located at the upper end of the arc-shaped guide groove 7112.

The gear rack member 70 shown in FIG. 25(a) has been moved to the rightmost position, and the right character lever 7132 is in a position facing diagonally upward to the right. Further, the right side character portion 713R shown in FIG. 25 has a tip portion raised to nearly 90°, and is in a state where it has been rotated to the maximum rotation position.

Furthermore, the left side character portion 713L shown in FIG. 25(a) also rotates, and the right side is raised. An interlocking lever 7134 is arranged behind the upper gear 715.

FIG. 25(b) is a diagram in which the upper gear 715 shown in FIG. 25(a) is removed so that the interlocking lever 7134 disposed behind the upper gear 715 can be seen.

An interlocking lever 7134 is attached to the front surface of the right side collar portion 713R, and this interlocking lever 7134 abuts the lower edge of the left side collar portion 713L from below. Therefore, the interlocking lever 7134 rotates together with the right side collar portion 713R and pushes up the left side collar portion 713L from below. In this way, the left side character part 713L rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis 7135 provided on the left side in conjunction with the rotational movement of the right side character part 713R so that the right side is lifted up. . The left side character part 713L shown in FIG. 25 is also in a state of being rotated to the maximum rotation position in conjunction with the right side character part 713R.

When the motor 7111 is driven in the opposite direction, the gear rack member 70 starts moving leftward and returns to the initial position. When the gear rack member 70 moves to the left, the upper gear 715 starts to rotate in reverse, and the right side character lever 7132 meshed with the rear gear 7152 is reversed toward the initial position facing diagonally downward to the left as shown in FIG. Rotate. As the right character lever 7132 rotates in the reverse direction toward the initial position, the right character part 713R also rotates in the reverse direction toward the initial position.

A tension spring 7136 is provided in the vicinity of the rotation shaft 7135 on the left side collar portion 713L. When the push-up of the interlocking lever 7134 is released in accordance with the reverse rotation of the right side collar portion 713R, the left side collar portion 713L also rotates in the reverse direction toward the initial position due to the biasing force of the tension spring 7136.

In addition, in the explanation here, since the presentation operation of the logo movable body 712 and the presentation operation of the character movable body 713 are operations using the common gear rack member 70, the presentation operation of the logo movable body 712 is completed. Although the configuration is such that the performance motion of the character movable body 713 is started, a member such as the gear rack member 70 may be prepared separately. By doing this, the presentation motion of the logo movable body 712 and the presentation motion of the character movable body 713 can be started either first or at the same time. . Furthermore, there may be cases where only one of the performance operations is performed. Furthermore, the return operation of the character movable body 713 and the return operation of the logo movable body 712 can be started either first or at the same time. Furthermore, there may be cases where only one of the return operations is performed.

Furthermore, the structure that restricts changes in the relative position of movable bodies such as the right side character portion 713R described using FIGS. 18 to 25 can also be applied to movable bodies provided in rotating gaming machines (slot machines). Can be done.

According to the above description,
``A movable unit [for example, the first performance movable unit 7 or the elevating unit 71] that can perform a performance action [for example, a falling action],
a first movable body provided in the movable unit [for example, the character movable body 713 or the right character part 713R];
A game machine comprising:
The movable unit has a regulating means [for example, the locking protrusion 703 inserted into the locking groove 7132b],
The regulating means prevents a change in the relative position of the first movable body with respect to the movable unit before and after performing the production operation [for example, when an inertia force acts when the fall stops, the first movable body bounces. changes from the initial position].
A game machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100] characterized by the following. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, the performance operation can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort due to unintended movement of the first movable body.

In addition, the above-mentioned presentation motion may be a rising motion, a lateral sliding motion, a forward advancing motion, or a backward retreating motion. .

The performance motion may be a motion that does not include a performance by the first movable body. The production by the first movable body referred to herein means that the first movable body partially or entirely changes its posture, emits light, rotates, etc. However, this refers to a performance that becomes more noticeable than before the performance started, and does not apply to, for example, a performance in which the first movable body simply changes (moves) its position without being noticeable.

Also,
“The first movable body is capable of performing a first action [for example, a rotational action],
The first action is an action that is not included in the production action,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``Comprising a first driving means [e.g., motor 7111],
The first movable body is capable of performing the first operation by driving the first driving means [for example, FIG. 25],
By driving the first driving means, the regulation by the regulating means is released [for example, FIG. 24(b)], and the first movable body executes the first operation;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

moreover,
"Equipped with driving force transmission means [for example, lower gear 714, gear rack member 70, upper gear 715] that transmits the driving force of the first drive means [for example, motor 7111] to the first movable body,
The regulating means is a means different from the driving force transmitting means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The performance motion is a falling motion [for example, FIG. 18(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``Comprising a second movable body [e.g., logo movable body 712] provided in the movable unit,
The second movable body is capable of performing a second action [e.g., rotational action] [e.g., FIG. 18(c)],
During the execution of the second operation, the restriction by the restriction means is released [for example, FIG. 24(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"After the execution of the second operation is completed, the execution of the first operation is started [for example, FIG. 25],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The second movable body may be capable of performing the second operation by being driven by the first driving means.

Next, a description will be given of the improvement of the elevating unit 71 during transportation of the pachinko machine 100.

FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the game machine shown in FIG. 3, viewed diagonally from above on the front side.

In the game board 200, the rear side of the game board 201 is covered with a back base 260 made of resin.

Further, although the explanation is omitted in FIG. 3, an illumination panel 207 is arranged between the decorative top cover 203 and the decorative upper right cover 205 and the lifting unit 71. The illumination panel 207 receives light from its thick surface (end surface), reflects the incident light, and emits it from the front surface.

The front side of the elevating unit 71 is covered by the illumination panel 207, and even if the front frame door 106 is opened, the elevating unit 71 cannot be contacted. That is, unless the illumination panel 207 is removed, the lifting unit 71 cannot be touched. The elevating unit 71 is held at the initial position by engagement with the locking member 744 shown in FIG. 22 described above. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 100 is transported, there is a risk that the lock member 744 may be disengaged due to impact or the like. Therefore, it is desirable to fix the elevating unit 71 at the initial position so that the elevating unit 71 does not fall during transportation. Any member that can be accessed by opening the front frame door 106 can be fixed by pasting tape, etc. However, as described above, the elevating unit 71 is covered by the illumination panel 207 and cannot be contacted. Therefore, it cannot be fixed by pasting tape, etc.

Therefore, in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 26, the lifting unit 71 is lifted up using the first fixing pin 261 and the second fixing pin 262, and the lifting unit 71 is fixed at the initial position. In FIG. 26, a portion of the first fixing pin 261 and a portion of the second fixing pin 262 are respectively visible from the notch provided in the back base 260. Further, a front end portion 2611 of the first fixing pin 261 projects forward from the decorative top cover 203, and a front end portion 2621 of the second fixing pin 262 projects forward from the decorative upper right cover 205.

FIG. 27 is a plan view of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 26 viewed from directly above, and the lower side of the figure is the front side.

Also in FIG. 27, a portion of the first fixing pin 261 and a portion of the second fixing pin 262 are respectively visible from the notch provided in the back base 260. It can also be seen that the front end portion 2611 of the first fixing pin 261 protrudes forward, and the front end portion 2621 of the second fixing pin 262 also protrudes forward.

Further, from the rear surface of the game board 200, a first conveyance fixing member 263 and a second conveyance fixing member 264 are inserted at intervals in the left-right direction.

FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the game board 200 with the back base 260 removed, viewed from the rear side, and the front right side in the figure is the rear side. This Fig. 28 is also a view seen from the rear side like Fig. 19(a) etc., so the left side of the figure is the right side when seen from the front side, and the right side of the figure is the right side when seen from the front side. Be on the left. In the explanation here, the left and right direction will be explained based on the view from the front side.

Also in FIG. 28, a part of the first fixing pin 261 that passes through the lifting unit 71 and a part of the second fixing pin 262 that also passes through the lifting unit 71 are visible. Further, FIG. 28 shows the lock unit 74 described using FIG. 19(a). A first transport fixing member 263 and a second transport fixing member 264 are inserted into the post-lock cover 740b of the lock unit 74, respectively.

FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view for explaining the attachment structure of the first fixing pin 261 and the second fixing pin 262, and the first conveyance fixing member 263 and the second conveyance fixing member 264. In FIG. 29, the back left side of the figure is the front side, and the front right side of the figure is the rear side.

In FIG. 29, the decorative upper cover 203 and the decorative upper right cover 205 are shown in the front, the elevating unit 71 and the pre-lock cover 740f are shown in this order behind them, and the post-lock cover 740b is shown in the rear.

The decorative cover 203 is provided with a through hole 2031 into which the first fixing pin 261 is inserted. The decorative upper right cover 205 is provided with a through hole 2051 through which the second fixing pin 262 is inserted.

The lifting unit 71 to be fixed has a first through hole 7101 into which the first fixing pin 261 for fixing the lifting unit 71 is inserted, and a second fixing pin 262 for fixing the lifting unit 71 as well. A second through hole 7102 is provided. The first through hole 7101 is provided in the base plate 711 also shown in FIG. The second through hole 7102 is provided in the logo movable body mounting plate 75 also shown in FIG. Furthermore, the base plate 711 is also provided with a notch 7103 through which the second fixing pin 262 is inserted.

The lock front cover 740f has a first insertion portion 740fL into which the rear end portion 2612 of the first fixing pin 261 is inserted, and a second insertion portion 740fR into which the rear end portion 2622 of the second fixing pin 262 is inserted.

When the lifting unit 71 to be fixed is located at the initial position, the through hole 2031 provided in the decorative cover 203, the first through hole 7101 of the lifting unit 71, and the first insertion portion 740fL are aligned in a straight line. . Furthermore, the through hole 2051 provided in the decorative upper right cover 205, the second through hole 7102 and notch 7103 of the elevating unit 71, and the second insertion portion 740fR are also aligned in a straight line.

Before the pachinko machine 100 is transported, that is, before it is shipped from the factory, the first fixing pin 261 and the second fixing pin 262 are attached. The rear end portion 2612 of the first fixing pin 261 is inserted into the through hole 2031 provided in the decorative cover 203 from the front side. By inserting the first fixing pin 261 toward the rear side, the rear end portion 2612 of the first fixing pin 261 passes through the first through hole 7101 of the lifting unit 71 to be fixed, and 740fL is reached. When the rear end portion 2612 of the first fixing pin 261 is inserted into the first insertion portion 740fL, the first fixing pin 261 cannot be inserted toward the rear side any further, and the rear end portion 2612 of the first fixing pin 261 The end portion 2612 is accommodated within the first insertion portion 740fL without protruding from the first insertion portion 740fL. Similarly, the rear end portion 2622 of the second fixing pin 262 is inserted into the through hole 2051 provided in the decorative upper right cover 205 from the front side. By inserting the second fixing pin 262 toward the rear side, the rear end portion 2622 of the second fixing pin 262 passes through the second through hole 7102 of the lifting unit 71 to be fixed, and further extends into the notch. 7103 and reaches the second insertion portion 740fR. When the rear end portion 2612 of the second fixing pin 262 is inserted into the second insertion portion 740fR, the second fixing pin 262 cannot be inserted any further toward the rear side, and the rear end portion 2612 of the second fixing pin 262 The end portion 2622 is accommodated within the second insertion portion 740fR without protruding from the second insertion portion 740fR. Both the first insertion portion 740fL and the second insertion portion 740fR are made of resin and have flexibility. The storage space of the first insertion part 740fL is a space slightly narrower than the diameter of the first fixing pin 261, and the storage space of the second insertion part 740fR is a space slightly narrower than the diameter of the second fixing pin 262. be. Whether it is the first insertion part 740fL or the second insertion part 740fR, the storage space of the first insertion part 740fL and the second insertion part 740fR is flexible because the rear end portions of the fixing pins such as the first fixing pin 261 and the second fixing pin 262 are pushed in. After the diameter is expanded once, the first insertion portion 740fL and the second insertion portion 740fR tighten their rear end portions. As a result, the fixing pin is prevented from falling off toward the front.

FIG. 30 is an enlarged perspective view of the upper end portion of the game board 200 to which the first fixing pin 261 and the second fixing pin 262 are attached, and the front left side of the figure is the front side.

When looking at FIG. 30, it appears that the lifting unit 71 can be contacted, but in this figure, it is easy to see that the first fixing pin 261 and the second fixing pin 262 are lifting the lifting unit 71 in the initial position. , the back base 260, game board 201, outer rail 202, etc. are removed from the game board 200. Actually, the upper part of the elevating unit 71 is covered by the back base 260, the game board 201, the outer rail 202, and the like.

FIG. 30 shows the decorative upper cover 203 and the decorative upper right cover 205, and also shows how the illumination panel 207 is arranged immediately behind them. Also shown are the left side logo portion 712L, the right side logo portion 712R, the logo movable body mounting plate 75, the base plate 711 of the elevating unit 71, the front lock cover 740f and the rear lock cover 740b of the lock unit 74. As shown in FIG. 30, in the initial position, the elevating unit 71 is located between the decorative top cover 203 and the decorative upper right cover 205 and the lock unit 74 (more specifically, the front lock cover 740f).

The fixing pins (261, 262) described above are inserted from the front side toward the rear side, penetrate the lifting unit 71 to be fixed, and span between the front side and the rear side. On the other hand, the first conveyance fixing member 263 and the second conveyance fixing member 264 shown in FIG. 29 are flat tongue members, which are inserted from the rear side toward the front side and penetrate the lifting unit 71 to be fixed. The front end portion is locked to the base plate 711 of the elevating unit 71 without moving.

The post-lock cover 740b shown in FIG. 29 has a first opening 740bL on the left side (right side in FIG. 29) and a second opening 740bR on the right side (left side in FIG. 29). The pre-lock cover 740f also has a first opening 740fh on the left side (right side in FIG. 29) and a second opening 740fm on the right side (left side in FIG. 29).

The lifting unit 71 to be fixed has a first locking port 711L on the left side (right side in FIG. 29) of the base plate 711, and a second locking port 711R on the right side (left side in FIG. 29). It is being

When the lifting unit 71 to be fixed is located at the initial position, the first opening 740bL of the post-lock cover 740b, the first opening 740fh of the pre-locking cover 740f, and the first locking port 711L of the lifting unit 71 are in a straight line. They are lined up. Further, the second opening 740bR of the post-lock cover 740b, the second opening 740fm of the pre-lock cover 740f, and the second locking opening 711R of the elevating unit 71 are also aligned in a straight line.

Before the pachinko machine 100 is shipped from the factory, the first conveyance fixing member 263 and the second conveyance fixing member 264 are also installed. The front end portion 2631 of the first conveyance fixing member 263 is inserted into the first opening 740bL of the post-lock cover 740b from the rear side. By inserting the first transport fixing member 263 toward the front side, the front end portion 2631 of the first transport fixing member 263 passes through the first opening 740fh of the front lock cover 740f, and the elevating unit to be fixed. 71, the first locking port 711L is reached. The front end portion 2631 of the first conveyance fixing member 263 is locked in the first locking opening 711L. Similarly to the first transport fixing member 263, the front end portion 2641 of the second transport fixing member 264 is inserted into the second opening 740bR of the post-lock cover 740b from the rear side. By inserting the second transport fixing member 264 toward the front side, the front end portion 2641 of the second transport fixing member 264 passes through the second opening 740fm of the lock front cover 740f, and the elevating unit to be fixed. 71, the second locking port 711R is reached. The front end portion 2641 of the second conveyance fixing member 264 is also locked in the second locking opening 711R.

In this way, the lifting unit 71 in the initial position is held from both the front side and the rear side. When the front frame door 106 is opened after the transportation of the Pachinko machine 100 is completed and the Pachinko machine 100 is installed in the game parlor, the front end portion 2611 of the first fixing pin 261 and the front end portion 2621 of the second fixing pin 262 come into contact with each other. It is possible. The clerk at the game parlor holds the front end portion 2611 of the first fixing pin 261 and pulls the first fixing pin 261 forward, and also holds the front end portion 2621 of the second fixing pin 262 and pulls the second fixing pin 262 forward. Pull it out. Also, the first conveyance fixing member 263 and the second conveyance fixing member 264 are pulled out to the rear side from the back side of the island. By removing the first fixing pin 261, the second fixing pin 262, the first conveyance fixing member 263, and the second conveyance fixing member 264, the elevating unit 71 can perform a falling operation.

Note that the fixing structure during transportation of the lifting unit 71 using the first fixing pin 261 and the second fixing pin 262, the first transportation fixing member 263 and the second transportation fixing member, as explained using FIGS. 26 to 30, The structure of fixing the elevating unit 71 during transportation using the 264 can also be applied to a movable body provided in a rotating gaming machine (slot machine).

According to the above description,
“A game machine equipped with a movable body [e.g., elevating unit 71],
A movement regulating means for regulating the movement of the movable body during transportation of the game machine [for example, the first fixing pin 261, the second fixing pin 262, the first transportation fixing member 263, and the second transportation fixing member 264] can be attached. has been,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to prevent the movable body from being damaged during transportation of the game machine.

Also,
``Equipped with a door body that can be opened and closed [for example, the front frame door 106],
The movable body is arranged on the rear side of the door body in a closed state,
The movable body cannot be contacted even when the door body is open.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``A plate-shaped transmission means [for example, an illumination panel 207] is provided between the door body and the movable body,
The movable body cannot be contacted by the transparent means even when the door body is open.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The transmitting means may be a removable means, and the movable body may be accessible by removing the transmitting means while the door is open.

Further, the transmitting means may be a transparent or semi-transparent plate member.

Also,
``The transmitting means is a means capable of performing a luminous effect,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the transmitting means may be a light guide plate capable of performing an effect display by allowing light to enter from an end face.

Also,
"The movable body is movable from the initial position [for example, FIG. 18],
The movement regulating means is a means for regulating the movement of the movable body in the initial position,
The movement regulating means is configured to be detachable;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first structure [for example, decorative upper cover 203, decorative upper right cover 205],
a second structure [for example, the front lock cover 740f];
Equipped with
The movable body [e.g., elevating unit 71] is located between the first structure and the second structure in the initial position [e.g., FIG. 30],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The movable body has a through hole [for example, a first through hole 7101, a second through hole 7102] through which the movement restricting means passes,
The first structure has a first hole [for example, through hole 2031, through hole 2051] through which the movement restricting means passes,
The second structure has an insertion portion [for example, a first insertion portion 740fL, a second insertion portion 740fR] into which the movement restriction means is inserted,
The through hole, the first hole, and the insertion portion are arranged so as to be aligned in a straight line when the movable body is in the initial position [for example, FIG. 29],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the movement restricting means may be a rod-shaped member.

The insertion portion may be a penetrating hole or may be a non-penetrating hole.

The first structure may be provided on the front side or the rear side of the second structure.

The first structure is disposed on the rear side of the door body in a closed state, and the first structure can be contacted when the door body is opened. Good too. In other words, the edge of the first hole is located on the rear side of the door body in the closed state, and the edge of the first hole can be contacted when the door body is opened. It may be something like that. In these cases, the size of the insertion portion may be smaller than the first hole, or the insertion portion may be a hole that does not penetrate rearward. With such a configuration, the movement restricting means can be pulled out forward, but cannot be pulled out backward.

The through hole may be circular, oval, semicircular, rectangular, polygonal, keyhole-shaped, or the like.

There may be a plurality of movement restriction means, and each movement restriction means is provided with the first hole, the through hole, and the insertion portion.

Also,
“Either one of the first structure and the second structure [e.g., the front lock cover 740f] has a second hole [e.g., the first opening] through which the movement restricting means passes. 740fL, second opening 740fR],
The movable body [e.g., elevating unit 71] has an insertion port [e.g., first locking port 711L, second locking port 711R] into which the tip of the movement restricting means is inserted,
The second hole and the insertion port are arranged so as to be aligned in a straight line when the movable body is in the initial position [for example, FIG. 29],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In this case, the movement restricting means can be pulled out toward the structure having the second hole.

There may be a plurality of movement restriction means, and each movement restriction means is provided with the second hole and the insertion port.

According to the above description,
“The first structure [for example, decorative upper cover 203, decorative upper right cover 205],
a second structure [for example, the front lock cover 740f];
A movable body [e.g., elevating unit 71],
A game machine comprising:
The movable body is located between the first structure and the second structure in an initial position,
The movable body has a through hole [for example, a first through hole 7101, a second through hole 7102],
The first structure has a first hole [for example, through hole 2031, through hole 2051],
The second structure has an insertion portion [for example, a first insertion portion 740fL, a second insertion portion 740fR],
The through hole, the first hole, and the insertion portion are arranged so as to be aligned in a straight line when the movable body is in the initial position [for example, FIG. 29],
A game characterized in that a first movement regulating means [for example, a first fixing pin 261 and a second fixing pin 262] penetrating the first hole and the through hole and inserted into the insertion part is provided during transportation. The stand. ”
Also explained.

During transportation, the movable body in the initial position is suspended by the first movement restricting means inserted between the first structure and the second structure, and movement is restricted.

Also,
“Either one of the first structure and the second structure [for example, the front lock cover 740f] has a second hole [for example, the first opening 740fh, the second opening 740fm] It has
The movable body has an insertion port [for example, a first locking port 711L, a second locking port 711R],
The second hole and the insertion port are arranged so as to be aligned in a straight line when the movable body is in the initial position [for example, FIG. 29],
A game machine characterized in that a second movement regulating means [for example, a first conveyance fixing member 263, a second conveyance fixing member 264] whose tip is inserted into the insertion port through the second hole is provided during conveyance. . ”
Also explained.

During transportation, the movable body in the initial position is supported by the second movement restricting means inserted from one of the structures, and movement is restricted.

Next, the lamp unit 9 provided at the lower left part of the gaming area 124 will be explained. Note that, as described above, even if the light source is an LED, it is still referred to as a lamp.

FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the lamp unit 9 shown in FIG. 3 viewed diagonally from above and to the right.

As explained using FIG. 3, the first special figure starting opening (fixed) 230 is provided on the right side of the lamp unit 9, and this first special figure starting opening (fixed) 230 is located at the center of the gaming area 124. It will be located at the bottom. The first special figure starting opening (fixed) 230 is formed by a starting opening forming member 230a, and on both sides of the first special figure starting opening (fixed) 230, openings 241 that connect to the out opening 240 shown in FIG. 3 are also formed. It is formed.

In addition, a light emitting effect part 9a is provided in the center of the lamp unit 9, and a general prize winning opening part 9b is provided on the left side.

FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the lamp unit 9, and the front left side of the figure is the front side.

In FIG. 32, a base member 90 is shown. The starting port forming member 230a is attached to the right side portion of the base member 90 from the front side. On the other hand, three general winning openings 901 and one out opening 902 are provided on the left side of the base member 90. A side front decoration member 91 is attached to this left side portion of the base member 90 from the front side, and a space between the side front decoration member 91 and the base member 90 is the ball entrance 9bi (FIG. 31 ). The three general winning holes 901 are provided above the central part in the left and right direction of the general winning opening part 9b, and the game ball that enters from the central part of the ball entrance hole 9bi shown in FIG. You will be guided to one of the winning slots. A separate ball detection sensor may be arranged in each of the three general winning holes 901, and each ball detection sensor may detect the ball entering the ball, or a game ball that has entered each of the three general winning holes 901 may be guided. The ball paths may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor.

The game balls entering from the left and right end portions of the ball entry port 9bi are guided to the out port 902, as shown by solid arrows in FIG. 32. Both the game balls that entered the general winning hole 901 and the game balls that entered the out hole 902 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

A lighting board 92 is attached to the base member 90 shown in FIG. 32 from the rear side, and the lighting board 92 is further covered by a board cover 93 from the rear side. The lighting board 92 is provided with a left side area 92L corresponding to the general winning a prize opening part 9b and a right side area 92R corresponding to the light emitting effect part 9a. In the left side area 92L, an opening 921 and a notch 922 corresponding to the general winning opening 901 are formed, and a notch 923 corresponding to the out opening 902 is also formed. On the other hand, light emitting diodes DO are mounted at intervals in the circumferential direction in the outer circumferential portion 92Ro of the right side region 92R, and a plurality of light emitting diodes DI are also mounted in the inner portion 92Ri that is inside the outer circumferential portion 92Ro. . Both the light emitting diode DO in the outer peripheral portion 92Ro and the light emitting diode DI in the inner portion 92Ri emit light toward the front side. In addition, also in the left side area 92L, a light emitting diode DL is mounted near the opening 921, and the periphery of the general winning hole 901 is illuminated by this light emitting diode DL.

A cutout 903 is provided in the center portion of the base member 90 shown in FIG. 32, and the cutout 903 is covered by the right side region 92R of the lighting board 92 from the rear side. That is, the right side region 92R of the lighting board 92 is located inside the cutout 903, and a plurality of light emitting diodes DI and DO are arranged facing forward. As a result, the light emitting diode DO mounted on the outer peripheral portion 92Ro is arranged inside the edge of the cutout 903 and along the edge.

The reflector member 94 is arranged further inside the light emitting diode DO arranged inside along the edge of the cutout 903. This reflector member 94 is a frame-shaped member, and is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the light emitting diode DI mounted on the inner portion 92Ri, so as to prevent light emitted from the light emitting diode DI from leaking to the outside. Reflect it inward.

The pattern display sheet 95 closes the front side of the frame-shaped reflector member 94, and will be described in detail later. A plate-shaped lens 96 is stacked on the pattern display sheet 95 from the front side, and a plate-shaped half mirror 97 is stacked on the lens 96 from the front side. The optical members (95 to 97) superposed on the reflector member 94 in this way are housed inside the light guide cover 98. The light guide cover 98 has a side wall part 981 and a front part 982. That is, the front side of the side wall part 981 is covered with the front side part 982, and the rear end side of the side wall part 981 is open to the rear. The rear end of the side wall portion 981 is fitted into the cutout portion 903 of the base member 90. As a result, the rear end surface of the side wall portion 981, that is, the thick surface of the plate member constituting the side wall portion 981, is located directly above the light emitting diode DO disposed in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral portion 92Ro of the lighting board 92.

The decorative member 99 is a frame-shaped member, and is placed over the light guide cover 98 from the front side. The outer periphery of the front part 982 of the light guide cover 98 is decorated with a decorative member 99.

FIG. 33(a) shows a perspective view of the front side of the light-emitting production section 9a in the lamp unit 9 on the left side, and a cross-sectional view schematically showing the structure of the light-emission production section 9a on the right side.

On the right side of FIG. 33(a), a light emitting diode DO provided on the outer peripheral side and a light emitting diode DI provided on the inner portion are illustrated. The light emitting diode DO provided on the outer peripheral side and the light emitting diode DI provided on the inner portion are light emitting diodes mounted on a common lighting board 92.

As shown on the right side of FIG. 33(a), the rear end surface 981a of the side wall portion 981 of the light guide cover 98 is located above the light emitting diode DO provided on the outer peripheral side. Further, the half mirror 97 shown on the right side of FIG. 33(a) is an optical member that reflects light from the front side and transmits light from the rear side.

In FIG. 33(a), neither the outer light emitting diode DO nor the inner light emitting diode DI emit light, and the half mirror 97 is functioning, which is a perspective view of the front side of the light emitting production section 9a shown on the left. In this case, nothing is displayed on the front part 982 whose outer periphery is decorated with a decorative member 99. That is, the existence of the inner light emitting diode DI itself cannot be confirmed from the front side.

FIG. 33(b) is a diagram showing how the light emitting diode DO on the outer circumferential side emits light. Note that in this FIG. 33(b), the inner light emitting diode DI remains off.

As shown by the arrow on the right side of FIG. 33(b), the light emitted from the light emitting diode DO on the outer circumferential side enters from the rear end surface 981a of the side wall portion 981 of the light guide cover 98. A reflecting portion 982a is formed on the front surface portion 982 of the light guide cover 98. The reflecting portion 982a reflects the light incident from the rear end surface 981a of the side wall portion 981 and outputs the reflected light from the front surface. Light emitted from the light emitting diode DO on the outer circumferential side is reflected by this reflecting portion 982a and emitted from the front surface.

In the perspective view of the front side of the light emitting part 9a shown on the left side of FIG. 33(b), a light emitting pattern of a heart mark whose inside does not emit light is displayed on the front part 982 due to reflection from the reflecting part 982a. has been done. Note that the gray part is the part that is displayed by emitting light.

FIG. 34(a) is a diagram showing how the inner light emitting diode DI emits light. In addition, in this FIG. 34(a), the light emitting diode DO on the outer circumferential side remains off.

As shown by the arrow on the right side of FIG. 34(a), among the light emitted from the inner light emitting diode DI, the light diffused outward is reflected inward by the reflector member 94. The pattern display sheet 95 has a light-opaque section 951 on the outer periphery and a light-transmissive section 952 on the inner side thereof. The light reflected inward by the reflector member 94 is reflected again by the light-opaque portion 951 and is not emitted to the front side. On the other hand, among the light emitted from the inner light emitting diode DI, the light that reaches the light transmission section 952 has a star shape as shown on the left side of FIG. 34(a) when passing through the light transmission section 952. This pattern is displayed on the front section 982. In addition, in the front part 982 shown on the left side, the black part is the part displayed by light emission.

FIG. 34(b) is a diagram showing how both the outer light emitting diode DO and the inner light emitting diode DI, which are mounted on the common lighting board 92, emit light.

As described using FIG. 33(b), the light emitted from the light emitting diode DO on the outer circumferential side enters from the rear end surface 981a of the side wall portion 981 of the light guide cover 98, is reflected by the reflection portion 982a, and A heart pattern whose interior does not emit light is displayed in a luminous manner. Furthermore, as explained using FIG. 34(a), among the light emitted from the inner light emitting diode DI, the light that reaches the light transmitting section 952 of the pattern display sheet 95 passes through the light transmitting section 952. When the light is displayed, a star-shaped pattern is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 34(b), a portion of the light guide cover 98 in which the reflective portion 982a is formed is located in front of the light transmitting portion 952 of the pattern display sheet 95. That is, the portion of the light guide cover 98 in which the reflective portion 982a is formed and the light transmitting portion 952 of the pattern display sheet 95 overlap in the front-rear direction. Therefore, as shown in the perspective view of the front side of the light emitting production section 9a shown on the left side of FIG. On the front part 982, a heart mark whose interior does not emit light and a star-shaped pattern are displayed overlappingly.

Note that the lamp unit 9 described using FIGS. 31 to 34 can also be applied to a rotating gaming machine (slot machine).

According to the above description,
``A first light emitting means [for example, an inner light emitting diode DI],
a second light emitting means [for example, a light emitting diode DO on the outer circumferential side];
a first pattern display section [for example, the light transmitting section 952 of the pattern display sheet 95] capable of displaying a first pattern [for example, a star-shaped pattern] by light emission from the first light emitting means;
a second pattern display section [for example, formed by the reflective section 982a of the light guide cover 98] capable of displaying a second pattern [for example, a heart pattern whose interior does not emit light] by the light emission of the second light emitting means; part] and
A game machine comprising:
At least a portion of the first pattern display portion overlaps at least a portion of the second pattern display portion in the front-rear direction [for example, FIG. 34(b)],
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are means mounted on a common substrate [for example, the lighting board 92],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to display one or both of the first pattern and the second pattern simultaneously, and the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are common. By being mounted on the board, disconnections and failures can be checked at the same time, making maintenance easier.

Note that the entire first pattern display section may overlap the entire second pattern display section in the front-rear direction, or a portion of the first pattern display section may overlap the second pattern display section. The first pattern display section may overlap with a part of the second pattern display part in the front-rear direction, or the first pattern display part may entirely overlap with a part of the second pattern display part in the front-rear direction. Alternatively, a part of the first pattern display section may overlap with the entire second pattern display section in the front-rear direction.

At least a portion of the first pattern and at least a portion of the second pattern may be displayed overlapping each other. That is, the entire first pattern and the entire second pattern may be displayed overlapping each other, or a portion of the first pattern and a portion of the second pattern may be displayed. may be displayed in an overlapping manner, or all of the first pattern and a part of the second pattern may be displayed in an overlapping manner; A part of the first pattern and the entire second pattern may be displayed overlapping each other.

Also,
"The second light emitting means is capable of emitting light during the light emitting period of the first light emitting means [for example, FIG. 34(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“Both the first pattern and the second pattern are displayed while both the first light emitting device and the second light emitting device are emitting light [for example, FIG. 34(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, there is a period in which the first pattern and the second pattern are displayed simultaneously.

Also,
“The first pattern display section displays the first pattern using a first display method [for example, the method in which light is incident from the rear surface shown in FIG. 34(a)],
The second pattern display section displays the second pattern using a second display method [for example, the method in which light is incident from the end face shown in FIG. 33(b)],
The first display method is a different method from the second display method,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

For example, one of the first display format and the second display format may be a method in which light incident from an end surface is reflected and emitted from the front surface. The other display format may be a method in which light is incident from the rear surface and a pattern is formed by the light passing toward the front surface.Furthermore, the non-transparent part does not allow the light to pass through to the front surface, and the transparent part does not transmit the light to the front surface. A method may also be used in which a pattern is formed by passing light.

Also,
“The first light emitting means [e.g., inner light emitting diode DI] displays the first pattern [e.g., [For example, Fig. 34(a)],
The second light emitting means [for example, the light emitting diode DO on the outer circumferential side] is the second light emitting means displayed by the second pattern display section [for example, the portion of the light guide cover 98 where the reflective section 982a is formed]. means arranged at a position shifted from the second pattern without overlapping in the front-back direction with the pattern [for example, a heart pattern whose interior does not emit light] [for example, FIG. 33(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``A half mirror [for example, half mirror 97] is provided in front of the first light emitting means [for example, inner light emitting diode DI],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the half mirror makes it difficult to see the first light-emitting means, which is turned off, from the front side, and the presence of the first light-emitting means can be hidden until the first light-emitting means emit light.

Note that a half mirror [for example, a portion of the light guide cover 98 in which the reflective portion 982a is formed] and the first light emitting means [for example, the inner light emitting diode DI] , half mirror 97].

The light emitting unit includes the first light emitting means, the second light emitting means, the first pattern display section, and the second pattern display section, the light emitting unit being movable. The unit may be a unit that can change its posture, or it may be a unit that can change its posture. Furthermore, the light emitting unit may be a unit in which at least a portion (all or a portion) of the light emitting unit is movable between a position where it is not visible when viewed from the front and a position where it is visible. Further, the light emitting unit may be a unit attached to a position where the player can touch it. Further, the light emitting unit may be a unit attached to a frame member, a door body (for example, the front frame door 106), or a game board.

Next, the attacker unit 23 provided at the lower right portion of the gaming area 124 will be explained. This attacker unit 23 corresponds to an example of a variable ball entrance unit.

The attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 3 has an attacker sticker 2302 pasted on an attacker front plate 2301 (see FIG. 39). Note that in FIG. 3, the decorative pattern of the attacker seal 2302 is omitted from illustration.

FIG. 35 is a perspective view showing the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 3 with the attacker front plate 2301 removed.

The attacker unit 23 includes an electric chew type special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231, a first variable winning opening 234 serving as a first attacker, a second variable winning opening 235 serving as a second attacker, and a second special figure starting opening 232. , and has an out port 236 opened to the attacker base plate 2303.

The special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 has a starting port whose size is variable by a blade member 2311, and the blade member 2311 shown in FIG. 35(a) extends forward. In this state where the blade member 2311 has advanced forward, the game ball passes over the blade member 2311 that has advanced. That is, in FIG. 35(a), the game ball passes from the left side to the right side of the figure. The ball detection sensor 2312 of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is disposed below the blade member 2311 and on the downstream side, facing upstream. Therefore, in the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 shown in FIG. 35(a), it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the ball detection sensor 2312, and ) 231 is blocked by the feather member 2311, making it difficult to win a prize.

The first variable winning hole 234, which is the first attacker, is located upstream in the rolling direction of the game ball than the second variable winning hole 235, which is the second attacker. This corresponds to an example of The size of the first variable winning opening 234 is changed by a door member 2341, and the door member 2341 shown in FIG. 35(a) extends forward. Moreover, the ball detection sensor 2342 for the first variable winning a prize opening is arranged facing upward and below the door member 2341 that has advanced to the front side. In the state where the door member 2341 has advanced forward, it is difficult for the game ball to pass over the advanced door member 2341 and to pass the ball detection sensor 2342. Therefore, the first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 35(a) is blocked by the door member 2341, making it difficult to win. The door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 corresponds to an example of the first movable part, and the position of the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 35(a) (the position advanced to the front side) is This corresponds to an example of the first position.

The second variable winning hole 235 corresponds to an example of a second variable ball entering hole. Like the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235 also has a variable winning opening size depending on the door member 2351, but the placement position of the ball detection sensor is different from the first variable winning opening 234. . In FIG. 35(a), the game balls rolling toward the second variable winning opening 235 roll from the right side to the left side of the figure. The ball detection sensor 2352 for the second variable winning a prize opening 235 is arranged not below the door member 2351 but on the downstream side of the door member 2351 and facing upstream. In the second variable prize opening 235, when the door member 2351 advances forward, the game ball passes over the advanced door member 2351 and reaches the ball detection sensor 2352. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35(a), in a state where the door member 2351 is retreated to the rear side, the game ball falls to a place where the ball detection sensor 2352 is not present. Therefore, although the second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 35(a) is not blocked by the door member 2351 and is open, it is in a difficult winning state. The door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 corresponds to an example of the second movable part, and the position of the door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 35(a) (the position retreated to the rear side) is This corresponds to an example of the second position.

A second special figure starting port 232 is arranged at the end where the game ball falls due to the door member 2351 retreating to the rear side. This second special figure starting opening 232 has a fixed winning opening size, and the ball detection sensor 2321 for the second special figure starting opening 232 is arranged facing upward. The game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2321 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the first guide port 2322, and then discharged to the game island side.

To summarize the above, in the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 35(a), the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 located at the most upstream position is in a winning state, and the first variable winning opening 234 located next is also in a winning state. It is in a difficult state, and the second variable winning a prize opening 235 is also in a difficult state.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the back side of the attacker front plate 2301 removed in FIG. 35.

As shown in FIG. 36, a ball passage forming wall 230r protruding toward the attacker base plate 2303 is provided on the back surface of the attacker front plate 2301. The ball passage forming wall 230r forms a ball passage inclined toward the downstream side, through which the game ball that has entered the attacker unit 23 rolls. In addition, the ball passage forming wall 230r is not provided at the position where the blade member 2311 advances and the position where the door members 2341, 2351 advance, and the blade member 2311 and the door members 2341, 2351 that have advanced form the ball passage. Become a wall. That is, the blade member 2311 and the door members 2341, 2351 are inclined downwardly toward the downstream side when they are advanced to the front side, and the game ball is rolled toward the downstream side using this inclination. go.

The solid line arrow shown in FIG. 35(a) indicates the path of the game ball rolling or falling on the ball path forming wall 230r shown in FIG. 36, the advanced blade member 2311, and the door member 2341. (The same applies to the arrows in the figures below.) In addition, the game ball that enters the attacker unit 23 is directed either to the route on the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 side indicated by the solid line arrow, or to the out port 236 provided in the attacker unit 23. be.

Most of the game balls that have fallen in front of the second special figure starting opening 232 enter the second special figure starting opening 232, and the special figure 2 variable game is started. The game balls that have not entered the second special figure starting port 232 reach the out port 240 shown in FIG. 3 and are discharged to the game island side (see the solid line arrow divided into two).

As shown in FIG. 35, the attacker base plate 2303 is provided with a plurality of ribs. Further, as shown in FIG. 36, the attacker front plate 2301 is also provided with a plurality of ribs. If you look from the upstream side along the flow of the game ball, it will go from the intermediate position of the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 to the right end, and then turn back to the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234. Ribs are provided beyond the intermediate position. That is, a plurality of vertical ribs are provided in two stages, upper and lower, and one horizontal rib is provided in the folded portion. Hereinafter, the four vertical ribs on the upper stage of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 side of the attacker base plate 2303 will be referred to as the rear first rib 23r1, and the one horizontal rib on the folded part will be referred to as the rear first rib 23r1. It is called the rear side horizontal rib 23r2, and the four lower vertical ribs on the first variable winning a prize opening 234 side are called the rear side second rib 23r3. In addition, the three vertical ribs in the upper row on the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 side of the attacker front plate 2301 are referred to as the first front rib 23f1, and the one horizontal rib in the folded part is referred to as the front side first rib 23f1. It is called the horizontal rib 23f2, and the three lower vertical ribs on the side of the first variable winning a prize opening 234 are called the front second rib 23f3.

Note that the attacker front plate 2301 shown in FIG. 36 includes various ball guide ribs 23f6 to 23f8 in addition to a first front rib 23f1, a front horizontal rib 23f2, a second front rib 23f3, and a front vertical rib 23f5 to be described later. It is provided.

Whether it is the rear first rib 23r1, the rear horizontal rib 23r2, the rear second rib 23r3, the front first rib 23f1, or the front horizontal rib 23f2, the front side The 2-rib 23f3 is also a deceleration rib for reducing the rolling speed of the game ball.

The game ball whose rolling speed has been reduced by the second rear rib 23r3 and the second front rib 23f3 is more likely to stay on the door member 2341 of the first variable prize opening 234. In particular, the two rear second ribs 23r3 on the downstream side among the four rear second ribs 23r3 are provided in the spherical path formed by the advanced door member 2341, and the three front second ribs 23r3 are The two front second ribs 23f3 on the downstream side among the second ribs 23f3 are also provided in the spherical path formed by the advanced door member 2341.

FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the attacker unit 23 taken along the line B-B' shown in FIG. 35(a), and is a view showing the state seen from directly above, and the lower side of the figure is the front side. Note that, in FIG. 37, hatching representing a cross section is omitted.

In FIG. 37, the first variable winning hole 234 is shown on the right side, and the second variable winning hole 235 is shown on the left side. The door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 37 is in a state of advancing forward, and the first variable winning opening 234 is in a state where it is difficult to win. On the other hand, the door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 37 is also in a state of advancing forward, but this second variable winning opening 235 is in a winning easy state. Further, in this FIG. 37, game balls Ba to Bc are also shown. In FIG. 37, the game ball rolls from the right side to the left side of the figure.

Near the first variable winning opening 234, four rear second ribs 23r3 and three front second ribs 23f3 are shown. The game balls Ba and Bb are caught on these seven second ribs 23r3 and 23f3 and easily stay on the door member 2341. In addition, the interval between adjacent ribs in the four rear second ribs 23r3 is greater than or equal to the diameter of the game ball, and the interval between adjacent ribs in the three front second ribs 23f3 is also greater than or equal to the diameter of the game ball. .

Both the rear second rib 23r3 and the front second rib 23f3 described above are provided upstream of the second variable prize opening 235 in the rolling direction of the game ball. In addition, whether it is the rear second rib 23r3 or the front second rib 23f3, only some of the ribs are provided upstream of the first variable prize opening 234, but all the ribs are provided in the first It may be provided upstream of the variable winning a prize opening 234.

Alternatively, only one of the second rear rib 23r3 and the second front rib 23f3 may be provided. This is not limited to the second rib, but if there are both ribs provided on the rear side and ribs provided on the front side (for example, in the case of the first rib), the rib on either side It is also possible to provide only one.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, a gap CS1 is provided between the front end of the door member 2341 in a state of advancing forward and the attacker front plate 2301. This gap CS1 is less than half the diameter of the game balls Ba and Bb, but is wider than the protrusion length of the second front rib 23f3 to the rear side. On the other hand, the length (width) of the door member 2341 in the front-rear direction is approximately the diameter of the game balls Ba and Bb. By providing this gap CS1, it is possible to change from the difficult-to-win state to the easy-to-win state in a short time.

FIG. 35(b) shows the state after the first variable winning opening 234 of the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 35(a) changes to the winning easy state. That is, the door member 2341 of the first variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 35(b) has retreated to the rear side. The position of the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. Also, the front end 2341t of the door member 2341 of the first variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 35(a) is located on the front side (player side). The first variable prize opening 234 is more likely to hold the game ball when the door member 2341 is in the backward position (third position) than when the door member 2341 is in the forward position (first position). It is easy to enter the ball.

When the door member 2341 retreats while the game balls are staying on the door member 2341, the game balls staying on the door member 2341 fall all at once, and the ball detection sensor 2342 for the first variable prize opening Detected. Therefore, compared to the case where the door member 2341 retreats while the game ball is passing through the door member 2341, the winning rate to the first variable prize opening 234 is improved, and the second rib 23r3 on the rear side and the second rib on the front side The rib 23f3 also serves as a winning rate improvement means. While the first variable winning hole 234 is in the winning easy state, the game ball that has passed through the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting hole (variable) 231 and rolled into the first variable winning hole 234 is The ball does not roll downstream from the winning opening 234, but passes through the ball detection sensor 2342, passes through the second guide opening 2343, and is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, as shown by the arrow shown by the solid line. , is discharged to the game island side.

In FIG. 35(a), the flow of game balls is also shown with a chain double-dashed line. This two-dot chain line shows the flow of game balls that have jumped out from the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 toward the second variable winning opening 235.

As described above, in the second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 35(a), the door member 2351 is in a backward state, making it difficult to win. However, if the game ball flies in the flow shown by the two-dot chain line, there is a risk that it will pass the ball detection sensor 2352. In other words, there is a possibility that a player may win a prize in the second variable winning hole 235 even though it is difficult to win a prize.

However, the game ball whose rolling speed has been reduced by the rear second rib 23r3 and the front second rib 23f3 does not have enough momentum to jump out from the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 toward the second variable winning opening 235. After the ball reaches the attacker intermediate portion 230r1 of the ball passage forming wall 230r shown in FIG. 36 from the door member 2341, it immediately falls as shown by the solid line in FIG. 35(a). Therefore, the rear second rib 23r3 and the front second rib 23f3 are also means for reducing the winning rate to the second variable winning opening 235. Strictly speaking, the second rib 23r3 on the rear side and the second rib 23f3 on the front side are means for reducing the winning rate of winnings to the second variable winning opening 235 that would otherwise not be allowed (irregular winnings). It can be said.

However, even if the second rib 23r3 on the rear side and the second rib 23f3 on the front side are provided, which reduce the winning rate to the second variable prize opening 235, as described above, the speed should be reduced by these ribs 23r3, 23f3. It is difficult to completely prevent the game ball from flying out toward the second variable winning hole 235. For example, if a game ball bounces on the door member 2341, it may fly out toward the second variable prize opening 235. Therefore, a winning prevention protrusion 2351a that protrudes forward is provided at the downstream end (ball detection sensor 2352 side) of the door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235. This winning prevention protrusion 2351a protrudes in front of the ball detection sensor 2352 even when the door member 2351 is in the position retreated to the rear side. Therefore, even if there is a game ball that jumps out toward the second variable winning opening 235, the game ball will collide with the winning prevention protrusion 2351a and will not be able to pass through the ball detection sensor 2352, as shown by the dotted line. Fall. Furthermore, a vertical rib winning preventing rib 23r4 is also provided on the winning preventing projection 2351a of the door member 2351 in the retreated position shown in FIG. 35(a). The game ball that has jumped out towards the second variable winning opening 235 collides with this winning prevention rib 23r4, and is unable to pass through the ball detection sensor 2352, as in the case where it collides with the winning prevention protrusion 2351a, and is marked with a dotted line. It may fall as shown.

In addition, the game ball that immediately falls from the door member 2341 of the first variable prize opening 234 falls on the rear vertical rib 23r5 shown in FIG. 35(a) or the front vertical rib shown in FIG. The ball collides with 23f5 and decelerates, or the ball is more likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232.

FIG. 38(a) is a perspective view showing the state after the second variable winning opening 235 of the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 35(a) changes to the winning easy state.

The door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 shown in FIG. 38(a) extends forward. As a result, in the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 38(a), the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 located at the most upstream position is in a winning difficult state, and the next located first variable winning opening 234 is also in a winning difficult state. , and the second variable winning hole 235 is in the winning easy state. The position of the door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 38(a) (position advanced to the front side) corresponds to an example of the fourth position, and the second variable winning opening shown in FIG. 35(a) The front end 2351t of the door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 shown in FIG. The second variable prize opening 235 is such that the game ball is in a position where the door member 2351 is in the forward position (fourth position) than in the rearward position (second position). It is easy to enter the ball. The door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 is provided at a lower position than the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234, and a ball passage shown in FIG. 36 is formed between both door members 2341 and 2351. An attacker intermediate portion 230r1 of the wall 230r is arranged. As shown in FIG. 37, the attacker intermediate portion 230r1 and the door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 are slightly apart. For this reason, while the second variable winning hole 235 is in the winning easy state, many of the game balls ride on the door member 2351 of the second variable winning hole 235, as shown by the solid line arrow. It rolls on the door member 2351 and reaches the ball detection sensor 2352, but it cannot get on the door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 and falls down, and the second special figure starting opening There are also game balls flowing down to the 232 side. The game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2352 of the second variable winning hole 235 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the third guide hole 2353, and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, a gap CS2 of the same size as the gap CS1 is provided between the front end of the door member 2351 in a state of advancing forward and the attacker front plate 2301. This gap CS2 allows the second variable winning opening 235 to change from the difficult winning state to the easy winning state in a short time, and also makes the protruding length of the winning preventing protrusion 2351a provided on the door member 2351 longer. Therefore, even if the door member 2351 is in a position retreated to the rear side, irregular game balls flying out toward the second variable winning opening 235 will surely collide with the winning preventing protrusion 2351a. Furthermore, when the door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 opens only once for a very short time such as 0.06 seconds, the rolling speed is reduced by the rear second rib 23r3 and the front second rib 23f3. Even if the game ball rides on the door member 2351, by the time it rolls on the door member 2351 and reaches the ball detection sensor 2352, the door member 2351 has retreated backward from the forward position due to the gap CS2. Since the ball can be moved to the desired position in a short time, the game ball will fall down and the winning rate due to the release can be reduced.

FIG. 38(b) is a perspective view showing the state after the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 of the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 35(a) changes to the winning easy state.

The blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 shown in FIG. 38(b) has retreated to the rear side. While the special figure 1 starting hole (variable) 231 is in the winning easy state, the game ball that enters the attacker unit 23 will not roll downstream from the special figure 1 starting hole (variable) 231, As indicated by the solid line arrow, the ball passes through the ball detection sensor 2312 and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The game balls that have passed through the ball detection sensor 2312 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the fourth guide port 2313, and then are discharged to the game island side.

In the attacker unit 23 whose structure has been described in detail above, the attacker of the first variable winning opening 234 becomes an attacker dedicated to jackpots, and the attacker of second variable winning opening 235 becomes an attacker dedicated to small winnings. In the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, the ball is hit to the right, and most of the game balls hit to the right enter the special pattern 1 starting hole (variable) 231. For this reason, even if the attacker in the first variable winning hole 234 enters the easy-to-win state, and even if the attacker in the second variable winning hole 235 becomes in the easy-to-win state, the attacker can hardly be expected to win a prize. On the other hand, in the special pattern high probability normal pattern low probability state, the special pattern 1 starting hole (variable) 231 does not enter the easy ball entry state, and the game ball hit right is the attacker of the first variable winning hole 234 or the first variable winning hole 234. It can be expected that the attacker of the 2 variable winning opening 235 will win.

In addition, in this attacker unit 23, the state of the door member 2341 when the first variable winning opening 234 is in the winning easy state and the state of the door member 2351 when the second variable winning opening 235 is in the winning easy state are different. Since the conditions are exactly opposite, the way the game ball rolls is greatly different between the two variable winning holes, which may entertain the player. Moreover, since the two variable winning openings are lined up in the rolling direction of the game ball, the player can easily understand the difference in the state of the door members of the two variable winning openings, and can compare the states of the two door members. However, there are cases where you can enjoy the change in state.

FIG. 39(a) is a diagram showing the attacker unit 23 in which the second variable winning hole 235 is in a difficult-to-win state. In the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 39(a), only the attacker seal 2302 is removed, leaving the attacker front plate 2301. The attacker front plate 2301 is provided with an escape opening 2301a at a position corresponding to the downstream side (ball detection sensor 2352 side) end of the door member 2351 in the second variable prize opening 235. When this escape opening 2301a is pasted with the attacker sticker 2302, it is blocked from the front side, making it difficult for the player to see it.

FIG. 39(b) is a diagram showing the attacker unit 23 in which the second variable winning opening 235 is in the winning easy state. Also in the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 39(b), the attacker front plate 2301 is left and only the attacker seal 2302 is removed. A winning prevention protrusion 2351a of the door member 2351 extending forward is inserted into the escape opening 2301a shown in FIG. 39(b). The escape opening 2301a is a space in which the winning prevention protrusion 2351a protruding forward is accommodated when the second variable winning opening 235 is in the winning easy state. The tip of the winning prevention projection 2351a does not protrude further forward from the escape opening 2301a, and when the attacker sticker 2302 is pasted, the presence of the winning prevention projection 2351a becomes invisible to the player. However, it is also possible to provide an opening in the attacker seal 2302 so that the tip of the winning prevention protrusion 2351a protrudes further forward from the escape opening 2301a as one of the effects. The winning prevention protrusion 2351a of the door member 2351 that has advanced forward is also inserted into the escape opening 2301a shown in FIG. 37. Note that an attacker seal 2302 is attached to the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 37, and the escape opening 2301a is closed by the attacker seal 2302. By providing the escape opening 2301a, similar to the gap CS2 shown in FIG. 37, the protrusion length of the winning prevention protrusion 2351a can be made long, and even if the door member 2351 is in the rearward position, winning can be prevented. Irregular game balls flying out toward the second variable prize opening 235 will surely collide with the protrusion 2351a.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the light emitting structure of the attacker unit 23. FIG. 40(a) is a diagram of the attacker base plate 2303 viewed from the front side.

As shown in FIG. 35 in addition to FIG. installed. On the back side of the attacker front plate 2301 (not shown), in addition to the above-mentioned ball passage forming wall, a plurality of elongated light guide ribs (not shown) extending toward the rear side are provided. A light guide rib is in contact with some of the light emitting diodes D1 among the plurality of light emitting diodes D1. The light from the light emitting diode D1 that is in contact with the light guide rib is emitted forward through the light guide rib.

In addition to the front LED board 2304, the attacker unit 23 is also provided with a rear LED board 2305 and an intermediate LED board 2306. In FIG. 40(a), the blade member 2311 of the special drawing 1 starting opening (variable) 231 is removed, and the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 and the door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 are also removed. In the attacker base plate 2303, behind each of the blade opening 2303a through which the blade member 2311 advances and retreats, the first opening 2303b through which the door member 2341 advances and retreats, and the second opening 2303c through which the door member 2351 advances and retreats, there is a rear LED board 2305. A plurality of mounted light emitting diodes D3 are visible. The light emitting diode D3 located on the back side of the blade opening 2303a emits light during the operation period of the blade member 2311, and the light appears to leak from the back of the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231. The light emitting diode D3 located on the back side of the first opening 2303b emits light during the operation period of the door member 2341, and the light appears to be leaking from the back of the first variable prize opening 234. The light emitting diode D3 located on the back side of the second opening 2303c emits light during the operation period of the door member 2351, and the light appears to leak from the back of the second variable prize opening 235.

FIG. 40(b) is a perspective view showing the three LED boards 2304, 2305, and 2306 from the side so that the positional relationship among the front LED board 2304, middle LED board 2306, and rear LED board 2305 can be seen. , the left side of the figure is the front side.

The intermediate LED board 2306 is arranged at a distance from the rear surface (rear surface) of the attacker base plate 2303 to the rear side, and the space between the intermediate LED board 2306 and the attacker base plate 2303 is covered by a reflector member (not shown). ing. The attacker base plate 2303 is a light-transmitting member that cannot be seen through the rear side, and the plurality of light emitting diodes D2 mounted on the intermediate LED board 2306 are hidden by the attacker base plate 2303 when they are not emitting light. It is not visible. On the other hand, when these light emitting diodes D2 emit light, it appears as if the light is being emitted from the attacker base plate 2303 (surface emitting).

As described above, in the attacker unit 23, a plurality of LED boards (2304 to 2306) are arranged at intervals in the front and rear direction. Although the light emitting diodes D1 to D3 provided on each LED board (2304 to 2306) do not overlap, they may overlap, and the irradiation ranges of the light emitting diodes D1 to D3 may overlap.

According to the above description,
“A first variable ball entry opening [for example, the first variable entry opening 234],
a second variable ball entry opening [for example, second variable entry opening 235];
A deceleration means for reducing the speed of the game ball [for example, the second rear rib 23r3 and/or the second front rib 23f3],
A game machine comprising:
The deceleration means is a means for improving the rate of ball entry into the first variable ball entry opening,
The deceleration means is a means for reducing the rate of ball entry into the second variable ball entry port,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, the ball entry rates of the two variable ball entry ports, the first variable ball entry port and the second variable ball entry port, can be made different by a common deceleration means.

Also,
“The first variable ball entrance opening [for example, the first variable winning opening 234] is located upstream of the second variable ball entrance opening [for example, the second variable winning opening 235] in the rolling direction of the game ball. It is a variable ball entrance located at
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The speed reduction means [for example, the second rear rib 23r3 and/or the second front rib 23f3] is configured to move the game ball in the rolling direction more than the first variable ball entrance opening [for example, the first variable winning opening 234]. It is a means located on the upstream side,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``A first change in which the state changes from a first state [e.g., advancing state] to a third state [e.g., retreating state] in which the ball enters the first variable ball entrance more easily than the first state; comprising means [for example, door member 2341],
In the first state, the first changing means prevents the ball from entering the first variable ball entry hole [for example, the first variable winning hole 234], and the game ball is placed above the first changing means. can be rolled,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first state may be a state in which entry of the ball into the first variable ball entrance opening is prevented by the first changing means.

The first changing means is a means for opening and closing the first variable ball entrance, and the first state is a state in which the first variable ball entrance is closed by the first changing means. The third state may be a state in which the first variable ball entrance opening is opened by the first changing means.

In the first state, the first changing means is a means for blocking the ball entrance path to the first variable ball entrance opening to form a ball path different from the ball entrance path, and The means may be means for retreating from the ball entry path in the third state.

Also,
``The speed reduction means [for example, the second rear rib 23r3 and/or the second front rib 23f3] is configured to move the game ball in the rolling direction more than the second variable ball entrance opening [for example, the second variable winning opening 235]. It is a means located on the upstream side,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“A second change in which the state changes from a second state [e.g., retreating state] to a fourth state [e.g., advancing state] in which the ball enters the second variable ball entry hole more easily than the second state; comprising means [for example, door member 2351],
In the second state, the game ball cannot roll on the second changing means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the second state may be a state in which entry of the ball into the second variable ball entry opening is not supported by the second changing means.

The second changing means is a means for advancing and retreating with respect to the space connected to the second variable ball entry opening, and the second state is a state in which the second changing means retreats from the space. The fourth state may be a state in which the second changing means advances into the space and forms a ball entrance path to the second variable ball entrance opening.

The first variable ball entry port and the second variable ball entry port may be an attacker or an electric chew, or may be a variable ball entry port in the dead ball area, that is, a prize ball is not awarded even if the ball enters the ball. It may also be an entry hole where the ball is not dispensed.

The first changing means and the second changing means may be a ball path distribution device.

Next, the ball storage tray 126 will be explained.

FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the front frame door 106 and the ball storage tray door 108 removed from the main body 104 shown in FIG. 1, as seen diagonally from above and to the left. Note that the left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, and upper frame lamp 122U shown in FIG. 3 are removed from the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. 41.

FIG. 41 shows a production button 136 placed in the center of the ball storage tray door 108 and a ball release button 130 placed diagonally above and to the right of the production button 136. In addition, the operation panel OP arranged on the right side includes an operation key unit 190 in which a cross key 1901, a decision button 1902, a volume adjustment button 1903, and a light intensity adjustment button 1904 are arranged, a ball rental operation button 140, and a return operation button 141. is illustrated.

Further, a ball storage tray 126 is provided on the left side of the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and a ball flow button 131 is arranged between the ball storage tray 126 and the production button 136.

The ball storage tray 126 is composed of a rear wall 127, a tray component member 128, and a movable tray member 129.

The rear wall 127 is provided with a ball payout opening 1271 and a return ball opening 1272. Prize balls and rental balls are paid out from the ball payout port 1271. Game balls that did not reach the game area 124 shown in FIG. 3 among the game balls fired from the firing device 110 shown in FIG. 1 return to the return ball opening 1272. Between the ball payout port 1271 and the return ball port 1272, the ball payout port 1271 is provided at a higher position.

FIG. 42(a) is a perspective view showing the plate component 128 from the rear side, and the front right side in the figure is the rear side. Also, the left side of the figure is the downstream side.

The dish component 128 is attached to the rear wall 127 and has a front wall 128f, a first slope 1281, and a second slope 1282. The first inclined surface 1281 and the second inclined surface 1282 are continuous. The first inclined surface 1281 is located at a higher position than the second inclined surface 1282, and the lower end of the first inclined surface 1281 is connected to the upper end of the second inclined surface 1282. Therefore, the flow of game balls in the ball storage tray 126 is directed from the first inclined surface 1281 to the second inclined surface 1282. In the following explanation, the upstream side and downstream side will be referred to as the upstream side and the downstream side based on the flow of game balls in the ball storage tray 126. Further, the second slope 1282 has a gentler slope than the first slope 1281, but vice versa, the first slope 1281 may have a slope gentler than the second slope 1282. The game balls paid out from the ball paying out port 1271 are paid out onto the first inclined surface 1281. The ball dispensing port 1271 is provided at the upstream end of the ball storage tray 126, and the closer it is to the ball dispensing port 1271, the more upstream it is, and the further away from the ball dispensing port 1271, the more downstream it is.

The arrow pointing from the right side to the left side shown in FIG. 42(a) is an arrow pointing from the left side to the right side in FIG. 41 because FIG. The arrow represents the direction in which the game ball flows (from the upstream side to the downstream side).

A notch 1283 is provided on the second inclined surface 1282 on the downstream side of the rear wall 127 . The size of this notch 1283 is larger than the game ball.

In the ball storage tray 126 shown in FIG. 41, this notch 1283 is completely closed by a shutter portion 1291. The shutter portion 1291 is provided on the dish movable member 129 that is movable in the left-right direction. FIG. 41 shows the shutter portion 1291 when the dish movable member 129 is in the initial position.

FIG. 42(b) is a perspective view showing the movable plate movable member 129 from the rear side, similar to the plate component member 128 shown in FIG. is on the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), the dish movable member 129 is provided with a shutter portion 1291 on the upstream side of a stay portion 1290 extending in the moving direction. Note that a mounting projection 1290a and two sliding projections 1290b are provided on the front side of the stay portion 1290.

The shutter portion 1291 has a step Bp1 between the front portion 1291f and the rear portion 1291b. That is, the front portion 1291f is at the same height as the second inclined surface 1282, but the rear portion 1291b is at a height one step lower than the front portion 1291f. The game ball returned from the return ball opening 1272 is returned to this rear portion 1291b.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), the rear portion 1291b of the shutter portion 1291 is inclined downward toward the downstream side.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 42(a), the dish component 128 is provided with a ball passage 1284 that continues while sloping downward toward the downstream side. Note that the spherical passage 1284 is composed of a part 1286 of the dish constituent member 128 and a passage member 1284a that is separate from the dish constituent member 128.

FIG. 42(c) is a perspective view showing the movable plate movable member 129 and the plate forming member 128 from the downstream side when they are in the initial position as in FIG. 41, and the front left side of the figure is the downstream side. Moreover, in this FIG. 42(c), the right side of the figure is the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 42(c), when the dish movable member 129 is at the initial position, the rear portion 1291b of the shutter portion 1291 is connected to the ball passage 1284. This ball passage 1284 is a passage connected to the firing device 110.

As shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(c), a step Bp2 is also provided on the front side of the ball path 1284, and a game ball located in front of the step Bp2 will fall into the ball path 1284. do.

Of the game balls stored in the ball storage tray 126, the game balls on the downstream side are lined up in a line in this ball passage 1284. When the ball ejection button 130 arranged diagonally above and to the right of the production button 136 shown in FIG. 41 is pressed, the game ball is ejected from the downstream side of the ball passage 1284.

Further, the movable plate member 129 is provided with a movable piece 1292. This movable piece 1292 stands up from the rear portion 1291b of the shutter portion 1291 along the rear wall 127. The movable piece 1292 is provided with an action portion 1292a that protrudes above the second inclined surface 1282.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), a movable region front groove 1285 recessed forward is provided at the end of the second inclined surface 1282 on the rear wall 127 side. The movable region front groove 1285 extends to the end of the first inclined surface 1281 on the second inclined surface 1282 side (downstream side). The rear wall 127 is also provided with a rear movable region groove 1273 (see FIG. 43) that is recessed toward the rear in correspondence with the front movable region groove 1285. The movable region rear groove 1273 extends downstream from the movable region front groove 1285 by the width w of the action portion 1292a shown in FIG. 42(b). The movable piece 1292 moves within the space formed by the movable area front groove 1285 and the movable area rear groove 1273 in accordance with the movement of the dish movable member 129.

In the above description, the shutter portion 1291 and the movable piece 1292 are integrated, but they may be separate members.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing stepwise how the dish movable member 129 moves. This FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the front frame door 106 and the door 108 with a ball storage plate when viewed from a little forward side from directly above. In FIG. 43, the flow of game balls in the ball storage tray 126 is from the left side to the right side.

FIG. 43(a) is a diagram showing the situation when the movable plate member 129 is at the initial position. That is, the movable plate member 129 shown in FIG. 43(a) is in the same state as the movable plate member 129 shown in FIGS. It is completely covered by the shutter section 1291. That is, the shutter section 1291 is in a fully closed state. Further, the movable piece 1292 is located at the most downstream side of the space formed by the movable region front groove 1285 and the movable region rear groove 1273, and its action portion 1292a is located at the upstream end of the notch portion 1283.

The plate movable member 129 moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position when the ball flow button 131 provided between the ball storage plate 126 and the production button 136 is pushed down to the deepest position.

FIG. 43(b) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the plate movable member 129 is at an intermediate position that is exactly between the initial position and the maximum movement position.

The shutter portion 1291 of the movable plate member 129 has moved to the upstream side (to the left in the figure), and only the upstream half of the notch 1283 in the second inclined surface 1282 is closed by the shutter portion 1291. First, an opening is formed in the downstream half (right side in the figure). That is, the shutter section 1291 is in a half-open state. The size of this opening is larger than the size of the game ball, and the game ball is discharged downward from this opening. That is, even if the ball flow button 131 is pressed, if the shutter portion 1291 moves and the size of the opening becomes larger than the size of the game ball, the game ball stored in the ball storage tray 126 will be removed. It will be discharged from that opening. Note that a part of the ball removal passage 1266 (see FIG. 44) is visible at the back of the opening.

Further, the movable piece 1292 is located exactly in the middle of the space formed by the movable region front groove 1285 and the movable region rear groove 1273.

When the ball sinking button 131 is further pressed from the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the dish movable member 129 is moved to the maximum movement position.

FIG. 43(c) is a diagram showing the situation when the dish movable member 129 is at the maximum movement position.

In FIG. 43(c), the shutter portion 1291 has moved further upstream (to the left in the figure) and is in a position completely removed from the notch 1283 in the second slope 1282. That is, the shutter section 1291 is in a fully open state. Therefore, the entire notch 1283 is an opening, and game balls are ejected. Note that here too, a part of the ball removal passage 1266 (see FIG. 44) is visible at the back of the opening.

Further, the movable piece 1292 is located at the most upstream side of the space formed by the movable region front groove 1285 and the movable region rear groove 1273. That is, the movable piece 1292 cannot move upstream any further. The action portion 1292a of the movable piece 1292 shown in FIG. 43(c) is located at the boundary br between the first inclined surface 1281 and the second inclined surface 1282. That is, the action portion 1292a is located at the downstream end of the first inclined surface 1281. Note that when the dish movable member 129 is moved to the maximum movement position, the action part 1292a may be moved further upstream than the boundary br, or conversely, it may be moved only to the front of the boundary br. You may choose not to do so.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a mechanism in which the dish movable member 129 moves when the ball sink button 131 is pressed, and FIG. 44 (a) shows the state before the ball sink button 131 is pressed on the front side. It is a figure shown from. That is, the ball sink button 131 shown in FIG. 44(a) is at the initial position, and FIG. 44(a) shows the state when the movable dish member 129 is at the initial position, as shown in FIG. It is a diagram. On the other hand, FIG. 44(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball flow button 131 is pressed down to the deepest position, viewed from the front side. That is, the ball sink button 131 shown in FIG. 44(b) is at the maximum pressed position, and FIG. FIG.

In addition to the ball draining button 131 and the movable dish member 129, FIG. 44 shows a movable base member 1260, a tension spring 1263, a button base 1264, a rotating lever 1265, and a ball removing passage 1266.

The movable base member 1260 has a button portion 1261 to which the ball sink button 131 is attached via a button base 1264, and a movable region portion 1262 to which the dish movable member 129 is attached.

The button base 1264 extends in the direction in which the ball flow button 131 is pressed, and its upper end is fixed to the ball flow button 131. Further, a locked portion 1264a is provided at the lower end of the button base 1264, and an interlocking protrusion 1264b is provided at an intermediate position. The button base 1264 is inserted into the button portion 1261 of the movable base member 1260 so as to be movable in the vertical direction from above.

The upper end of the tension spring 1263 is locked to the upper end of the button portion 1261 of the movable base member 1260, and the lower end is locked to a locked portion 1264a provided at the lower end of the button base 1264. As a result, when the pressing hand is released from the ball flow button 131, the ball flow button 131 returns to its initial position due to the action of this tension spring 1263.

The rotation lever 1265 is a triangular member, and a rotation center axis 1265a is provided near one vertex (the upper left vertex in the figure). A short elongated hole is provided near each of the remaining two vertices. The rotation center shaft 1265a is rotatably attached to the button portion 1261 of the movable base member 1260. The interlocking protrusion 1264b provided on the button base 1264 passes through a vertical groove 1261a (see FIG. 44(b)) formed on the button portion 1261, and the tip portion is connected to one short length provided on the rotary lever 1265. It is inserted into the hole and attached to the rotating lever 1265. Further, the mounting protrusion 1290a provided at the front downstream end of the stay portion 1290 (see FIG. 42(b)) in the movable plate movable member 129 passes through the lateral groove 1261b formed in the button portion 1261, and the tip portion is , is inserted into the other short elongated hole of the rotating lever 1265, and the mounting protrusion 1290a is attached to the lower end portion of the rotating lever 1265.

A movable region portion 1262 of the movable base member 1260 is a portion extending upstream from the button portion 1261, and a movable groove 1262a connecting the upstream side and the downstream side is formed in this movable region portion 1262. Two sliding protrusions 1290b provided on the stay portion 1290 of the movable plate movable member 129 are inserted into the movable groove 1262a. These two sliding protrusions 1290b are located on the downstream side of the movable groove 1262a, although only one sliding protrusion 1290b is visible in FIG. 44(a). On the other hand, in FIG. 44(b), these two sliding protrusions 1290b are located upstream of the movable groove 1262a.

When the ball flow button 131 starts to be pressed down (see arrow P shown in FIG. 44(b)), the interlocking protrusion 1264b provided on the button base 1264 moves down along the vertical groove 1261a, and the rotating lever 1265 moves to the center of rotation. Rotation starts in the clockwise direction in FIG. 44 (see arrow RM shown in FIG. 44(b)) about the axis 1265a. Due to the rotation of the rotation lever 1265, the attachment protrusion 1290a of the movable dish member 129, which was attached to the lower end portion of the rotation lever 1265, is guided by the lateral groove 1261b and starts moving toward the upstream side. . As a result, the two sliding projections 1290b of the dish movable member 129 are guided by the movable groove 1262a and move upstream, and as explained using FIG. 43(b), the shutter part 1291 also moves upstream. As the movable piece 1292 moves and an opening is formed in the notch 1283, the movable piece 1292 also moves upstream.

When the ball sink button 131 is pressed down to the maximum pressing position, the movable dish member 129 moves to the maximum movement position, which is the upstream end, as shown in FIG. 44(b), and as explained using FIG. 43(c). Then, the shutter portion 1291 moves to a position completely removed from the notch portion 1283, the entire notch portion 1283 becomes open, and the movable piece 1292 also moves to the upstream end. The ball extraction passage 1266 shown in FIG. 44 is a passage connected to an opening formed in the notch 1283, and the game balls that have passed through the ball extraction passage 1266 are stored outside the pachinko machine 100 (for example, in a game ball collection container (commonly known as a game ball collection container)). , dollar box)).

As described above, when the pressing hand is released from the ball flow button 131, the ball flow button 131 returns to the initial position due to the action of the tension spring 1263, and the dish movable member 129 moves as shown in FIG. 44(a). become a state.

Next, the function of the movable piece 1292 will be explained. Note that the action of the movable piece 1292 is, strictly speaking, the action of an action portion 1292a provided on the movable piece 1292 that protrudes above the second inclined surface 1282.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing step by step how the movable piece 1292 comes into contact with one game ball retained in the ball storage tray 126. This FIG. 45 shows the state when viewed from a little forward side from directly above, centering on the ball storage tray 126, and the ball flow button 131 is shown on the right side (the same goes to FIG. 49). Moreover, in FIG. 45, the flow of game balls in the ball storage tray 126 is from the left side to the right side (the same goes to FIG. 49).

FIG. 45(a) is a diagram showing the state when the movable plate member 129 is at the initial position, and the cutout portion 1283 is completely closed by the shutter portion 1291. Further, the movable piece 1292 is located at the most downstream side of the space formed by the movable area front groove 1285 and the movable area rear groove 1273 (hereinafter referred to as movable space SK), and its operating portion 1292a is located in the notch portion 1283. It is located at the upstream end. In this example, one game ball B1 remains on the rear wall 127 side on the upstream side of the second inclined surface 1282, that is, at a position across the movable space SK. More specifically, it stays at an intermediate position between the upstream side and the downstream side in the movable space SK. If the game ball has dust or oil components attached to it, the game ball may stay like this even on an inclined surface.

In FIG. 45(b), the ball flow button 131 is pressed, and the movable piece 1292 moves from the most downstream position of the movable space SK toward the upstream side, and has reached an intermediate position. One game ball B1 stays at the intermediate position, and the movable piece 1292 contacts the game ball B1. When the movable piece 1292 comes into contact with the game ball B1, the user releases the ball flow button 131. That is, the pressing operation of the ball flow button 131 is completed before the movable plate member 129 reaches the maximum movement position. When the pressing operation of the ball sink button 131 is completed, the dish movable member 129 returns to the initial position.

FIG. 45(c) is a diagram showing a state when the movable plate movable member 129 returns to the initial position. When the movable piece 1292 contacts the game ball B1, an external force is applied to the game ball B1 by the movable piece 1292 in contact, and the game ball B1 that has been staying moves. If the game ball B1 moves even a little, the game ball B1 will flow down to the downstream side due to the slope of the second slope 1282. FIG. 45(c) shows the game ball B1 flowing down to the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 45(d), which continues from FIG. It falls and flows down the ball path 1284.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing step by step how the movable piece 1292 comes into contact with one game ball retained on the upstream side of the ball storage tray 126.

Similar to FIG. 45(a), FIG. 46(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the dish movable member 129 is at the initial position, and the cutout portion 1283 is completely closed by the shutter portion 1291. Moreover, the movable piece 1292 is located at the most downstream side of the movable space SK. In this example, one game ball B2 remains at a position corresponding to the upstream end position that is the most upstream side of the movable space SK. The game ball B2 shown in FIG. 46(a) is located exactly at the boundary br between the first inclined surface 1281 and the second inclined surface 1282. Therefore, it can be said that the game ball B2 is located at the upstream end of the second inclined surface 1282, and it can also be said that it is located at the downstream end of the first inclined surface 1281. As mentioned above, if the game ball has dust or oil components attached to it, the game ball may stagnate even if it is on an inclined surface, but if it is at the boundary br where the slope angle changes, the first slope A game ball may be caught between the surface 1281 and the second inclined surface 1282 and may remain there.

In FIG. 46(b), the ball sink button 131 is pressed down to the maximum pressing position, and the dish movable member 129 moves to the maximum moving position. As a result, the entire notch 1283 becomes open, and the movable piece 1292 has reached the upstream end position of the movable space SK, and the movable piece 1292 comes into contact with the game ball B2. Even if the movable piece 1292 contacts the game ball B2, if the ball flow button 131 is kept pressed to the maximum pressed position, the dish movable member 129 remains at the maximum movement position.

FIG. 46(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the dish movable member 129 remains at the maximum movement position.

When the movable piece 1292 contacts the game ball B2, an external force is applied to the game ball B2 by the movable piece 1292 in contact, and the game ball B2 that has been staying on the upstream side moves. If the game ball B2 moves even a little, the game ball B2 will flow down to the downstream side due to the slope of the second slope 1282.

In FIG. 46(d) continuing from FIG. 46(c), the entire notch 1283 remains open, and the game ball B2 flowing down falls into this opening before flowing into the ball passage 1284. The game ball B2 that has fallen into the opening is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 through a ball removal passage 1266 that is partially visible on the back side of the opening.

The area in which the movable piece 1292 moves (movable space SK) is on the upstream side of the notch 1283. Therefore, the movable piece 1292 contacts the staying game ball B2 on the upstream side of the notch 1283 and applies an external force. Therefore, if the shutter part 1291 moves and the size of the opening remains larger than the size of the game ball, the game ball B2 that comes into contact with the movable piece 1292 and falls into the opening.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which two game balls are retained in the ball storage tray 126.

Similar to FIG. 45(a), FIG. 47(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the dish movable member 129 is at the initial position, and the cutout portion 1283 is completely closed by the shutter portion 1291. Moreover, the movable piece 1292 is located at the most downstream side of the movable space SK. In this example as well, one game ball B3 remains at a position in the middle of the movable space SK, as in FIG. 45(a). This position is on the upstream side of the second inclined surface 1282. Furthermore, when viewed in the direction in which the game balls flow in the ball storage tray 126, the second game ball B4 is retained at approximately the same level as the first game ball B3. That is, the second game ball B4 also remains at a position on the upstream side of the second inclined surface 1282.

In FIG. 47(b), the ball flow button 131 is pressed down, the movable piece 1292 has reached the intermediate position of the movable space SK, and the movable piece 1292 comes into contact with the game ball B3. When the movable piece 1292 comes into contact with the game ball B3, the user releases the ball flow button 131.

In FIG. 47(c), the game ball B3 to which an external force is applied by the movable piece 1292 that has come into contact begins to move, and collides with the second game ball B4 that was staying at the end of the movement. Both the game ball B3 that the movable piece 1292 contacted and the game ball B4 that the game ball B3 collided with flow down to the downstream side due to the inclination of the second slope surface 1282. As shown in this example, even the game ball B4 staying at a position away from the movable area of the movable piece 1292 may be made to flow down. In addition, even if the game ball stays on the downstream side of the game ball B3 that the movable piece 1292 has contacted, it may be possible to make it flow down by the game ball B3 that the movable piece 1292 has contacted.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing step by step an example where the game ball stays upstream of the game ball that the movable piece 1292 has contacted. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 47 will be mainly explained.

In this example as well, one game ball B5 stays at a position that is in the middle of the movable space SK, as in FIG. 47(a). The second game ball B6 is retained at the upstream end of the ball storage tray 126, which is upstream of the first game ball B5. That is, the first game ball B5 is staying at a position on the upstream side of the second slope 1282, and the second game ball B6 is staying at the upstream end of the first slope 1281.

In FIG. 48(b), the ball flow button 131 is pressed, and the movable piece 1292 moves toward the upstream side and contacts the game ball B5 at an intermediate position of the movable space SK. In this example as well, when the movable piece 1292 comes into contact with the game ball B5, the user releases the ball flow button 131.

In FIG. 48(c), the game ball B5 to which an external force is applied toward the upstream side by the movable piece 1292 that moves upstream starts to move upstream, and the ball B5 that has been staying at the upstream end of the ball storage tray 126 is removed. It collides with the second game ball B6. Both the game ball B5 that the movable piece 1292 contacted and the game ball B6 that the game ball B5 collided with flow down to the downstream side due to the slope of the first slope 1281, and then further downstream due to the slope of the second slope 1282. flowing down to the side. As shown in this example, even the game ball B6 staying at a position on the upstream side of the movable area (movable space SK) of the movable piece 1292 may be able to be made to flow down.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of eliminating ball jamming in the ball storage tray 126 using the movable piece 1292.

Although many game balls are stored in the ball storage tray 126 shown in FIG. They are not lined up in a line facing each other. This is because balls are jammed in the ball storage tray 126, and the game balls are stuck together and cannot flow downstream.

In FIG. 49(b), the ball flow button 131 is pressed down about half way, and the movable piece 1292 has reached near the intermediate position of the movable space SK. After pressing the ball flow button 131 about halfway, release the ball flow button 131. Although the movable piece 1292 shown in FIG. 49(b) is buried in the stored game balls, it moves therein and contacts a plurality of game balls to apply an external force. Further, the shutter section 1291 also moves to the upstream side, and this shutter section 1291 also contacts the bottoms of the plurality of game balls to apply an external force. As a result, ball jamming within the ball storage tray 126 is eliminated.

In FIG. 49(c), the ball jam is eliminated and the stored game balls flow to the downstream side of the ball passage 1284, and the game balls are lined up in a line in the ball passage 1284 shown in FIG. 49(c). There is.

Note that if the ball jamming is not resolved easily, the movable piece 1292 may be reciprocated at high speed by rapidly pressing the ball flow button 131 several times in succession.

Furthermore, by releasing the ball flow button 131 that has been pressed, the movable piece 1292 moves toward the downstream side. The movable piece 1292 that moves toward the downstream side can also apply an external force by contacting the game ball, making it possible to move the game ball. In particular, it is possible to apply an external force toward the downstream side, making it possible to force the game ball to flow downstream more vigorously.

Further, when moving the movable piece 1292 toward the downstream side, the acting portion 1292a is lowered to be lower than the second inclined surface 1282, and only when moving toward the upstream side, the acting portion 1292a is lowered to the second inclined surface 1282. Alternatively, when the movable piece 1292 moves toward the upstream side, the acting portion 1292a may be lower than the second inclined surface 1282. The acting portion 1292a may be configured to protrude beyond the second inclined surface 1282 only when the movable plate member 129 moves toward the downstream side. This is an example of a drive unit that applies an external force, and is one that moves and changes its position. However, the above drive unit may be one that does not change its position and vibrates, or one that rotates. There may be. Alternatively, the posture may change. Furthermore, part or all of the bottom surface of the ball storage tray 126, which serves as the ball mounting surface, may be movable (e.g., up and down), vibrate, or rotate. The inclination angle of a part or the whole may be changed. Furthermore, the driving section does not necessarily have to come into contact with the staying game balls, and may, for example, be one that blows wind from a position away from the staying game balls.

Furthermore, although the front frame door 106 and the ball storage tray door 108 are separate bodies and can be opened and closed separately, they may be an integrated door body that can be opened and closed as a unit. . Furthermore, in addition to the ball storage tray 126, a second ball storage tray may be provided, and the same member as the tray movable member 129 may be provided in the second ball storage tray as well. This second ball storage tray may be placed upstream or downstream of the ball storage tray 126, or may be placed at the same level. It's okay.

According to the above description,
``A ball storage plate [e.g., ball storage plate 126],
An operation unit [e.g., ball flow button 131],
a drive unit [for example, the dish movable member 129 or the movable piece 1292] that is driven when the operation unit is operated;
A game machine comprising:
The drive unit is provided in the ball storage tray,
The drive unit is configured to drive a certain game ball [for example, game balls B1 to B6] stored in the ball storage tray [for example, to move, rotate, vibrate, or discharge fluid. It is something that applies an external force by
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

By operating the operation part, the game balls staying in the ball storage tray can be caused to flow downstream by external force from the drive part without being touched by the player's hands, which is hygienic. At the same time, the player can concentrate on the game.

The ball storage tray is equipped with a firing means for firing game balls toward a game area, and is a tray in which game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls fired from the firing means return. It may be a tray from which prize balls are dispensed, or a tray from which rental balls are dispensed. It may also be a tray that can discharge the stored game balls, for example, a tray that can be discharged to another tray, or a tray that can be discharged to a game ball collection container (so-called dollar box). There may be. That is, the ball storage plate may be a so-called upper plate, a so-called lower plate, or a plate that combines the functions of an upper plate and a lower plate (an upper plate and a lower plate). It's okay.

The drive unit may vibrate, rotate, change its posture, or discharge fluid when the operation unit is operated. It may be. Alternatively, it may perform a certain movement (for example, a vertical movement and/or a horizontal movement).

Also,
“When the operation unit is operated, the drive unit moves from a non-contact position [for example, the initial position] to a contact position with the certain game ball, and by contacting the certain game ball, an external force is applied. It gives
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the drive section may be a movable section.

Also,
“The ball storage tray is provided with a ball removal opening [for example, a notch 1283] that opens and closes,
The ball extraction opening changes from a closed state [for example, a state in which the shutter section 1291 is closed] to an open state [for example, a state in which the shutter section 1291 is opened] by driving the drive section. For example, FIG. 43],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The drive unit applies an external force to the certain game ball on the upstream side of the ball storage tray from the ball extraction opening,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the upstream side in the ball storage tray may refer to the upstream side in the downstream direction in which game balls flow down the ball storage tray (the same applies below). The flow direction is determined by a change in the height position of the lower surface (floor surface) of the ball storage tray, and generally the direction from a high position to a low position is the flow direction (the same applies below).

The ball storage tray may have a ball dispensing port on the upstream side in the downstream direction. Prize balls and rental balls are paid out from the ball payout port. The closer it is to the ball dispensing port, the more upstream it can be said, and the further away from the ball dispensing port, it can be said to be downstream (the same applies below). In addition, the ball storage tray may have a return ball opening in addition to the ball dispensing opening. The return ball opening may be provided on the downstream side of the ball dispensing port in the flow direction.

The game player may include a firing means for firing game balls into a game area, and the ball storage tray may be connected to the firing means on a downstream side.

Also,
"Driving in the drive unit involves moving a part that applies an external force to a certain game ball [for example, the movable piece 1292 or the acting part 1292a] from the upstream side to the downstream side in the ball storage tray. For example, moving by releasing the ball flow button 131 that was being pressed]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In addition, the drive in the said drive part may only move the part which applies external force to the said certain game ball toward the downstream from the upstream side in the said ball storage tray.

By moving the part that applies external force from the upstream side toward the downstream side, it is possible to apply an external force that moves downstream to the certain ball.

Also,
"Driving in the drive unit involves moving a part that applies an external force to a certain game ball [for example, the movable piece 1292 or the acting part 1292a] from the downstream side to the upstream side in the ball storage tray. For example, moving by pressing the ball flow button 131].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In addition, the drive in the said drive part may only move the part which applies an external force to the said certain game ball toward the upstream side from the downstream side in the said ball storage tray.

By moving the part that applies the external force from the downstream side toward the upstream side, it is possible to apply an external force to the certain ball that once moves upstream, and the certain ball is moved upstream from itself. It collides with the staying game balls and eventually flows downstream with the game balls.

The drive unit may reciprocate between the upstream side and the downstream side of the ball storage tray when the operation unit is operated, and apply an external force by contacting the certain game ball. good.

Also,
``The driving section may be able to apply an external force by driving even game balls that are not in direct contact [e.g., game ball B4 and game ball B6] [e.g., Fig. 47] or the example shown in Figure 48],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the certain game ball includes not only the game ball that the drive unit directly contacts, but also the game ball that cannot be directly contacted. This is because an external force can be applied to a game ball that cannot be directly contacted via the game ball to which an external force is applied by direct contact.

Also,
“The ball storage tray has a first sloped portion [e.g., first sloped surface 1281] and a second sloped portion [e.g., second sloped surface 1282],
The second sloped part is a sloped part with a gentler slope than the first sloped part [for example, FIG. 42(a)],
The drive unit applies an external force by driving a certain game ball [for example, game ball B1 or game ball B2] stored in the second inclined part,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

FIG. 50 is a front view of an enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 100h shown in FIG. 50, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game machine. That is, the game medium ejected from the ejection means 101h to the game area 102h can be discharged from the game area 102h and supplied to the ejection means 101h again. Further, a display means 103h for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 102h on the front of the game machine, and is shown in FIG. A ball storage tray 126 shown in FIG. 1 that can be touched by a player is not provided. Note that a ball storage tray that cannot be touched by the player is provided separately, and the technique of the ball storage tray explained using FIGS. 41 to 49 can also be applied. You can expect great effects.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 100h shown in FIG. 50 is used by enclosing balls and circulating the enclosed balls within the pachinko machine. may be performed by credit.

Next, other gaming machines to which the present invention can be applied (for example, pinball gaming machines such as the pachinko machine 100, and reel gaming machines such as slot machines) will be explained in detail using FIGS. 51 to 67. do. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 51 to 67 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 51 to 67, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 67, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 51 to 67.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIG. 51. Note that this figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine in which a player can earn a profit when a predetermined condition is met, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, and a ball storage tray door 108. A device 110 and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the player side).

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member in a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (such as an island facility) provided at a game machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge part 112, and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base body. . Further, the main body 104 is formed into a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk at a store (gaming parlor) in which this pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close this main body 104, and a main body open sensor 1041 is provided to detect when the main body 104 is opened.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge part 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely. This is a door member with an opening 116. A clerk at the game parlor can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 is also provided to detect when the front frame door 106 is opened. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116 of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door body. Note that a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 at the front of the Pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be openable and closable. This ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pushing a release lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a ball storage dish door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage dish door 108 is opened. The ball storage tray door 108 includes an upper tray 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with a passageway for guiding the game balls to the firing device 110. , a lower tray 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 126, a ball removal button 130 for ejecting game balls stored in the upper tray 126 into the lower tray 128 by the player's operation, A ball ejection lever 132 that, when operated, ejects the game balls stored in the lower tray 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box), and a ball discharge lever 132 that, when operated, ejects the game balls stored in the lower tray 128, into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box); A ball firing handle 134 that launches the ball into the game area 124, a performance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices 2 to 5 (see FIG. 53) by the player's operation, and A chance button lamp 138 that causes a button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that instructs a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game parlor to lend balls, and an instruction to the card unit to return a player's balance. The player has a return operation button 142 for performing the above operations, and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the player's balance and the status of the card unit. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 51 is provided with a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) that detects when the lower tray 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 is also provided.

The firing device 110 includes a firing rod 146 that is attached below the main body 104 and rotates when the ball firing handle 134 is operated by the player, and a firing mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , is provided. This firing device 110, while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, releases the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). This corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front side, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the gaming area 124 is not shown in FIG. 51, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 53.

FIG. 52 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 51 seen from the back side.

The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has a ball tank 150 which has an opening opening upward and is used to temporarily store game balls. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding balls falling through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The dispensing device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. This dispensing device 152 is detachable and connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when attached to a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and descended into the payout device 152, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Accordingly, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that conveys the game ball by applying a driving force to the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor that detects the passing of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, it sends either a high or low signal. The other signal, either high or low, is output to the payout control section 700 (see FIG. 60). The game balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach an upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 receives a predetermined amount of Based on the fulfillment of the conditions, the game value (game balls) in an amount corresponding to the grant conditions is awarded (paid out) to the player using this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 60) that performs control processing for the overall game, and a main board case 158 that stores the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 60) that performs control processing for the overall game. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, the first sub-board case 162 houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 60), which performs control processing related to presentation based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. A second sub-board case 166 that accommodates a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 60) that performs control processing related to production, and a payout control unit 700 (which performs control processing related to payout of game balls). 60) and a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 that is equipped with an error release switch 168 that cancels an error by the operation of a game store clerk, and a launch control unit 730 (see FIG. A launch board case 176 houses a launch board 174 constituting the launch board 174 (see FIG. 60), and a power switch that constitutes a power supply control unit 760 (see FIG. 60) that supplies power to various electrical game machines and turns the power on and off by operation by a game store clerk. 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 houses a power supply board 182, and a signal between the payout control unit 700 and the card unit. A CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving is provided.

Further, on the main board 156, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and an accessory ratio/setting display 196 are provided. When the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to a setting change mode in which at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities can be set. can. In the setting change mode, the current settings are displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the settings by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the configuration may be such that the settings can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and placed inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. The accessory ratio/setting display 196 has two digit 7-segment LEDs arranged above and below, and a single-digit 7-segment LED on the right side as a module, as shown in FIG. 66(A). The accessory ratio monitor is an indicator that notifies the accessory ratio (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current settings. The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a single-color red LED, but it may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. Note that at least a part of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200 so as to be visible to the player.

Further, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 53 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 viewed from the front. Here, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 53 is the front-back direction (sometimes called the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the near side is sometimes called the front side, the front side, or the player side. , the back side is sometimes called the rear side, back side, or back side. The left-right direction in the paper of FIG. 53 is the width direction (sometimes called the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand is sometimes called the left and the right hand is called the right when viewed from the front. The vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 53 is the height direction (sometimes called the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher side is sometimes called the top, and the lower side is sometimes called the bottom.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front side, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted as the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104, but for example, the left side part 200a of the game board 200 in the front view is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 in the front view (hinge part 112 side), and the left side part 200a in the front view is inserted here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the right side 200b of the game board 200 when viewed from the front is pressed against the main body 104 while rotating the game board 200 with the center of rotation as the rotation center. There are cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is disposed at the lower right of the main body 201. When detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, stopping of the game to make it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which game balls can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104. In the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the shot game ball.

Areas other than the gaming area 124 of the gaming board 200 may be referred to as non-gaming areas. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Furthermore, at least the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the game ball launch intensity is maximized can be called the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of a production device or the like within the game area 124. The game area 124 is called a downstream area in that game balls flow down during a game, and the non-gaming area is sometimes called a non-drift area in that game balls do not flow down during a game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a downstream area, but the area where the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a presentation device or the like may be called a non-flow area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged approximately in the center of the gaming area 124. Below the gaming area 124, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol retention lamp 216, a first special symbol retention lamp 218, A second special symbol holding lamp 220 is provided. Note that, hereinafter, the ordinary pattern may be referred to as a "normal pattern" and the special pattern may be referred to as a "special pattern".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative patterns and various displays used for production, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and a production display area 208d. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the performance display area 208d displays images used for performance. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display, a reel (drum) display, a leaf display, a plasma display, and a projector.

The ordinary figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying ordinary figures, and is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs.

The normal pattern holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of normal pattern fluctuation games (details will be described later) that are on hold, and allows the normal pattern fluctuation games to be held up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). There is. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure variable games, and makes it possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. In addition, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and makes it possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special symbol variable games. .

In addition, if it is possible to set a high probability state in which a jackpot is likely to occur or a low probability state in which a jackpot is unlikely to occur as a gaming state, a high probability medium lamp may be provided. This lamp is a lamp to indicate that the gaming state is a high probability state where a jackpot is likely to occur, or is about to become a high probability state, and changes the gaming state from a low probability state where a jackpot is difficult to occur to a high probability state. The light may be turned on when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state, and may be turned off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, predetermined ball entrance openings, for example, general winning openings 226a and 226b are arranged.

One or more general winning holes 226a and 226b are provided on the left and right sides of the gaming area 124, respectively. Here, the general winning hole placed on the left side of the gaming area 124 is referred to as a general winning hole 226a, and the general winning hole placed on the right side of the gaming area 124 is referred to as a general winning hole 226b. When a ball enters the general winning hole 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and, assuming that the ball has won in the general winning hole 226a, drives the payout device 152 and awards a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls). When the ball is discharged to the upper tray 126 as a ball and enters the general winning opening 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that it has won a prize in the general winning opening 226b, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls ( For example, one ball is discharged onto the upper tray 126 as a prize ball. The players can freely take out the balls discharged onto the upper tray 126, and with these configurations, prize balls are paid out to the players based on winnings. The game ball that entered the general winning hole 226a and the game ball that entered the general winning hole 226b are detected by separate ball detection sensors. In addition, if a plurality of general winning holes 226a are provided on the left side of the gaming area 124, the ball paths that guide the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by separate ball detection sensors. In addition, if a plurality of general winning holes 226b are provided on the right side of the gaming area 124, the ball paths that guide the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by separate ball detection sensors. The balls that entered the general winning holes 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, on the lower right side of the game board 200, a variable winning a prize opening unit 6 is arranged. This variable winning a prize hole unit 6 is provided with a variable winning a prize hole 234, a first special figure starting hole 230, a second special figure starting hole 232, and a regular figure starting hole 228. The ball will not enter these winning holes 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 provided in the variable winning hole unit 6 unless the ball is hit right. The game board 200 is provided with a large number of game nails, but in FIG. 53, only the game nail 238 that prevents the ball hit to the left from heading toward the variable winning a prize opening unit 6 is shown.

The variable winning hole 234 is called an attacker, and will be described in detail later.

The second special figure starting opening 232 is provided below the variable winning opening 234. The second special figure starting opening 232 is constituted by an electric tulip, and includes a second special figure starting opening 2320 and a tongue-shaped piece 2321 (see FIG. 56) that can move forward and backward in the left and right direction. When the ball is advanced, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second special figure starting opening. Note that the state in which the tongue-like piece 2321 is advanced is a state in which the second special figure starting opening 2320 is closed by the tongue-like piece 2321, and may also be referred to as a state in which the tongue-like piece 2321 is closed. The tongue-shaped piece 2321 advances and retreats at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times when a winning symbol is won in the common symbol variation game and the common symbol display device 210 stops displaying the winning symbol. Note that the state in which the tongue 2321 is retracted is a state in which the second special figure starting opening 2320 is opened, and may also be referred to as a state in which the tongue 2321 is open. , the tongue-like piece 2321 may open and close. When the special 2 ball detection sensor 232c (see FIG. 55, etc.) detects a ball entering the second special symbol starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to award a predetermined number of balls (for example, 3 balls). The ball is discharged onto the upper tray 126, and a special figure variable game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The regular figure starting port 228 is provided below the second special figure starting port 232. The regular game starting port 228 is not of a gate type, and the ball that enters the regular game starting port 228 is also guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. When the ball detecting sensor 228c (see FIG. 55, etc.) for normal figures detects the entry of the ball into the normal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal figure fluctuation game using the normal figure display device 210. As mentioned above, when the ball is hit to the left, the ball will not enter the normal pattern starting hole 228, and therefore the tongue will not move forward or backward. On the other hand, if the ball is hit to the right, the game ball can be expected to enter the normal pattern starting hole 228, so the tongue-like piece 2321 may advance or retreat due to the winning of the normal pattern fluctuation game. That is, while there is no possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting hole 232 while hitting the left hand, there is a possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting hole 232 while hitting the right hand.

The first special figure starting port 230 is provided below the regular figure starting port 228. When the special 1 ball detection sensor 230c (see FIG. 55) detects the ball entering the first special symbol starting port 230, it drives the payout device 152, which will be described later, to release a predetermined number of balls (for example, 3). is discharged onto the upper tray 126 as a prize ball, and a special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The balls entering the first special figure starting port 230 are also guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 51 has a specification that starts variable display of special figure 2 with priority over special figure 1 (a pachinko machine with such a specification is sometimes called a ``special 2 priority variable machine'', etc.). ). However, it is possible to execute the variable display of special figure 2 even while the variable display of special figure 1 is being displayed, and the variable display of special figure 1 can be executed even while the variable display of special figure 2 is being displayed (such as this). A pachinko machine with such specifications may be referred to as a "simultaneous variable machine."

Furthermore, in the gaming area 124, a plurality of disk-shaped ball hitting direction converting members 236 called windmills are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any prize opening or starting opening can be used to win a prize. An out port 240 is provided for guiding missing balls to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging them to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies balls stored in the upper tray 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, and controls the firing rod and the firing motor. The ball is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 using a firing mallet. The ball that has reached the upper part of the gaming area 124 flows downward while changing its traveling direction by the ball hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail, etc., and enters the winning opening (general winning opening 226a, 226b, variable winning opening 234) and starting. The player either wins a prize in the opening (regular pattern starting hole 228, first special pattern starting hole 230, second special pattern starting hole 232), or reaches the out port 240 without winning in any winning hole or starting hole. Further, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out ball detection sensor SWout is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104 to detect the passage of accepted game balls. Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All the game balls ejected from the game board 200 (including the game balls ejected from the out port 240 and the game balls that have entered various winning holes) are received in this ejected ball receiving port, and are passed through a predetermined ejection path. It is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the pachinko machine 100.

In addition, a presentation device 2 is placed at the top of the game area 124, a presentation device 3 is placed at the bottom, and a presentation device 4 is placed on the left and right sides, respectively. A presentation device 5 is arranged behind the presentation device 4 arranged on the left side and the right side, respectively. These presentation devices 2 to 5 are supported by a main body 104.

FIG. 54 is an enlarged view of the variable winning a prize opening unit.

The variable winning hole unit 6 is provided with a storage passage 61 for storing balls that have been won in the variable winning hole 234 so that they can be seen by the player. This storage passage 61 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the passage can be visually recognized. In the variable winning a prize opening unit 6 shown in FIG. 53, no game balls are stored in its storage passage 61, but in the variable winning a prize opening unit 6 shown in FIG. 54, game balls B are stored in its storage passage 61. ing. The storage passage 61 will be described in detail later.

As mentioned above, the variable winning hole unit 6 is provided with the variable winning hole 234, the first special pattern starting hole 230, the second special pattern starting hole 232, and the regular pattern starting hole 228, each of which has a ball detection function. A sensor is placed.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing various ball detection sensors provided in the variable winning a prize opening unit 6. In FIG. 55, the front side of the page is the front side (player side), and the back side of the page is the back side (back side).

This FIG. 55 shows a plate-shaped base member 601 that constitutes the variable winning a prize opening unit 6. This base member 601 is attached to the surface (decorative surface) of the game board 200 from the front side. A portion that protrudes further to the rear than the base member 601 protrudes to the rear from an opening provided in the game board 200. On the other hand, the portion protruding forward from the base member 601 is located in the space between the game board 200 and the transparent plate member 118.

An attacker ball detection sensor 234c that detects a ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is attached to the base member 601. This attacker ball detection sensor 234c is provided at the highest position. The game ball that has entered the variable prize opening 234 passes through this attacker ball detection sensor 234c and enters the storage passage 61 (see FIG. 54, etc.). Note that the storage passage 61 is not shown in FIG. 55.

A special 2 ball detection sensor 232c is provided below the attacker ball detection sensor 234c at a position away from the ball path through which the game ball passes after passing through the attacker ball detection sensor 234c. In addition, it is located at a position where the game ball that has passed through the special 2 ball detection sensor 232c is out of the ball path through which the game ball passes, and is also out of the ball path through which the game ball that has passed through the attacker ball detection sensor 234c passes. A normal figure ball detection sensor 228c is provided below the ball detection sensor 232c. Both the special ball detection sensor 232c and the normal ball detection sensor 228c are attached to the base member 601 in the same way as the attacker ball detection sensor 234c. The three types of ball detection sensors 234c, 232c, and 228c described above are sensors through which game balls pass from the upper side to the lower side. That is, it is a sensor through which game balls pass in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, the special 1 ball detection sensor 230c that detects the ball entering the first special symbol starting port 230 is provided on the back side (back side) of the variable winning a prize port unit 6, and passes from the left side to the right side. It is a sensor. That is, it is a sensor that is provided behind the base member 601 and through which the game ball passes laterally.

Further, FIG. 55 also shows an arcuate shutter portion 620, which will be described in detail later. The shutter section 620 is arranged at the exit of the storage passage 61 shown in FIG. 54 and the like. The shutter section 620 is provided on a shutter member. The state of the shutter member changes between a storage state and a non-storage state as the shutter portion 620 rotates in response to the driving force of the motor. FIG. 55 shows the shutter portion 620 when the shutter member is in the non-reservoir state. Further beyond this shutter section 620, that is, beyond the exit of the storage passage 61, an out-ball first guide port 661 is provided. Further, an out-ball second guide port 662 is provided below the attacker ball detection sensor 234c, that is, at the entrance of the storage passage 61. Both the out ball first guide port 661 and the out ball second guide port 662 are connected to the path from the out port 240 shown in FIG. 53 on the back side of the game board 200. The balls that have passed through the special 2 ball detection sensor 232c, the normal ball detection sensor 228c, and the special 1 ball detection sensor 230c also eventually enter the passage from the out port 240.

Further, FIG. 55 shows an attacker door 2341 that is provided in the variable prize opening 234 and that operates to open and close, and a plurality of first deceleration protrusions 2343 that protrude forward from the base member 601.

FIG. 56 is a plan view of the variable winning opening unit seen from above, and FIG. 56 (a) shows the variable winning opening unit 6 with the attacker door 2341 closed, and the same figure below. (b) shows the variable winning a prize opening unit 6 with the attacker door 2341 open. Note that in both FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), the lower side of the figure is the front side (player side), and the upper side is the back side (back side).

In FIG. 56, a front member 602 is attached to the front side of a base member 601. Note that this front member 602 is not attached to the base member 601 shown in FIG. 55. The front member 602 is provided with a guide wall 6022 (see also FIG. 57(a)) that protrudes from the front plate 6021 toward the rear side, that is, toward the base member 601 side and forms the storage passage 61. A storage passage 61 is formed between the base member 601 and the base member 601 .

The variable prize opening 234 includes an attacker door 2341 and a plurality of first deceleration projections 2343, as well as a variable prize opening 2340 and a plurality of second deceleration projections 2344. The variable winning opening 2340 is sometimes called a big winning opening.

The attacker door 2341 is a door member whose variable winning opening 2340 can be opened and closed by a solenoid, and moves back and forth in the front and rear directions. When the attacker door 2341 is in the advanced state, it is difficult for the ball to enter the variable winning opening 2340. Note that the state in which the attacker door 2341 has advanced is a state in which the variable winning opening 2340 is closed by the attacker door 2341, and may also be referred to as a state in which the attacker door 2341 is closed. In FIG. 55, the attacker door 2341 has moved forward, and in FIG. 56(a), the attacker door 2341 has also moved forward. However, in FIG. 56(a), five game balls B1 are placed on the attacker door 2341 that has advanced forward, so the attacker door 2341 is difficult to see. Since the ball hit right flows down from the right side of the variable winning port unit 6, hereinafter, the right side of the variable winning port unit 6 may be referred to as the upstream side, and the left side may be referred to as the downstream side. Five game balls B1 are stocked in the attacker door 2341 in a state where they are adjacent to each other from the upstream side to the downstream side. The front plate 6021 is transparent, and these five game balls B1 are visible from the front. In this way, the number of game balls stocked in the attacker door 2341 may be only one ball, or may be as many game balls as can be stored in the storage passage 61.

On the other hand, in FIG. 56(b), the attacker door 2341 has moved back and is no longer visible, but the variable winning opening 2340, which was not visible in FIG. 56(a), is visible. The state in which the attacker door 2341 has retreated is a state in which the variable winning opening 2340 is open, and may also be referred to as the state in which the attacker door 2341 is open. In some cases.

As shown in FIG. 55, the attacker door 2341 is provided with four step portions 2341s. These four step portions 2341s are raised, and a meandering path is formed by the four step portions 2341s on the upper surface of the attacker door 2341. In addition, the part of the attacker door 2341 where the step 2341s at the upstream end is provided is higher than the part where the two steps 2341s on the downstream side are provided, and the second step 2341s from the upstream end is higher than the part where the two steps 2341s are provided on the downstream side. The part where it is installed is sloped. The diagonal line shown on the top surface of the attacker door 2341 in FIG. 55 is a line indicating the edge of this slope.

As shown in FIG. 56, three second deceleration projections 2344 are provided on the front plate 6021 of the front member 602. These three second deceleration projections 2344 protrude toward the rear side, that is, toward the base member 601. As can be seen from a close look at FIG. 56(a), the attacker door 2341 has not advanced until it comes into contact with the front plate 6021, and a gap is created between the advanced attacker door 2341 and the front plate 6021. There is. The second deceleration protrusion 2344 protrudes by the width of this gap. On the other hand, four first deceleration projections 2343 are provided and protrude toward the front plate 6021. The second deceleration projection 2344 and the first deceleration projection 2343 are both provided above the attacker door 2341 and are arranged in a staggered manner. The second deceleration protrusion 2344 is located above each of the three steps 2341s on the upstream side of the four steps 2341s of the attacker door 2341 that have advanced forward. The first deceleration protrusion 2343 is located above between the stepped portions 2341s of the forwardly advanced attacker door 2341.

When a ball hit right reaches the variable winning opening unit 6 and enters between the base member 601 and the front plate 6021 of the front side member 602, if the attacker door 2341 is open, the ball hits the variable winning opening 2340. It is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, when the attacker door 2341 is closed, the game ball rolls on the attacker door 2341. At this time, the game ball advances along the meandering path formed by the four steps 2341s of the attacker door 2341, and the speed increases by alternately colliding with the first deceleration protrusion 2343 and the second deceleration protrusion 2344. Significant decline. Even if there is no game ball above the attacker door 2341, the game ball stops on the attacker door 2341 due to this collision. Further, a maximum of five game balls can be placed on the attacker door 2341. When a game ball is placed on the attacker door 2341, the newly rolled game ball hits the game ball placed on the attacker door 2341 and stops on the attacker door 2341. If there are already five game balls on top of the attacker door 2341, the newly rolled game ball will move the game ball on top of the attacker door 2341 with the help of the above-mentioned tilt of the attacker door 2341. One ball is pushed out, and it lands on the attacker door 2341 instead. The game ball pushed out from above the attacker door 2341 falls, rolls on the R surface 6023, and reaches the electric chew of the second special figure starting port 232.

In the second special figure starting opening 232 shown in FIG. It is difficult for the ball to enter the starting opening 2320 in the figure. On the other hand, when the tongue piece 2321 is retracted from the second special pattern starting opening 2320, there is nothing covering the second special pattern starting opening 2320, and the ball can easily enter the second special pattern starting opening 2320. .

In FIG. 56(a), the game ball B2 is shown on top of the tongue-shaped piece 2321. The upper surface of the tongue-shaped piece 2321 is inclined toward the downstream side, and the game ball that reaches the top of the tongue-shaped piece 2321 rolls on the upper surface, and if the ball does not enter the second special figure starting opening, , reaches the inclined surface 6024 provided on the downstream side of the second special figure starting port 232. In FIG. 56(a), the game ball B3 is shown on the slope 6024. This inclined surface 6024 is also inclined toward the downstream side, and the game ball falls to the downstream side via the inclined surface 6024.

On the downstream side of the inclined surface 6024, a reverse inclined surface 6025 and a first special figure starting port 230 are arranged. The reverse inclined surface 6025 is provided on the downstream side of the standard pattern starting port 228 at a higher position than the standard pattern starting port 228, and is inclined toward the upstream side, that is, toward the standard pattern starting port 228. For this reason, most of the game balls that have fallen onto the reverse slope 6025 enter the normal figure starting port 228.

The game ball that did not fall onto this reverse slope 6025 may enter the first special pattern starting port 230, or may not be able to enter the first special pattern starting port 230 and head toward the out port 240. be. When heading toward the out exit 240, there are cases in which it exceeds the first special figure starting opening 230, or it may fall between the reverse slope 6025 and the first special figure starting opening 230.

Many of the game balls that have fallen downstream via the slope 6024 fall onto the reverse slope 6025 and finally enter the normal figure starting port 228. Therefore, if the attacker door 2341 remains closed and the electric chew is not in operation because it is not in a winning game state, the game ball enters the normal drawing starting port 228, the normal drawing lottery is performed, and the time saving state is entered. If it is (electric support state), it is easy to win the general drawing lottery and to open the tongue-like piece 2321. In addition, many of the game balls that have fallen downstream via the slope 6024 may enter the first special figure starting port 230 instead of falling onto the reverse slope 6025, or may enter the first special figure starting port 230, or The arrangement, angle, etc. of each part may be changed so as to move toward 240.

Furthermore, the flow of the game balls explained above is a general flow, and due to irregular movement of the game balls, the flow of the game balls may be different from the flow of the game balls described here. For example, even if the ball falls onto the reverse slope 6025, it may be bounced by the reverse slope 6025 and may not enter the normal game starting hole 228, or it may collide with another game ball and fall onto the reverse slope 6025. In some cases, the ball may directly enter the starting port 228 without falling. In addition, even if the ball is hit right, it may not reach the variable winning port unit 6 in the first place, or even if it does, it may not enter between the base member 601 and the front plate 6021 of the front member 602. be. Even in these cases, if the ball hits a game nail or collides with another game ball, it may enter the variable prize opening 234, the second special pattern starting hole 232, the regular pattern starting hole 228, or the first special pattern starting hole 230. Sometimes the ball enters.

Next, the shutter member and the storage passage 61 will be explained.

In FIG. 54, the shutter member is in the stored state. In the storage state, the arc-shaped shutter portion 620 provided at the exit of the storage passage 61 extends entirely into the path of the ball in the storage passage 61 and blocks the exit of the storage passage 61. Therefore, the game ball B shown in FIG. 54 is blocked by the shutter section 620 and cannot go beyond the storage passage 61. As described above, the storage passage 61 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the passage is visible, and a portion of the game balls B stored therein are visible. Note that all of the stored game balls B may be made visible. The game ball B stored in the storage passage 61 is a so-called dead ball, and showing this game ball corresponds to a dead ball performance. Furthermore, since the inside of the passage is visible, the shutter section 620 blocking the exit of the storage passage 61 can also be seen. In particular, by making the shutter section 620 colored rather than transparent, it is possible to confirm that the liquid is in the stored state. On the other hand, by making the shutter part 620 transparent or making the exit part of the storage passage 61 opaque, it is not possible to determine whether the game balls are stored or not stored when the game balls are not stored. , it is also possible to make the player interested in the state of the shutter member.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing how the shutter member in the storage state changes to the non-storage state.

FIG. 57(a) is a perspective view showing the variable winning a prize opening unit with the front plate 6021 of the front member 602 attached to the base member 601 omitted for explanation. This FIG. 57(a) shows the shutter member 62, which is in an intermediate state between a storage state and a non-storage state. That is, a part of the shutter part 620 remains in the path of the ball in the storage passage 61, and therefore, the game ball B is still blocked by the shutter part 620, and the game ball B is still blocked before the storage passage 61. I can't go.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), the storage passage 61 formed by the guide wall 6022 of the front member 602 is composed of a linear upper part 611, a folded part 612, and a lower part 613, and has a maximum 10 game balls B can be stored. That is, ten game balls B can be lined up between the second out ball guide port 662 (see FIG. 55) provided at the entrance of the storage passage 61 and the shutter section 620. In this state, if one more ball enters the variable prize opening 234, the storage passage 61 is full, so that one game ball cannot enter the storage passage 61, and the out ball The game board 200 is discharged from the second guide port 662 to the back side of the game board 200.

FIG. 57(b) is a front view of the variable winning a prize opening unit. In the variable winning a prize opening unit 6 shown in FIG. 57(b), the shutter member is in a non-storage state. That is, although the tip of the shutter section 620 slightly extends into the storage passage 61, it is completely evacuated from the path of the ball in the storage passage 61, and the shutter section 620 does not touch the game ball B. . Therefore, the game balls B that have been stored so far advance through the storage passage 61 and are discharged from the out ball first guide port 661 to the back side of the game board 200. In FIG. 57(b), not a single game ball remains in the storage passage 61. In addition, if a ball enters the variable winning hole 234 when the shutter member is in the non-storage state, the game ball that entered the variable winning hole 234 is not stored in the storage passage 61 but in the storage passage. 61 and is discharged to the back side of the game board 200 from the first out ball guide port 661.

The shutter member 62 is in its initial storage state. In the variable winning a prize opening unit 6, the shutter member 62 is in the initial storage state during a round in the jackpot game or while the attacker door 2341 is in the advancing state. As a result, the player can estimate the number of times the attacker has won a prize during one round from the number of game balls stored in the storage passage 61. Further, the player can also estimate the number of times the attacker wins during the small winning game from the number of game balls stored in the storage passage 61. In the variable winning opening unit 6, in the jackpot game state, every time one round ends, the motor 630 shown in FIG. The game balls that won during one round are ejected. Then, by the time the next round starts, the shutter member 62 returns from the non-storage state to the initial storage state. In addition, in the variable winning a prize opening unit 6, in the small winning game state, every time the small winning game ends, the motor 630 shown in FIG. 54 rotates, the shutter member 62 changes to the non-storing state, and the , the game balls that have been stored and won during the small winning game period are discharged. Then, by the time the attacker door 2341 returns to the advanced state, the shutter member 62 returns from the non-storage state to the initial storage state. The state change of the shutter member 62 caused by the motor 630 shown in FIG. 54 described above corresponds to an example of the performance operation.

Further, the variable winning a prize opening unit 6 is provided with an interlocking member 64. This interlocking member 64 is arranged in front of the storage passage 61 and operates in conjunction with the rotation of the shutter member 62 driven by a motor. The interlocking member 64 has an arm portion 641 and a design portion 642 provided at one end of the arm portion 641. A part of the arm portion 641 is shown in FIG. 57(a), and the arm portion 641 and the design portion 642 are shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 57(b).

The interlocking member 64 shown in FIG. 54 is raised at an angle of about 30°, but the interlocking member 64 shown in FIG. 57(b) is in a state of being laid down by about 15° from the state shown in FIG. Note that a part of the arm portion 641 shown in FIG. 57(a) is at an intermediate angle. The interlocking member 64 rotates around the opposite side of the arm portion 641 from the design portion 642 side, and lifts up as the shutter member 62 changes from the storage state to the non-storage state. Change from sitting position to lying position. In the following description, when the interlocking member 64 is in a raised position, it is said that the interlocking member 64 is in the upper position because the design portion 642 is located above, and when the interlocking member 64 is in a lying position, it is said that the interlocking member 64 is in the upper position. Since the design portion 642 is located at a lower position, it may be said that the interlocking member 64 is at a lower position. As shown in FIG. 57(b), when the interlocking member 64 is in the lower position, the interlocking member 64 overlaps a part of the storage passage 61 from the front side, and the part of the storage passage 61 becomes larger than before the overlap. It becomes difficult to see. That is, when the shutter member is in the non-storage state, the upper portion 611 of the storage passage 61 is overlapped from the front side by the interlocking member 64, making it difficult to see. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 54, when the shutter member is in the storage state, the interlocking member 64 is in the upper position, the design portion 642 is located above the storage passage 61, and the upper part 611 of the storage passage 61 is The stored game balls are easily visible.

Note that most of the folded portion 612 of the storage passage 61 is covered from the front by the decorative member 651, and a part of the lower portion 613 is also covered from the front by the decorative member 652.

As described above, the interlocking member 64 is operated by the driving force of the motor that rotates the shutter member, but the interlocking member 64 can also be operated by manual operation.

FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining manual operation of the interlocking member 64.

FIG. 58(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 is opened approximately 90 degrees. By opening the front frame door 106, an employee of the game parlor can touch the interlocking member 64. On the other hand, even if the front frame door 106 is opened, the shutter member cannot be touched.

The shutter member that is supposed to change its state may not be able to change its state because it cannot obtain driving force due to motor failure or poor energization, or the shutter member 620 may be stuck with a game ball and the shutter member may not be able to change its state. be. In these cases, by manually operating the interlocking member 64, the state of the shutter member can be forcibly changed. Further, even if ball clogging occurs in the storage passage 61 and the state of the shutter member changes to a non-storage state, the ball may not come out from inside the storage passage 61. Even in this case, by repeating manual operation of the interlocking member 64, it is possible to vibrate the game ball in contact with the shutter section 620, and the ball clogging may be resolved and the ball may be removed from the storage passage 61. .

In FIG. 58(b), when two game balls are stored in the storage passage 61, the shutter member, which should change its state from the storage state to the non-storage state, did not change its state, so the clerk at the game store The front frame door 106 is opened and the interlocking member 64 is pushed down. It can be seen that the interlocking member 64 has not reached the lower position and the shutter section 620 is still blocking the game ball. After this, when the interlocking member 64 reaches the lower position, the shutter member is in the non-storage state, and the two game balls advance from the storage passage 61 and enter the game board 200 from the out-ball first guide port 661. It is discharged to the back side.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a movable mechanism including the shutter member 62 and the interlocking member 64. FIG. 59(a) shows a state in which the interlocking member 64 is in the upper position, and the shutter member 62 is in the storage state. On the other hand, FIG. 59(b) shows a state in which the interlocking member 64 is in the lower position, and the shutter member 62 is in a non-storage state.

In addition to the shutter member 62 and the interlocking member 64, FIG. 59 also shows a motor 630, a motor gear member 631, an interlocking gear member 632, and a connecting member 633.

In addition to the arcuate shutter portion 620, the shutter member 62 also has a gear portion 621 as shown in FIG. 59(b).

Motor 630 is a stepping motor. The motor gear member 631 is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 630, and includes a first gear part 6311 (see FIG. 59(b)) that meshes with the gear part 621 of the shutter member 62, and a second gear part 6311 that meshes with the gear of the interlocking gear member 632. It has a gear part 6312. The connecting member 633 connects the interlocking gear member 632 and the interlocking member 64 through a connecting shaft 6331 (see FIG. 59(a)). More specifically, the connecting shaft 6331 connects the arm portion 641 of the interlocking member 64 to the side of the interlocking gear member 632 opposite to the side where the gear is provided.

When the motor 630 rotates, the rotational driving force of the motor is transmitted from the first gear portion 6311 of the motor gear member 631 to the gear portion 621 of the shutter member 62, and the shutter member 62 rotates. Further, the rotational driving force of the motor is transmitted from the second gear portion 6312 of the motor gear member 631 to the gear of the interlocking gear member 632, and the interlocking member 64 also rotates about the connecting shaft 6331.

Further, when the interlocking member 64 is manually operated, the shutter member 62 rotates. That is, when the design portion 642 of the interlocking member 64 is pushed down, the interlocking gear member 632 rotates around the connecting shaft 6331, and the motor gear member 631 that meshes with the gear of the interlocking gear member 632 also rotates. As a result, the shutter member 62 that meshes with the motor gear member 631 rotates counterclockwise so that the shutter portion 620 moves toward the 12 o'clock position. On the other hand, even when the design portion 642 of the interlocking member 64 is lifted, the interlocking gear member 632 rotates around the connecting shaft 6331, and the motor gear member 631 that meshes with the gear of the interlocking gear member 632 also rotates. As a result, the shutter member 62 that meshes with the motor gear member 631 rotates clockwise so that the shutter portion 620 moves toward the 3 o'clock position.

According to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 51, even if the shutter member 62 becomes inoperable due to clogged balls or an abnormality in the motor 630, the clerk can open the front frame door 106 and operate the operable interlocking member 64. The storage bulb can be discharged, improving work efficiency compared to removing or disassembling the unit.

In addition, the variable winning hole 234 provided in the variable winning hole unit 6 is used as a variable winning hole (attacker) dedicated for small wins, and a special winning hole for jackpots is provided above the variable winning hole unit 6 in the right area of the game board 200. A variable winning hole (attacker) may be arranged.

In addition, although the second special pattern starting port 232 is made of an electric chew type, the position of the second special pattern starting port 232 shown in FIG. 230 may be of an electric chew type. In this case, the position of the first special pattern starting port 230 shown in FIG. 53 etc. may be set as the second special pattern starting port 232, and the second special pattern starting port 232 may be a fixed starting port. Moreover, in this case, the specification may be a simultaneous variable machine.

In addition, apart from the general pattern starting hole 228 provided in the variable winning a prize opening unit 6, a general pattern starting hole having a structure called a gate or a through chucker is installed above the variable winning a prize opening unit 6 in the right side area of the game board 200. It may be placed in The ball that has passed through the separately arranged normal pattern starting port is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the normal pattern starting port 228 provided in the variable winning a prize port unit 6. Furthermore, a starting opening for a special symbol that can be aimed at by hitting left-handed may be provided. For example, if special pattern 2 is an electric chew type, you can set up a fixed starting port for special pattern 2 that can be aimed by left-handed hitting, or if special pattern 1 is an electric chew type, special pattern 1 can be targeted by left-handed hitting. A fixed starting port may also be provided.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of this pachinko machine 100 will be explained in detail using FIG. 60. Note that this figure shows a functional block diagram of the control section. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a main control unit 300 that mainly controls the performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) sent by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 performs control; a second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400; A payout control unit 700 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 730 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 760 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control section 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The main control section 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control section 300 . The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a timer. a counter timer 312 for measuring times and times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit is assumed to have two counters built-in). It is equipped with. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the number in the range of 0 to 65535 every time it receives the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built into the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

The basic circuit 302 also includes predetermined ball detection sensors, such as the attacker ball detection sensor 234c, the special 2 ball detection sensor 232c, the regular ball detection sensor 228c, and the special 1 ball detection sensor shown in FIG. A sensor circuit 322 receives signals output from various sensors 320 such as 230c and a lower tray full sensor, and outputs amplification results and comparison results with a reference voltage to the CPU 304, random value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302. , a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, such as the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214; and a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, such as the regular symbol display device 210. A drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of various status display units 328 (for example, a general figure holding lamp 216, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, a high accuracy medium lamp, etc.) The drive circuit 330 and a predetermined movable member, for example, a driving means for driving the tongue-like piece 2321 of the second special figure starting opening 232 as a normal electric accessory, and an attacker door of the variable prize opening 234 as a special electric accessory. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including drive means for driving the solenoid 2341 is connected thereto. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number generation circuit 318.

In addition, when the special 1 ball detection sensor 230c detects that a ball has entered the first special pattern start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 generates a random value in the basic circuit 302 to generate a signal indicating that the ball has been detected. Output to circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting opening 230 at that timing, and transfers the latched value to the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting opening 230. Store in value storage register. Furthermore, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting hole 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly calculates the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting hole 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, game status) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the pachinko machine 100.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 760 to the main control unit 300. is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main processing of the main control unit, which will be described later), is started.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting commands to the payout control unit 700, and with this configuration, the Communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 700 is possible. Note that the information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control section 300 and the payout control section 700 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but it is configured such that the first sub-control unit 400 cannot send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 700 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but it is configured such that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the payout control unit 700 to the main control unit 300. Good too.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands and the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 is connected to the basic circuit 402 for storing control programs and various performance data. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various performance data in separate ROMs. Further, the configuration may be such that the ROM 406 is included in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game table frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450.

The basic circuit 402 also includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the production devices 2 to 5, etc., and a sensor circuit. 428 and a volume switch 163 that adjusts the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the presentation devices 2 to 5, etc., and a button sensor 426 that detects presses of the presentation buttons 136 and various buttons that constitute the operation key unit 190. Output to basic circuit 402.

Furthermore, a drive circuit 429 for controlling the drive of the motor 630 shown in FIG. 59 is also connected to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A VDP (Video Display Processor) that reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, connected to the basic circuit 502 is a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like. A memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is constituted by a recording medium (for example, an EEPROM, a flash memory, etc.) that can maintain a stored state even if the power is cut off. Thereby, for example, information for displaying a display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 initializes or changes settings. Note that a RAM whose stored information evaporates when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control section 700, firing control section 730, and power supply control section 760 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The payout control unit 700 mainly controls the payout motor 702 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also controls the payout motor 702 of the payout device 152 based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 704. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control section 700 communicates with a card unit 708 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via an interface section 706. The payout control unit 700 also provides prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls have been paid out. Ball rental information, etc. indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 705 is connected to the payout control unit 700. The frame sensor 705 includes a main body open sensor 1041 that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. When 106 is open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 700 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 705, it outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 730 receives control signals output by the payout control unit 700 that instructs to permit or stop firing, and the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output by a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 732 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 734 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110 based on a control signal that instructs the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 760 converts the AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into DC power, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply each device. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 760 includes a power storage circuit (for example, , capacitor). In addition, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 760 to the payout control unit 700 and the second sub-control unit 500, and a predetermined voltage is supplied from the payout control unit 700 to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 730. Although power at a certain voltage is supplied here, power at a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 61(a) to 61(c), the first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, and normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. We will explain the types of special and regular maps. FIG. 61(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special symbol.

The special pattern 1 variable game is started on the condition that the special 1 ball detection sensor 230c shown in FIG. 55 detects that a ball enters the first special pattern starting port 230, The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the ball detecting sensor 232c for special figure 2 shown in FIG. 55 detects that a ball has entered the ball. When the special symbol 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs a "variable display of special symbol 1" that repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one segment in the center. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays a “special figure 2 variable display” that repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one segment in the center. conduct. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of a symbol variable display. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of variation of special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special symbol display device 212 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the start of variation of special figure 2 When , the second special symbol display device 214 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of the special symbol 2. Furthermore, after that, a final display is performed to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 m seconds).

Therefore, after starting the "Fluctuating display of special pattern 1" and stopping displaying the stop symbol mode of Special pattern 1 until the final display is completed, or after starting "Fluctuating display of special pattern 2" and then The period from the stop display of the second stop symbol mode to the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be performed multiple times in succession. In FIG. 61(a), 10 types of special symbols from "special symbol A" to "special symbol J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 61(a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

"Special pattern A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "Special pattern B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 51, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot in the special symbol variation game is made by a hardware random number lottery, and the determination as to whether or not a special jackpot is a special jackpot is made by a software random number lottery. The difference between a jackpot and a special jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot in the next special figure fluctuation game is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high will be referred to as a special pattern high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low will be referred to as a special pattern low probability state. Further, after the 15R special jackpot game and after the 15R jackpot game are finished, the time saving state is entered. Although time saving will be described in detail later, a state in which the state shifts to the time saving state is referred to as a common high probability state, and a state in which it does not shift to the time saving state is referred to as a common low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Tokuzu A" is in a state with a high probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a regular symbol, and the "special symbol B" which is a 15R jackpot symbol is a state with a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a regular symbol. These "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" are symbols that provide a relatively large amount of profit to the player.

"Special pattern C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is in a special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state. That is, compared to "Special Map A" which is 15R, "Special Map C" is different in that it is 2R. "Tokuzu D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called "Sudden Time Saving", and has a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a regular symbol. That is, compared to "Special Map B" which is 15R, "Special Map D" is different in that it is 2R.

"Special pattern E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called Hidden Probability Variation, and is in a special pattern high probability normal pattern low probability state. “Special pattern F” is a 2R jackpot pattern called suddenly normal, and is in a special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state. Both of these "special map E" and "special map F" are 2R and are in a state where they do not shift to the time saving state.

``Special figure G'' is the first small winning symbol, and ``Special figure H'' is the second small winning symbol. In a small winning game, for example, the attacker door 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the attacker door 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.2 seconds at the maximum per operation. In addition, when the attacker door 2341 is opened in a small winning game, for example, when the attacker door 2341 is opened for the first time, if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is Once acquired, it will not be unlocked from the second time onwards. During the small winning game, the state shifts to a special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state. A small win is a win in which the control state does not change before and after the small win game, and after the small win game ends, it returns to the control state before the start of the small win game.

Further, "Special Figure I" is the first losing symbol, and "Special Figure J" is the second losing symbol, which are symbols that give a relatively small amount of profit to the player.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 51 has symbols other than "special pattern A" as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same is true for other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 61(b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns, ``Decoration 1'' to ``Decoration 10''. The first starting port sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special pattern starting port 230 or the second special pattern starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special pattern starting port 230, or On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball enters the second special pattern starting port 232, the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display of the decorative pattern display device 208 are performed. In each design display area of the area 208c, display in the order of "decoration 1" → "decorative 2" → "decorative 3" → ... "decorative 9" → "decorative 10" → "decorative 1" → ... ``Fluctuating display of decorative patterns'' is performed. When notifying the 15R jackpot of "special pattern B", a pattern combination in which three of the same decorative patterns are lined up (for example, "decoration 1 - decoration 1 - decoration 1" or "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2"). When announcing the 15R special jackpot of "Special Map A", pattern combinations in which three of the same odd numbered decorative patterns are lined up (for example, "Decoration 3 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7") ” etc.) will be stopped and displayed.

In addition, there is also a 2R jackpot called a hidden probability change of "Tokuzu E", a 2R jackpot called a sudden regular hit of "Tokuzu F", the first small hit of "Tokuzu G", and a 2R jackpot called a sudden regular hit of "Tokuzu F". When notifying the second small win, "Decoration 1 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when announcing a 2R jackpot called "Sudden Definite Change" of "Special Map C" or a 2R jackpot called "Sudden Time Saving" of "Special Map D", "Decoration 1 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 5" is to be announced. Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "Special drawing I" and the second deviation of "Special drawing J", symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 53(b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 61(c) shows an example of a stop display pattern of a common map. There are two types of stop display modes for common symbols: "common symbol A" which is a winning symbol, and "common symbol B" which is a losing symbol. Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228, the normal pattern display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one segment in the center. Performs "fluctuation display of common map". Then, when notifying the winning of the general pattern fluctuation game, the ``general pattern A'' is stopped and displayed, and when the winning of the general pattern fluctuation game is announced, the ``general pattern B'' is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 55(c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 62. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 62 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values. Note that here, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines whether the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 760 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (for example, 9V). It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output when the voltage is lower than that. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Note that even if the supply voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or more.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a value in the counter timer 312 that determines the cycle for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and a process of setting a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing to output a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, etc. are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power cutoff (before the power cutoff), and if the state before the power cutoff is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113).

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal that is sent when a clerk at a game store or the like operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether RAM clearing is necessary or not, and if the RAM clearing signal is on (RAM clearing is necessary), the process advances to step S113 to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (RAM clearing is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Determine whether or not. If the power status information does not indicate suspend, the process advances to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302, and if the power status information indicates suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is set to a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal or not). If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power cut, and if the checksum result is a specific value If the value is other than 0 (for example, if the checksum result is abnormal), the process advances to step S113 to bring the pachinko machine 100 into the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process also advances to step S113.

In step S111, power restoration processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read out and reset to the stack pointer (main setting). In addition, after reading out the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage and resetting them in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) that was executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power outage. Further, a RAM 308 installed in the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 60 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at power-off, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupts are disabled, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (main setting), and all storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Furthermore, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power restoration command, the The data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting the interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters are used to generate the initial values of the general figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter, the general figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer random number counter. Update two random number counters for generating random numbers, respectively. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value of the general timer is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value of the general timer provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same way. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207, which will be described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115, except while performing a timer interrupt process that starts at every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 63. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (for example, once every 2 ms), and uses this timer interrupt signal as a trigger to perform main control unit timer interrupt processing. Start at a predetermined period.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT is periodically activated (for example, the main The restart is performed once every approximately 2 ms, which is the cycle of the control section timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are sent via the input port of I/O 310. The presence or absence of a detection signal is monitored by inputting the signal and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 and partitioned for each type of sensor 320. To explain using the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process before the previous time (approximately 4 ms ago) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned into the previous detection signal storage area, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor. ) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, partitioned for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area described above. to be memorized. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of a detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in the storage areas of the detection signal storage area before the previous time, the storage area of the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times, repeating activation at very short intervals of approximately 2 ms. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is checked. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-previous detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball begins to pass the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. Here, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that there is a winning prize. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 60 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there was no detection signal the day before last, that there was a detection signal last time, and that there was a detection signal this time). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, there is a detection signal this time). information), the ball enters the general winning hole 226, the variable winning hole 234, the first special drawing starting hole 230, and the second special drawing starting hole 232, or the ball passes through the regular drawing starting hole 228. It is determined that there was. That is, it is determined that there has been a win in these winning holes 226, 234 and these starting holes 230, 232, 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of a detection signal for the past three times in the general winning hole sensor that detects the ball entering the general winning hole 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, there is no winning in the general winning hole 226. However, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, subsequent general winnings will be processed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize in the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there was a detection signal two days ago, there was no detection signal last time, and there was no detection signal this time). After it is determined that a prize has been won once, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, then it will be determined whether or not it matches the entered award determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the regular winning random number value, which is used in the main control unit 300, is Two random number counters for respectively generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the winning random number is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the winning random number, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained, and the value is stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a winning random number that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the obtained value, and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is the same as the initial value set last time (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number winning random number, and the value is set as the initial value. In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random number, the initial value set this time is stored in the initial value storage area mentioned above in order to determine when the random number counter for generating the winning random number has made one round. I'll keep it. In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating random number winning random numbers for general drawings has completed one round, it also determines that the random number counter for generating random numbers for special drawings has completed one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In addition, although the counter for acquiring the random number value of special figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of special figure 2 were separately provided here, you may use the same counter.

In step S211, performance random number updating processing is performed. In this performance random number update process, a random number counter for generating a random number value for performance used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, a regular symbol display symbol update timer is used to measure the time for fluctuating and statically displaying the symbol on the regular symbol display device 210, and a timer for measuring the time for fluctuating and statically displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212. A special pattern 1 display pattern update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the pattern on the second special pattern display device 214, a special pattern 2 display pattern update timer for measuring the time for fluctuating and stopping the display of the pattern on the second special pattern display device 214, a predetermined winning performance time, and a predetermined opening time. , updates various timers including timers for timing a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end performance period, and the like.

In step S215, winning opening counter updating processing is performed. In this winning hole counter update process, when a prize is won in the winning holes 226, 234 or the starting holes 230, 232, 228, the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or each starting hole in the RAM 308 is updated. Read the value, add 1 to it, and set it in the original award ball count storage area.

Furthermore, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first special figure starting hole 230, second special figure starting hole 232, regular figure starting hole 228, and variable winning hole 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If there is a winning in the first special figure starting opening 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random value generation circuit 318 stores the random number value corresponding to the first special figure starting opening 230. Obtain the value from the register, obtain the processed value (for example, the obtained value + the value of the R register + 1) as the special figure 1 winning random value, and also obtain the value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value, The processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a winning in the second special figure starting opening 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random value counter corresponding to the first special figure starting opening 230 of the random value generation circuit 318 Obtain the value from the value storage register, obtain the processed value (for example, the obtained value + the value of the R register + 1) as the special figure 2 winning random value, and also obtain the value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value. Then, the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 700 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, with strobe information in bit 7 (if on, it indicates that data is set), and bit 6. is the power-on information (if it is on, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are the encryption information. The number of payout requests after conversion processing is shown.

In step S221, a normal figure state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the ordinary figure. For example, in the normal pattern state update process during the normal pattern fluctuation display (when the value of the above-mentioned normal pattern display pattern update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal pattern display device 210 repeatedly turns on and off. Performs lights-off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of common symbols (a common symbol variable game).

In addition, in the normal pattern state update process at the timing when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed (timing when the value of the normal pattern display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the winning pattern will be displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on and off so that the normal symbol display device 210 has a display mode, and when the winning flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display a lost symbol. Controls the lighting/extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area in which various settings are made not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the above-described lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and settings are made in the setting area to indicate that the normal figure is being displayed in a stopped state. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 61(c)) or the losing symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 61(c)). Perform display. Furthermore, after that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the general figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 m seconds). With this setting, the fixed and displayed symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the regular symbol variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a hit, the normal pattern hit flag is turned on as described later. When this ordinary figure per flag is on, in the ordinary figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 is In addition to setting the normal figure operating state in the setting area, the tongue-like piece 2321 is connected to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the tongue-like piece 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). It outputs a signal to maintain the open state, and also sets information indicating the open period in the storage area of the open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the tongue-shaped piece is A signal for holding the tongue 2321 in the closed state is outputted to the solenoid 332 for opening/closing the valve 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the general map status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), general map inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. . Furthermore, if the result of the normal pattern variation game is a loss, the normal pattern loss flag is turned on, as will be described later. If this general figure out-of-print flag is on, even in the general figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set "Normal map inactive" in the setting area of RAM 308. In the ordinary figure state update process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the routine moves to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general pattern related lottery process, the opening/closing control of the general pattern fluctuation game and the second special pattern starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general pattern is inactive), and the pending general pattern fluctuation game is If the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the general pattern fluctuation game is a win or a non-win by a random number lottery based on the general pattern winning random number stored in the random number storage area mentioned above. A winning flag is set in the RAM 308 if the winning is determined. In case of non-winning, the winning flag is set to off. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random value is obtained as the normal figure timer random value, and multiple variable times are generated based on the obtained normal figure timer random value. One of the time periods for variable display of the ordinary figure on the ordinary figure display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored as the ordinary figure fluctuation display time in the ordinary figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. The number of pending normal pattern fluctuation games is stored in a storage area for the number of normal pattern fluctuations provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit is determined, the number of pending normal pattern fluctuation games is stored. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this ordinary figure reservation number storage area. It also erases the random numbers used for hit determination.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process during the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on and Performs lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off the lights. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs a variable display of the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 contains a 15R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first loss flag, a second loss flag, a special symbol probability fluctuation flag, and a general symbol. A flag is prepared for each probability fluctuation flag. In the special pattern 2 state update process that starts when the special pattern 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (timing when the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special pattern probability fluctuates. When the flag is also on and the regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special pattern A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 55(a) are on, the special pattern probability fluctuation flag is off, and the regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is on. is special pattern B, 2R jackpot flag is on, special pattern probability fluctuation flag is also on, special pattern C if regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is also on, 2R jackpot flag is on, special pattern probability fluctuation flag is off, regular pattern If the probability fluctuation flag is on, special symbol D, 2R jackpot flag is on, special symbol probability fluctuation flag is also on, regular symbol probability fluctuation flag is on, special symbol E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special symbol The probability fluctuation flag is off, the special symbol F when the regular symbol probability fluctuation flag is also off, the special symbol G when the first small hit flag is on, and the special symbol H when the second small prize flag is on. , the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is configured so that when the first missed flag is on, the special symbol I appears, and when the second missed flag is on, the special symbol I appears. The lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area of the RAM 308 to indicate that the special figure 2 is being stopped and displayed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 displays a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability change symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-saving symbol (special symbol D), hidden probability pattern (special pattern E), sudden normal pattern (special pattern F), 1st small winning pattern (special pattern G), 2nd small winning pattern (special pattern H), 1st missing pattern (special pattern I), and the first missed symbol (special symbol J) is displayed as confirmed. Furthermore, after that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 m seconds). With this setting, the confirmed and displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage section provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result is from 1 to 0, the special symbol probability is changing. (Details will be described later) Otherwise, turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is also turned off during a jackpot game (during a special game state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the symbol that stops the fluctuating display is special figure 2. The process ends after additionally storing special figure 2 identification information indicating that the special figure 2 is present in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 is Set the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, and wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image notifying the player that a jackpot will start. For this purpose, information indicating the winning performance period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing special figure 2 waiting time provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined prize-winning presentation period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234). At the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening opening setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special map 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for keeping the attacker door 2341 in the closed state is output to the solenoid for opening/closing the attacker door 2341 of the variable winning opening 234, and information indicating the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening closing setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that repeats the opening/closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and starts at the timing when it ends, a predetermined end performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration The production standby period is indicated in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set the pattern display device 208 to wait for the period during which the image notifying the player of the end of the jackpot is displayed. Set information. In addition, if the regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as this jackpot game ends, the number of time reductions is set to 100 in the time reduction number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to 100. Turn on. Incidentally, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage section, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. The time saving mentioned here means that the pachinko machine becomes in an advantageous state for the player because the time from ending the jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation game to starting the next jackpot is shortened. When this time-saving flag is set to ON, the state is a high probability state. In the high probability state of common symbols, there is a higher possibility of hitting the jackpot in the common symbol fluctuating game compared to the low probability state of common symbols. In addition, the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation game are shorter in the normal pattern high probability state than in the normal pattern low probability state. Furthermore, in the normal pattern high probability state, the opening time for one opening of the tongue-shaped piece 2321 of the second special pattern starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal pattern low probability state. In addition, the tongue-shaped piece 2321 is more likely to open in the high-probability state of the common figure than in the low-probability state of the common figure. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the normal pattern low probability state is maintained. This means that if the probability of normal symbols is high during a jackpot game, a predetermined number of game balls will enter the variable prize opening 234 during the jackpot game, and many game balls will enter the second special symbol start opening 232 during the jackpot game. This is intended to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a jackpot when the ball enters the ball increases, resulting in an increased gambling experience.

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 inoperable setting area of the RAM 308 is Set inside. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, a loss flag is turned on as described later. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set special map 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) regarding the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process, with "special figure 2" replaced with "special figure 1", so the explanation is Omitted. In addition, the order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure status update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Also here, the special drawing related lottery process for special drawing 2 (special drawing 2 related drawing processing) is performed first (step S229), and then the special drawing related drawing processing for special drawing 1 (special drawing 1 related drawing processing) is performed (step S229). ) is performed (step S231). Regarding these special figure related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start conditions of the special figure 2 variation game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the start conditions for the games are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game starts to fluctuate first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the prize winning in the second special figure start opening 232. is given priority over notification of the lottery result based on winnings in the first special figure starting slot 230.

In step S233, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, where bit 15 is strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), and bits 11 to 14 are strobe information. Command types (for example, basic commands, symbol fluctuation start commands, symbol fluctuation stop commands, winning performance start commands, end performance start commands, jackpot round number specification commands, power recovery commands, RAM clear commands, error commands such as door open commands, etc.) Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off by the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a symbol fluctuation start command, the command data includes information such as the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special pattern probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special pattern-related lottery process, etc. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, it includes the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability fluctuation flag, etc., and in the case of the winning production command and end production start command, the special symbol. It includes the value of the probability fluctuation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, it includes the value of the special symbol probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a prize in the first special figure starting hole 230, whether there is a prize in the second special figure starting hole 232, and whether or not there is a prize in the variable winning hole 234. Including presence or absence.

In addition, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data includes the values of the 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special chart probability fluctuation flag, the special chart 1 related lottery process, and the special chart 2 related lottery process, which are stored in the RAM 308. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special symbol variable games or the second special symbol variable games, etc. that are on hold is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information stored in the RAM 308, such as the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, and the value of the special symbol probability fluctuation flag, is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information, which is stored in the RAM 308, and which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special symbol variable game or the second special symbol variable game that is on hold, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special symbol variable game or the second special symbol variable game that is on hold, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned big winning hole opening setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special symbol probability fluctuation flag, and the pending first special symbol fluctuation game or second special symbol fluctuation game. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special symbol probability fluctuation flag, and the pending first special symbol fluctuation game or second special symbol fluctuation game. Set information such as number. Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure reservation increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase process, the command data includes special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, advance notice information (pre-read notice information, Set either false advance notice information or no advance notice information).

Further, when a door opening command is sent from the payout control section 700 to the main control section 300, the door opening command is sent to the first sub-control section 400. The same applies when the door opening command is directly transmitted from the door opening sensor without going through the dispensing control unit 700. Further, in the case where the main control unit 300 directly receives the detection signal from the door open sensor, it transmits a door open command to the first sub control unit 400 when the detection signal is transmitted.

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S235, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to an information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via an information output circuit 336.

In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area are read out in step S205, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full error, is monitored. , when a front frame door opening error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower tray full error is included in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special symbol start opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I/O 310).

In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process moves to step S241.

In step S241, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original respective registers, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. to return to.

On the other hand, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as restoration data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained. FIG. 64(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 64(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300 or not.

In step S309 following step S307, production control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and according to the detection result, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190. Perform the process to change to .

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command for the various lamps 442, 452 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game platform frame lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command to the performance devices 2 to 5 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. Further, if there is a command to drive the motor 630 shown in FIG. 59 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 429 shown in FIG. 60. As a result, for example, when a round of a jackpot game ends or a small win game ends, the motor 630 is driven, the shutter member 62 changes to the non-storage state, and the interlocking member 64 moves to the lower position. Action is performed.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, settings are made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 64(b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 64(c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (here, once every 2 ms), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period. Execute with. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 explained in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S343 following step S341, the control command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing for updating the random value for effect is performed. etc.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained. FIG. 65(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 65(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), etc. are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400 or not.

In step S409 following step S407, production control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the decorative pattern display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If necessary, the performance data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 65(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 65(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (here, once every 2 ms), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period. Execute with. In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S443 following step S441, other processes such as updating the random number value for effect are performed.

FIG. 65(d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 of VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process advances to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameter settings are performed based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), The process advances to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, the specific configuration of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. Here, FIG. 66(A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and FIG. 66(B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the dip switch board 198. It is.

As described above, the accessory ratio/setting display 196 is configured to include the accessory ratio monitor and the setting monitor, and the accessory ratio monitor is configured to display the continuous accessory ratio (RY) and the accessory ratio (RY). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor is displaying the current setting value.

Here, the continuous accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls (i.e., safe balls) to be acquired that is due to the operation of the accessory when the accessory operates continuously (i.e., the variable winnings during the jackpot game) It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the mouth 234 and winning a prize. In addition, it may be the ratio of the number of game balls won by winning into the variable winning a prize opening 234 to the number of out balls. In addition, the accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls (i.e., safe balls) that are obtained due to the operation of the accessory (i.e., the number of winnings due to the opening of the second special figure start opening 232 and the variable prize winning opening 234). This refers to the percentage of game balls (number of game balls acquired). In addition, even if it is the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning into the variable winning hole 234, the first special drawing starting hole 230, the second special drawing starting hole 232, and the general winning holes 226a, 226b to the number of out balls. good.

As a result of calculating the continuous role object ratio, if it is determined that the continuous role object ratio exceeds 60%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the continuous role object ratio will be displayed blinking, and then a security signal ( RY) is output. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal that is output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. Note that the signal may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly conduct the type application test for gaming machines.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the accessory ratio will be displayed blinking, and then the security signal (YH ) is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal that is output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In addition, when the continuous character object ratio or the character object ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is made to blink, but the emitted light color may be changed, for example.

As shown in FIG. 66(B), eight dip switches are arranged on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each dip switch can be read and the appearance probability of the effect can be changed. You can set the appearance rate, entry rate of production mode, etc.

Next, a modification will be explained. In this modification, a variable winning a prize mouth unit different from the variable winning a prize mouth unit 6 shown in FIG. 54 etc. is used. The variable winning a prize opening unit here has a variable winning a prize opening 234, a storage passage 61, a shutter member 62, an out ball first guide port 661, and an out ball second guide port 662, but the first special figure starting port 230, The second special figure starting opening 232 and the regular figure starting opening 228 are not provided, and the variable winning a prize opening 234 becomes an attacker exclusively for the small winning game. In addition, in the following explanation, based on the direction in which the game ball flows down, it may be referred to as the upstream side or the downstream side.

First of all, in this modification, it is possible to perform the variable display of special figure 2 even while the variable display of special figure 1 is being displayed, and it is possible to execute the variable display of special figure 1 even while the variable display of special figure 2 is being displayed. This is a so-called pachinko machine that can change simultaneously.

The game board 200 is provided with a regular figure starting gate which allows winning when the game is played to the right, and a special figure 2 starting gate which is an electric chew is provided on the downstream side thereof. Further, on the downstream side thereof, a variable winning a prize opening unit having an attacker exclusively for small winning games is provided. Moreover, an attacker dedicated to the jackpot game is provided between the regular figure starting gate and the variable winning a prize opening unit. Even in this modification, whether it is a special figure 2 starting opening that is an electric chew, a variable winning opening in a variable winning opening unit (attacker dedicated to small winning games), or an attacker for jackpot games, it is possible to use a right-handed player. Otherwise, the ball won't go in, and if you hit left-handed, the ball won't go in. On the other hand, a special figure 1 starting hole is provided as a starting hole that allows the ball to be entered by hitting left-handed.

In the board configuration described above, when the player is hitting left-handed, the electric chew is not released. On the other hand, when playing right-handed, most of the game balls pass through the normal gate and head toward the electric chew. In this modification, even if the player is in the non-electricity support state, he or she will almost always win the general map lottery, and if the user is in the electrical support state, he or she will win the general map lottery with an even higher probability. Therefore, if you hit the ball to the right in the electric support state, the ball will almost enter the second special symbol starting hole 232. Here, even if a small winning game is being played, since the second special figure starting port 232 is provided upstream of the attacker dedicated to the small winning game in the variable winning opening unit, the small winning game dedicated There are almost no game balls that win in the attack game. On the other hand, if you hit right in the special pattern high probability normal pattern low probability state (probability variable and non-electronic support state), you can expect to win a prize in the attacker dedicated to the small winning game in the variable winning a prize opening unit. In addition, in the special pattern low accuracy, general pattern, low accuracy state (normal state), right-handed hitting is prohibited and it is designed to be left-handed, and right-handed hitting is prohibited. The display time is set to a very long time.

In addition, in this modification, special drawing 1 does not have a small winning prize, and only special drawing 2 has a small prize winning. A small win is much easier to win than a jackpot, and in a small win, the attacker door 2341 of the attacker dedicated to the small win game in the variable winning opening unit is opened only once for a short time (shorter than the opening time in a certain jackpot game, For example, 1.6 seconds). Since a plurality of game balls can be stocked in the attacker door 2341, even if it is only opened for a short time, if the attacker door 2341 is opened once, the stocked game balls can be expected to win a prize. In other words, in the special pattern high probability general pattern high probability state (probable variable and electric support state), the base (ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls) is set not to exceed "1", In the special pattern high probability normal pattern low probability state (variable probability and non-electric support state), the base is set to exceed "1" with the help of the game ball stock function by the attacker door 2341.

Therefore, the special pattern high probability normal pattern low probability state becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player, and even if the state shifts to the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state after the jackpot game ends, the special pattern fluctuation will occur a certain number of times. When consumed, the power support runs out, and the state shifts from the special map high probability regular map high probability state to the special map high probability regular map low probability state. Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the state may shift to a special pattern high probability normal pattern low probability state. Then, in the state where the probability of special drawings is high and the probability of regular drawings is low, the player does not expect to win the jackpot but rather to win the small jackpot.

FIG. 67 is a front view of an enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 67, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game machine. That is, the game media ejected from the ejection means 901 to the game area 902 can be ejected from the game area 902 and supplied to the ejection means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game machine. An upper plate 126 and a lower plate 128 shown at 51 are not provided.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 67 is used by enclosing balls and circulating the enclosed balls within the pachinko machine. may be performed by credit.

Furthermore, what has been referred to as a lamp is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced with any device that emits light, such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

According to the above description,
"A game machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 51 or the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 67] equipped with a door body [for example, the front frame door 106] that can be opened and closed,
When the door body is closed, it is located on the rear side of the door body, and when operated, the storage state [for example, the state shown in FIG. 54] and the non-storage state [for example, the state shown in FIG. 57(b)] are established. a ball storage means [for example, the shutter member 62] whose state changes between;
a drive means [for example, motor 630] for operating the ball storage means;
an interlocking member [for example, interlocking member 64] located on the rear side of the door body when the door body is closed, and interlocking with the operation of the ball storage means;
Equipped with
The interlocking member is a member that can be manually operated when the door body is open [for example, FIG. 58],
The ball storage means is a means whose state changes when the interlocking member is operated.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

Also,
``The ball storage means is a means that cannot be contacted even when the door body is open.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The ball storage means is a means located on the rear side of the door body when the door body is closed. Therefore, the ball storage means is a means that cannot be contacted even when the door body is closed.

The ball storage means is a means that cannot be touched even when the door body is open, so it is not a means that can be operated by a person's direct touch.

Also,
“Equipped with a variable winning opening [for example, variable winning opening 234],
The ball storage means is a means capable of storing game balls that have entered the variable prize opening [for example, FIG. 54],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The ball storage means may be a means provided in a passage connected to the variable prize opening.

Further, it includes an opening/closing member [for example, attacker door 2341] that opens and closes the variable winning opening,
The opening/closing member is capable of stocking one or more game balls in the closed state [for example, FIG. 56(a)],
When the opening/closing member opens, the variable prize opening may receive stocked game balls.

Furthermore, the opening/closing member may store one or more game balls in a visible manner.

Also,
"The game balls stored by the ball storage means are visible [for example, the storage passage 61 in the variable prize-winning port unit 6 shown in FIG. 54]",
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``An effect operation may be performed in which the interlocking member moves to a position overlapping from the front at least a portion of the storage area for game balls stored by the ball storage means [e.g., the storage passage 61] [e.g. Figure 57],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The effect movement may be an operation in which the interlocking member moves to a position where it overlaps all of the storage area from the front, or a movement in which the interlocking member moves to a position where it overlaps only a part of the storage area from the front. It may also be an action of moving.

Further, the performance action may be an action that may be performed in the non-storage state, or may be an action that may be performed also in the storage state, or may be an action that may be performed in the storage state. The operation may be performed only in the non-storage state of the non-storage state and the storage state.

The interlocking member is a member that may move from the front to a position overlapping at least a portion of the storage area of game balls stored by the ball storage means. The position may be moved to the non-storage state, the storage state, or only the non-storage state of the non-storage state and the storage state.

Also,
“The interlocking member is a member having a decorative portion [for example, the design portion 642],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The following is an additional description including what has been explained so far.

(Additional note 1)
sphere storage means;
Driving means for operating the ball storage means;
comprising a part that interlocks with the operation of the ball storage means,
The above-mentioned part is accessible to the store clerk from the front when the door is open,
When the part is operated, the ball storage means is operated.
A game machine characterized by:

(Additional note 2)
The game machine described in Supplementary Note 1,
The ball storage means is a means that cannot be touched by a clerk from the front when the door is open.
A game machine characterized by:

(Additional note 3)
The game machine according to supplementary note 1 or 2,
Equipped with a variable prize opening,
The ball storage means is a means capable of storing game balls that have entered the variable prize opening.
A game machine characterized by:

(Additional note 4)
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 3,
It is possible to visually confirm whether or not game balls are stored in the ball storage means;
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 5)
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 4,
When the ball storage means is in a non-storage state, the portion is located at a position overlapping from the front at least a part of the area where the game balls stored by the ball storage means were.
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 5,
The part is a part having a decorative part,
A game machine characterized by:

Next, a modification of the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 3 will be described. In the following explanation, constituent elements having the same names as those in the explanation using FIGS. 1 to 50 will be described with reference numerals used in FIGS. 1 to 50.

FIG. 68(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 3.

The attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 68 is also provided at the lower right part of the gaming area 124 shown in FIG. 3, and corresponds to an example of a variable ball entrance unit.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), the attacker unit 23 of this modification also has an attacker sticker 2302 pasted on a transparent attacker front plate 2301. Note that in FIG. 68, the decorative pattern of the attacker seal 2302 is omitted from illustration. Further, the lower part 2301L of the attacker front plate 2301 shown in FIG. 68(a) is recessed one step to the rear side, and a movable plate 2307 is provided in the lower part 2301L. Furthermore, an attacker winning prize light emitter 237 (see FIG. 70) is provided at the right end portion of the attacker unit 23.

FIG. 68(b) is a perspective view showing the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 68(a) with the attacker front plate 2301, movable plate 2307, and attacker prize winning light emitter 237 removed.

The attacker unit 23 includes an electric chew type special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231, a first variable winning opening 234 serving as a first attacker, a second variable winning opening 235 serving as a second attacker, and a second special figure starting opening 232. , and has an out port 236 opened to the attacker base plate 2303.

The special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 has a starting port whose size is variable by a blade member 2311, and the blade member 2311 shown in FIG. 68(b) is retracted to the rear side and the front end 2311t is Only the front part is visible. The special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 shown in FIG. 68(b) is in an open state. The blade member 2311 shown in FIG. 68(b) also advances to the front side like the blade member 2311 shown in FIG. 35(a), and the game ball passes over the advanced blade member 2311 from the left side to the right side. do. The ball detection sensor 2312 of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is disposed below the blade member 2311 and on the downstream side, facing upstream. In the state where the blade member 2311 shown in FIG. 35(a) advances forward, it is difficult for the game ball to pass the ball detection sensor 2312, and the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 is in a state where winning is difficult. It is.

On the other hand, the special drawing 1 start opening (variable) 231 shown in FIG. 68(b) in which the blade member 2311 has retreated to the rear side is in a winning easy state. While the special figure 1 starting hole (variable) 231 is in the winning easy state, the game ball that enters the attacker unit 23 is placed in the special figure 1 starting hole in the same way as the situation explained using FIG. 38(b). (Variable) It does not roll downstream from 231 and passes through the ball detection sensor 2312, and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The game balls that have passed through the ball detection sensor 2312 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the fourth guide port 2313, and then are discharged to the game island side.

The first variable winning hole 234, which is the first attacker, is located upstream in the rolling direction of the game ball than the second variable winning hole 235, which is the second attacker. This corresponds to an example of The size of the first variable prize opening 234 is changed by a door member 2341, and the door member 2341 shown in FIG. 68(b) is retreated to the rear side, and the front side including the front end 2341t Only that part is visible. The first variable winning hole 234 shown in FIG. 68(b) is in an open state. The door member 2341 shown in FIG. 68(b) also advances to the front side like the door member 2341 shown in FIG. 35(a), and the game ball passes over the advanced door member 2341 from the right side to the left side. do. The ball detection sensor 2342 for the first variable prize opening is arranged facing upward, below the door member 2341 that has advanced to the front side. In the state where the game ball advances to the front side like the door member 2341 shown in FIG. 35(a), it is difficult for the game ball to pass the ball detection sensor 2342, and the special drawing 1 starting port (variable) 231 is in a state where it is difficult to win. It is. The door member 2341 of the first variable prize opening 234 corresponds to an example of a first movable part, and the position advanced to the front side corresponds to an example of the first position.

On the other hand, the first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 68(b) in which the door member 2341 has retreated to the rear side is in an easy winning state. The position of the door member 2341 of the first variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 68(b) (the position retreated to the rear side) corresponds to an example of the third position. The first variable prize opening 234 is more likely to hold the game ball when the door member 2341 is in the backward position (third position) than when the door member 2341 is in the forward position (first position). It is easy to enter the ball.

The second variable winning hole 235 corresponds to an example of a second variable ball entering hole. Like the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235 also has a variable winning opening size depending on the door member 2351, but the placement position of the ball detection sensor is different from the first variable winning opening 234. . In FIG. 68(b), the game ball rolling toward the second variable winning opening 235 rolls from the right side to the left side of the figure. The ball detection sensor 2352 for the second variable winning a prize opening 235 is arranged not below the door member 2351 but on the downstream side of the door member 2351 and facing upstream. In the second variable prize opening 235, when the door member 2351 advances forward, the game ball passes over the advanced door member 2351 and reaches the ball detection sensor 2352. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68(b), in a state where the door member 2351 is retreated to the rear side, the game ball falls to a place where the ball detection sensor 2352 is not present. Therefore, the second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 68(b) is not blocked by the door member 2351 and is in an open state, but is in a winning difficult state. The door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 corresponds to an example of the second movable part, and the position of the door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 68(b) (the position retreated to the rear side) is This corresponds to an example of the second position.

A second special figure starting port 232 is arranged at the end where the game ball falls due to the door member 2351 retreating to the rear side. This second special figure starting opening 232 has a fixed winning opening size, and the ball detection sensor 2321 for the second special figure starting opening 232 is arranged facing upward. The game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2321 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the first guide port 2322, and then discharged to the game island side.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the back side of the attacker front plate 2301 removed in FIG. 68(b).

As shown in FIG. 69, a ball passage forming wall 230r protruding toward the attacker base plate 2303 is provided on the back surface of the attacker front plate 2301. The ball passage forming wall 230r forms a ball passage inclined toward the downstream side, through which the game ball that has entered the attacker unit 23 rolls. In addition, the ball passage forming wall 230r is not provided at the position where the blade member 2311 advances and the position where the door members 2341, 2351 advance, and the blade member 2311 and the door members 2341, 2351 that have advanced form the ball passage. Become a wall. That is, the blade member 2311 and the door members 2341, 2351 are inclined downwardly toward the downstream side when they are advanced to the front side, and the game ball is rolled toward the downstream side using this inclination. go.

It should be noted that the game ball that enters the attacker unit 23 may go to the route on the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 side, or may go to the out port 236 provided in the attacker unit 23.

Most of the game balls that have fallen in front of the second special figure starting opening 232 enter the second special figure starting opening 232, and the special figure 2 variable game is started. The game balls that have not entered the second special figure starting port 232 reach the out port 240 shown in FIG. 3 and are discharged to the game island side.

As shown in FIG. 68(b), the attacker base plate 2303 is provided with a plurality of ribs. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, the attacker front plate 2301 is also provided with a plurality of ribs. If you look from the upstream side along the flow of the game ball, it will go from the intermediate position of the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 to the right end, and then turn back to the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234. Ribs are provided beyond the intermediate position. That is, a plurality of vertical ribs are provided in two stages, upper and lower, and one horizontal rib is provided in the folded portion. Hereinafter, the four vertical ribs on the upper stage of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 side of the attacker base plate 2303 will be referred to as the rear first rib 23r1, and the one horizontal rib on the folded part will be referred to as the rear first rib 23r1. It is called the rear side horizontal rib 23r2, and the four lower vertical ribs on the first variable winning a prize opening 234 side are called the rear side second rib 23r3. In addition, the three vertical ribs in the upper row on the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 side of the attacker front plate 2301 are referred to as the first front rib 23f1, and the one horizontal rib in the folded part is referred to as the front side first rib 23f1. It is called a horizontal rib 23f2, and the four lower vertical ribs on the side of the first variable winning a prize opening 234 are called a front second rib 23f3.

Note that the attacker front plate 2301 shown in FIG. 69 includes various ball guide ribs 23f6 to 23f8 in addition to a first front rib 23f1, a front horizontal rib 23f2, a second front rib 23f3, and a front vertical rib 23f5, which will be described later. It is provided.

Whether it is the rear first rib 23r1, the rear horizontal rib 23r2, the rear second rib 23r3, the front first rib 23f1, or the front horizontal rib 23f2, the front side The 2-rib 23f3 is also a deceleration rib for reducing the rolling speed of the game ball.

The game ball whose rolling speed has been reduced by the second rear rib 23r3 and the second front rib 23f3 is more likely to stay on the door member 2341 of the first variable prize opening 234. In particular, the two rear second ribs 23r3 on the downstream side among the four rear second ribs 23r3 are provided in the spherical path formed by the advanced door member 2341, and The three front second ribs 23f3 on the downstream side among the second ribs 23f3 are also provided in the spherical path formed by the advanced door member 2341.

Near the first variable winning opening 234, four rear second ribs 23r3 and four front second ribs 23f3 are shown. The game ball gets caught on these eight second ribs 23r3, 23f3 and tends to stay on the door member 2341. In addition, the interval between adjacent ribs in the four rear second ribs 23r3 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, and the interval between adjacent ribs in the four front second ribs 23f3 is also equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball. .

Both the rear second rib 23r3 and the front second rib 23f3 described above are provided upstream of the second variable prize opening 235 in the rolling direction of the game ball. In addition, whether it is the rear second rib 23r3 or the front second rib 23f3, only some of the ribs are provided upstream of the first variable prize opening 234, but all the ribs are provided in the first It may be provided upstream of the variable winning a prize opening 234.

Alternatively, only one of the second rear rib 23r3 and the second front rib 23f3 may be provided. This is not limited to the second rib, but if there are both ribs provided on the rear side and ribs provided on the front side (for example, in the case of the first rib), the rib on either side It is also possible to provide only one.

When the door member 2341 retreats while the game balls are staying on the door member 2341, the game balls staying on the door member 2341 fall all at once, and the ball detection sensor 2342 for the first variable prize opening Detected. Therefore, compared to the case where the door member 2341 retreats while the game ball is passing through the door member 2341, the winning rate to the first variable prize opening 234 is improved, and the second rib 23r3 on the rear side and the second rib on the front side The rib 23f3 also serves as a winning rate improvement means. While the first variable winning hole 234 is in the winning easy state, the game ball that has passed through the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting hole (variable) 231 and rolled into the first variable winning hole 234 is The ball does not roll downstream from the prize opening 234 and passes through the ball detection sensor 2342.

The attacker unit 23 of this modification is provided with a storage passage 61 similar to the storage passage 61 shown in FIGS. 54 and 57. That is, the storage passage 61 shown in FIGS. 68(b) and 69 is a passage in which the balls that have been won in the first variable winning opening 234 are stored so that they can be seen by the player. The storage passage 61 is formed between the lower part 2301L of the transparent attacker front plate 2301 and the attacker base plate 2303, and the inside of the storage passage 61 is visible through the transparent lower part 2301L. In the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG. 54, ten game balls B are stored in its storage passage 61. The storage passage 61 will be described in detail later.

In FIG. 68(b), the flow of the game balls is also shown with a chain double-dot line. This two-dot chain line shows the flow of game balls that have jumped out from the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 toward the second variable winning opening 235.

As described above, in the second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 68(b), the door member 2351 is in a backward state, making it difficult to win. However, if the game ball flies in the flow shown by the two-dot chain line, there is a risk that it will pass the ball detection sensor 2352. That is, there is a possibility that a player may win a prize in the second variable winning hole 235 even though the second variable winning hole 235 is in a state where winning is difficult.

However, the game ball whose rolling speed has been reduced by the rear second rib 23r3 and the front second rib 23f3 does not have enough momentum to jump out from the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 toward the second variable winning opening 235. The ball is removed from the door member 2341, rides on the attacker intermediate portion 230r1 of the ball passage forming wall 230r shown in FIG. 69, and immediately falls. Therefore, the rear second rib 23r3 and the front second rib 23f3 are also means for reducing the winning rate to the second variable winning opening 235. Strictly speaking, the second rib 23r3 on the rear side and the second rib 23f3 on the front side are means for reducing the winning rate of winnings to the second variable winning opening 235 that would otherwise not be allowed (irregular winnings). It can be said.

However, even if the second rib 23r3 on the rear side and the second rib 23f3 on the front side are provided, which reduce the winning rate to the second variable prize opening 235, as described above, the speed should be reduced by these ribs 23r3, 23f3. It is difficult to completely prevent the game ball from flying out toward the second variable winning hole 235. For example, if a game ball bounces on the door member 2341, it may fly out toward the second variable prize opening 235. Therefore, a winning prevention protrusion 2351a that protrudes forward is provided at the downstream end (ball detection sensor 2352 side) of the door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235. This winning prevention protrusion 2351a protrudes in front of the ball detection sensor 2352 even when the door member 2351 is in the position retreated to the rear side. Therefore, even if there is a game ball that jumps out toward the second variable winning opening 235, the game ball collides with the winning prevention protrusion 2351a and cannot pass through the ball detection sensor 2352, as shown in FIG. 68(b). It will fall as shown by the dotted line shown in .

The attacker front plate 2301 is provided with an escape opening at a position corresponding to the downstream side (ball detection sensor 2352 side) end of the door member 2351 in the second variable prize opening 235. When the attacker sticker 2302 is pasted on this escape opening, it is blocked from the front side, making it difficult for the player to see it. In the attacker front plate 2301 shown in FIG. 68(a) to which the attacker sticker 2302 is attached, this relief opening 2301a is virtually represented by a dotted line. When the door member 2351 advances forward, the winning prevention protrusion 2351a enters the escape opening 2301a. The escape opening 2301a is a space in which the winning prevention protrusion 2351a protruding forward is accommodated when the second variable winning opening 235 is in the winning easy state. By providing the escape opening 2301a, the protrusion length of the winning prevention protrusion 2351a can be made long, and even if the door member 2351 is in the position retreated to the rear side, the winning prevention protrusion 2351a has the second variable winning a prize opening 235. Irregular game balls that fly towards you will definitely collide with each other. The tip of the winning prevention projection 2351a does not protrude further forward from the escape opening 2301a, and the presence of the winning prevention projection 2351a is hidden from the player by the attacker seal 2302. However, it is also possible to provide an opening in the attacker seal 2302 so that the tip of the winning prevention protrusion 2351a protrudes further forward from the escape opening 2301a as one of the effects.

Furthermore, a vertical rib winning preventing rib 23r4 is also provided on the winning preventing projection 2351a of the door member 2351 in the retreated position shown in FIG. 68(b). The game ball that has jumped out towards the second variable winning opening 235 collides with this winning prevention rib 23r4, and is unable to pass through the ball detection sensor 2352, as in the case where it collides with the winning prevention protrusion 2351a, and is marked with a dotted line. It may fall as shown.

In addition, the game ball that has fallen from the attacker intermediate part 230r1 collides with the rear vertical rib 23r5 shown in FIG. 68(b) and the front vertical rib 23f5 shown in FIG. Or, the ball is directed toward the second special figure starting hole 232 and becomes easier to enter the second special figure starting hole 232.

The door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 is provided at a lower position than the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234, and a ball passage shown in FIG. 69 is formed between both door members 2341 and 2351. An attacker intermediate portion 230r1 of the wall 230r is arranged. The attacker intermediate portion 230r1 and the door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 are slightly apart.

The blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 located at the most upstream position of the attacker unit 23 is in a state in which it has advanced forward (difficult to win state), and the door member of the first variable winning opening 234 located next 2341 is also in the state where it has advanced to the front side (difficult to win state), and the door member 2351 of the second variable winning a prize opening 235 is also in the state where it has advanced to the front side (easy to win state), most of the game balls are , rides on the door member 2351 of the second variable winning a prize opening 235, rolls on the door member 2351, and reaches the ball detection sensor 2352, but does not ride on the door member 2351 of the second variable winning a prize opening 235. Some game balls are unable to move and fall down, flowing down to the second special figure starting port 232 side. The game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2352 of the second variable winning hole 235 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the third guide hole 2353, and then discharged to the game island side.

In the door member 2351 of the second variable winning a prize opening 235, the position advanced to the front side corresponds to an example of the fourth position. The second variable prize opening 235 is such that the game ball is in a position where the door member 2351 is in the forward position (fourth position) than in the rearward position (second position). It is easy to enter the ball.

In addition, a gap similar to the gap CS1 explained using FIG. 37 is provided between the front end 2341t of the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 and the attacker front plate 2301, can be changed from a difficult-to-win state to an easy-to-win state in a short time. In addition, a gap similar to the gap CS2 explained using FIG. 37 is also provided between the front end 2351t of the door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 and the attacker front plate 2301, and the second variable winning opening 235 can be changed from the difficult-to-win state to the easy-to-win state in a short time, and the protrusion length of the winning prevention protrusion 2351a provided on the door member 2351 can be made longer, so that the door member 2351 can be moved to the rear side. Even in the retreated position, irregular game balls flying out toward the second variable winning opening 235 will surely collide with the winning preventing protrusion 2351a. Furthermore, when the door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 opens only once for a very short time such as 0.06 seconds, the rolling speed is reduced by the rear second rib 23r3 and the front second rib 23f3. Even if the game ball rides on the door member 2351, by the time it rolls on the door member 2351 and reaches the ball detection sensor 2352, the door member 2351 has retreated backward from the forward position due to the gap CS2. Since the ball can be moved to the desired position in a short time, the game ball will fall down and the winning rate due to the release can be reduced.

In the attacker unit 23 whose structure has been described in detail above, the attacker of the first variable winning opening 234 becomes an attacker dedicated to jackpots, and the attacker of second variable winning opening 235 becomes an attacker dedicated to small winnings. In the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, the ball is hit to the right, and most of the game balls hit to the right enter the special pattern 1 starting hole (variable) 231. For this reason, even if the attacker in the first variable winning hole 234 enters the easy-to-win state, and even if the attacker in the second variable winning hole 235 becomes in the easy-to-win state, the attacker can hardly be expected to win a prize. On the other hand, in the special pattern high probability normal pattern low probability state, the special pattern 1 starting hole (variable) 231 does not enter the easy ball entry state, and the game ball hit right is the attacker of the first variable winning hole 234 or the first variable winning hole 234. It can be expected that the attacker of the 2 variable winning opening 235 will win.

In addition, in this attacker unit 23, the state of the door member 2341 when the first variable winning opening 234 is in the winning easy state and the state of the door member 2351 when the second variable winning opening 235 is in the winning easy state are different. Since the conditions are exactly opposite, the way the game ball rolls is greatly different between the two variable winning holes, which may entertain the player. Moreover, since the two variable winning openings are lined up in the rolling direction of the game ball, the player can easily understand the difference in the state of the door members of the two variable winning openings, and can compare the states of the two door members. However, there are cases where you can enjoy the change in state.

Next, the storage passage 61 will be explained.

A shutter section 620 is arranged at the outlet (most downstream end) of the storage passage 61. The shutter section 620 is provided on the shutter member 62 (see FIG. 71). As will be described in detail later, the shutter member 62 changes state between a storage state and a non-storage state as the shutter section 620 moves in response to the driving force of the motor.

FIG. 70(a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the front plate 2301 of the attacker and the front plate of the winning light emitter 237 are removed from the attacker unit 23 when the shutter member is in the non-storage state. ) is a perspective view showing a state in which the front attacker plate 2301 is removed from the attacker unit 23 when the shutter member is in the storage state.

A second guide port 2343 is provided further beyond the shutter portion 620, that is, continuing from the exit of the storage passage 61. The game balls that have passed through the ball detection sensor 2342 are stored in the storage passage 61, then guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the second guide port 2343, and finally discharged to the game island side. Ru. On the other hand, a fifth guide port 2344 is provided upstream of the entrance (the most upstream end) of the storage passage 61. The game balls that entered the fifth guide port 2344 are also guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, and are finally discharged to the game island side.

A plurality of game balls are stocked in the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 in a state where they are adjacent to each other. The decorative pattern of the attacker seal 2302 is not applied to the part of the attacker front plate 2301 (see FIG. 68(a)) located in front of the door member 2341, and the game balls stocked on the door member 2341 are visible. It is possible. The number of game balls stocked in the door member 2341 may be only one ball, about four balls, or the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the storage passage 61 (here, 10 balls). There may be.

As shown in FIG. 69, in which the front side in the paper is the rear side (back side), the portion forming the storage passage 61 in the lower part 2301L of the attacker front plate 2301 is provided with four rearward protrusions 611B that protrude toward the rear side. It is being In addition, as shown in FIG. 70(b), in which the near side of the page is the front side (player side), the portion of the attacker base plate 2303 that forms the storage passage 61 has four forward-facing protrusions 611F that protrude toward the front side. is provided. The backward protrusion 611B and the forward protrusion 611F are arranged so that the apexes of each protrusion are shifted in the extending direction of the storage passage 61, and a meandering path is formed by the backward protrusion 611B and the forward protrusion 611F. be done. The interval between adjacent backward projections 611B is greater than or equal to the diameter of the game ball, and the interval between adjacent forward projections 611F is also greater than or equal to the diameter of the game ball. As a result, whether it is the backward protrusion 611B or the forward protrusion 611F, one game ball can enter between adjacent protrusions, and among the four backward protrusions 611B, One game ball on the upstream side of the backward protrusion 611B at the upstream end, one game ball on the downstream side of the backward protrusion 611B on the downstream end, and one of the four forward protrusions 611F at the upstream end. One game ball stays upstream of the forward protrusion 611F, and one game ball stays downstream of the forward protrusion 611F at the downstream end, so that ten game balls are stored. The maximum number of balls that can be stored in the storage passage 61 (10 balls in this case) is the maximum number of winnings per round. Both FIG. 68(b) and FIG. 70(a) show that ten game balls B are stored in the storage passage 61, which is blocked by the shutter section 620. The shutter section 620 provided at the exit of the storage passage 61 does not extend much into the path of the ball in the storage passage 61 in the storage state, but the size of the path of the ball is reduced by the advanced shutter section 620. It is limited to less than the diameter of the game ball B. Therefore, the game balls B are blocked by the shutter section 620 and cannot go beyond the storage passage 61. As described above, the storage passage 61 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the passage is visible, and the game balls B stored therein are visible. Note that a part of the stored game balls B may be hidden by the decorative pattern of the attacker sticker 2302. The game ball B stored in the storage passage 61 is a so-called dead ball, and showing this game ball corresponds to a dead ball performance. Further, as shown in FIGS. 68(a) and 70, a movable plate 2307 is provided on the front side of the shutter section 620. The movable plate 2307 also moves together with the shutter section 620. This movable plate 2307 is decorated, and when viewed from the front, the shutter portion 620 is difficult to see due to the movable plate 2307. For this reason, when game balls are not stored, it is not possible to determine whether the shutter member is in a stored state or a non-stored state, which may make the player interested in the state of the shutter member. .

Although the movable plate 2307 always hides the shutter portion 620 when viewed from the front, it does not hide the second guide port 2343, and the second guide port 2343 is always easily visible.

When ten game balls B are stored in the storage passage 61, ten game balls B are stored between the fifth guide port 2344 provided upstream of the entrance of the storage passage 61 and the shutter section 620. The balls are connected. In this state, if one more ball enters the first variable prize opening 234, the storage passage 61 is full, so that one game ball cannot be put into the storage passage 61, and the game ball enters the first variable prize opening 234. 5 guide port 2344 to the back side of the game board 200.

The shutter section 620 shown in FIG. 70(b) is completely retracted from the path of the ball in the storage passage 61, and the shutter section 620 does not touch the game ball B. Therefore, the game balls B that have been stored up to now advance through the storage passage 61 and are discharged from the second guide port 2343 to the back side of the game board 200. In FIG. 70(b), not a single game ball remains in the storage passage 61. In addition, if a ball enters the first variable winning hole 234 when the shutter member is in the non-storage state, the game ball that entered the first variable winning hole 234 is stored in the storage passage 61. It passes through the storage passage 61 and is discharged from the second guide port 2343 to the back side of the game board 200.

The initial state of the shutter member is the storage state. In the attacker unit 23, during a round in the jackpot game or while the door member 2341 of the first variable prize opening 234 is in the advanced state, the shutter member is in the initial storage state. As a result, the player can estimate the number of winnings in the first variable winning hole 234 during one round from the number of game balls stored in the storage passage 61. In the jackpot game state, the stepping motor SM (see FIG. 72) rotates every time one round ends, the shutter member changes state to the non-storage state, and the attacker unit 23 removes the stored data from the storage passage 61 until now. The game balls that won during one round are ejected. Then, by the time the next round starts, the shutter member returns from the non-storage state to the initial storage state. Then, by the time the door member 2341 returns to the advanced state, the shutter member returns from the non-storage state to the initial storage state. The above-described state change of the shutter member by the stepping motor SM corresponds to an example of a presentation operation.

FIG. 70(a) shows the attacker winning prize light emitter 237 shown in FIG. 70(b) with the front plate 237b removed. As shown in FIG. 70(a), the inside of the attacker winning light emitting body 237 is divided into 10 areas, and an LED is arranged in each area. Among the ten regions, the central region 2371 is the largest, and three LEDs 237L are visible in FIG. 70(a). The number of areas corresponds to the maximum number of winnings per round, and is the same as the number stored in the storage passage 61. The front plate 237b is translucent, and each time one game ball passes the ball detection sensor 2342, the LED lights up one area at a time. , the number of times the first variable winning hole 234 has been won can be confirmed.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a drive unit included in the attacker unit 23.

FIG. 71(a-1) shows the shutter member 62 in the storage state, the common drive unit 231U of the electric chew type special figure 1 starting opening (variable), and the common drive of the first variable winning opening that becomes the first attacker. It is a perspective view showing the common drive unit 235U of the unit 234U and the second variable prize opening which is the second attacker, and (a-2) is a diagram showing the dedicated drive unit 62U of the shutter member 62 in the storage state. It is. In addition, FIG. 71(b-1) shows the shutter member 62 in the non-storage state, the common drive unit 231U of the special drawing 1 starting opening (variable), the common drive unit 234U of the first variable winning opening, and the common driving unit 234U of the first variable winning opening. It is a perspective view showing the common drive unit 235U of the variable winning a prize opening, and the same figure (b-2) is a diagram showing the dedicated drive unit 62U of the shutter member 62 in the non-storage state. In both FIG. 71(a-1) and FIG. 71(b-1), the positional relationship of the shutter member 62 and each common drive unit 231U, 234U, 235U is the positional relationship of the state in which they are arranged in the attacker unit 23. The sphere detection sensors 2312, 2342, 2352, and 2321 are shown in order to make it easier to understand the relationship with the attacker unit 23 shown in FIG.

First, the shutter member 62 will be explained. The shutter member 62 includes a dedicated drive unit 62U and a connecting member 621 in addition to the shutter section 620. The dedicated drive unit 62U has a solenoid 62U1 as shown in FIG. 71(a-2) and FIG. 71(b-2). This solenoid 62U1 has a side surface covered by a unit base 62U2 and a top surface covered by a unit cover 62U3. The shutter section 620 is an arm-shaped member, and a distal end portion 620t moves forward and backward relative to the downstream end of the storage passage 61. The plunger 62U11 of the solenoid 62U1 shown in FIGS. 71(a-2) and 71(b-2) passes through the axis of a coiled return spring 62U12. The tip of the plunger 62U11 and the rear end of the arm-shaped shutter section 620 are connected by a connecting member 621 so that the arm-shaped shutter section 620 can rotate around the rear end. Comparing the shutter member 62 in the storage state shown in FIG. 71(a-2) and the shutter member 62 in the non-storage state shown in FIG. 71(b-2), the plunger member 62 shown in FIG. 62U11 is in a suction state, and the arm-shaped shutter portion 620 is rotated to the right and retreated. On the other hand, the plunger 62U11 shown in FIG. 71(a-2) is in the return state, and the shutter portion 620 is rotating to the left and moving forward. Note that due to the movable plate 2307 attached to the tip of the arm-shaped shutter section 620, the tip 620t of the shutter section 620 is hardly visible in FIG. 72(a-2), and the shutter is not visible in FIG. The tip 620t of the portion 620 is only slightly visible.

In addition, whether it is shown in FIG. 71 (a-1) or FIG. A door member 2351 of the winning opening is shown. The drive units that drive the blade member 2311 and the door members 2341 and 2351 have the same structure, configuration, shape, and size.

FIG. 72 is a perspective view showing the common drive unit 231U of the special drawing 1 starting opening (variable), the common drive unit 234U of the first variable winning opening 234, and the common driving unit 235U of the second variable winning opening 235 from diagonally above. It is.

A part of the common drive unit 231U of the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) shown in FIG. 72 has been disassembled, and a part of the common drive unit 235U of the second variable winning opening 235 has also been disassembled. The three common drive units 231U, 234U, and 235U all include a stepping motor SM serving as a drive source, a motor base MB in which the stepping motor SM is housed, a transmission arm AP that transmits the rotational driving force of the stepping motor SM, and a blade. It has a motor cover MC provided with guide grooves MC1 for the member 2311 and the door members 2341 and 2351.

The stepping motor SM has an operating angle of a predetermined angle (for example, 40 degrees) less than 360 degrees. That is, it is rotatable in the forward and reverse directions within an operating angle range of less than 360 degrees. The stepping motors SM in each of the three common drive units 231U, 234U, and 235U have a common operating angle and a common torque. In other words, the stepping motors are of the same model number from the same manufacturer. Therefore, the shape and size of the stepping motor SM are also the same. Therefore, the motor base MB in which the stepping motor SM is housed is also common to each of the three common drive units 231U, 234U, and 235U.

A rear end portion of a transmission arm AP is attached to the rotation shaft of the stepping motor SM, and the transmission arm AP rotates in accordance with the rotation of the rotation shaft. A tip AP1 of the transmission arm AP is inserted into a guide groove MC1 of the motor cover MC. A blade member 2311 and door members 2341 and 2351 are attached to the tip of the transmission arm AP. Therefore, the blade member 2311 changes its position by being transmitted with the rotational driving force of the stepping motor SM by the transmission arm AP, and the door member 2341 is also transmitted with the rotational driving force of the stepping motor SM by the transmission arm AP. The position of the door member 2351 changes as the rotational driving force of the stepping motor SM is transmitted to the door member 2351 by the transmission arm AP.

The guide groove MC1 provided in the motor cover MC is an arcuate groove that guides the movement of the blade member 2311 and the door members 2341 and 2351, respectively. The circumferential angle of the arc-shaped guide groove MC1 is an angle corresponding to the operating angle of the stepping motor SM. That is, the circumferential angle of the guide groove MC1 may be the same angle as the operating angle (eg, 40 degrees) or may be larger than the operating angle (eg, 45 degrees). When switching forward and reverse rotation of the stepping motor SM at the upper and lower limits of the operating angle range, if the circumferential angle of the guide groove MC1 is equal to or greater than the operating angle, the guide groove MC1 must be defined. The distal end portion AP1 of the transmission arm AP does not come into contact with both edges MCe in the circumferential direction, thereby preventing both edges MCe from being worn or damaged. In this way, by using a stepping motor SM whose operating angle is limited to a predetermined angle of less than 360 degrees, there is no need to configure a mechanical end for the moving part, and there is no need to worry about wear or damage to the mechanical end. Become. Furthermore, by switching the forward and reverse rotations of the stepping motor SM at the upper and lower limits of the operating angle range, the control program for the stepping motor SM does not become complicated. Furthermore, when the solenoid 62U1 shown in FIG. 71(a-2) is used to move the blade member 2311 and the door members 2341, 2351, the movement speed of the blade member 2311 and the door members 2341, 2351 when the solenoid is energized is When the solenoid is de-energized, the movement speed of the blade member 2311 and the door members 2341, 2351 due to the return springs 62U12 is slower, which may have an inconvenience that may affect the player's profits depending on the game. By using a motor of less than 100 Hz, the operating speeds of the blade member 2311 and the door members 2341, 2351 when opening and closing can both be made faster than that of the solenoid 62U1. Note that even if the solenoid 62U1 is used to move the shutter section 620, since it is a dead ball effect in the first place, there is no inconvenience that affects the player's profits, and there is no problem. Further, by simplifying the operation by limiting the operating angle to a predetermined angle less than 360 degrees, problems such as step-out can be reduced compared to a motor that rotates 360 degrees.

The movement ranges of the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting opening (variable), the door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening, and the door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening are the same, and the motor cover MC and transmission arm AP are also , are common to each of the three common drive units 231U, 234U, and 235U.

As described above, since the same common drive unit is used for the three common drive units 231U, 234U, and 235U, costs can be reduced during manufacturing and repair.

Moreover, the three common drive units 231U, 234U, and 235U shown in FIG. 72 are all attached in the same direction. That is, the three common drive units 231U, 234U, and 235U shown in FIG. 72 are all attached in a direction in which the stepping motor SM is located on the left side (hereinafter referred to as "leftward direction"). When the stepping motor SM of the left-facing common drive unit is rotated in the forward direction, if movable members such as the door members 2341, 2351 and the blade members 2311 move forward, the stepping motor SM is positioned on the right side (hereinafter referred to as "rightward direction"). ), the movable member will move backward when the stepping motor SM of the right-facing common drive unit is rotated in the forward direction. Therefore, when controlling two common drive units so that the states of the movable members are opposite to each other, if the common drive units are installed facing leftward and rightward, the stepping motors SM can be rotated in the same direction. control, and the control program does not have to be complicated.

In the above explanation,
“A variable ball entrance unit [for example, an attacker unit] provided with a first variable ball entrance [e.g., first variable winning hole 234] and a second variable ball entrance [e.g., second variable winning hole 235] 23] A game machine comprising:
Equipped with a ball entry opening [for example, a general winning opening 901, a regular starting opening 228, a first special starting opening (fixed) 230 , a second special starting opening 232 ],
The variable ball entrance unit has a first movable part [for example, door member 2341] and a second movable part [for example, door member 2351],
The first variable ball entrance opening is in a third position [for example, a position that is retracted to the rear side] than when the first movable part is in the first position [for example, a position that is advanced to the front side]. It is easier for the game ball to enter the ball when it is in the
The second variable ball entrance opening is in a fourth position [e.g., a position advanced to the front side] than when the second movable part is in the second position [e.g., a position retracted to the rear side]. It is easier for the game ball to enter the ball when it is in the
The first movable part has a front end [e.g., front end 2341t] located closer to the front in the first position than in the third position,
The second movable part has a front end [e.g., front end 2351t] located closer to the front in the fourth position than in the second position,
The first variable ball entrance hole [for example, the first variable winning hole 234] is located upstream in the rolling direction of the game ball than the second variable ball entrance hole [for example, the second variable winning hole 235]. It is a variable ball entry opening,
The ball entry port includes a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port [for example, the second special figure starting port 232],
The first ball entrance is one that gives a player a gaming value when the ball enters the ball [for example, the general winning opening 901, the first special drawing starting opening (fixed) 230],
The second ball entrance is one in which a lottery may be executed when a ball is entered [for example, the second special symbol starting opening 232, the general symbol starting opening 228],
The first ball entry port is provided at a position where there is a possibility that the game ball may enter the ball while heading toward the second variable ball entry port without entering the first variable ball entry port. The position is different from the above position [for example, inside the lamp unit 9 provided at the lower left of the game area 124, which is removed from the attacker unit 23, at the upper right of the game area 124, or at the lower center of the game board 200. ] [For example, general prize opening 901, first special drawing starting opening (fixed) 230] ,
A game ball that does not enter the second variable ball entry port enters the second ball entry port [e.g., second special pattern starting port 232] rather than the out port [e.g., out port 240]. It's easy to do,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

That is, the first movable part is located at the front side in the first position than the third position, and the second movable part is located in the front side in the first position than in the third position. The fourth position is located further forward than the second position.

According to this game machine, by making the open and closed states of the two variable ball entry openings different, it is possible to differentiate the rolling behavior of the game balls and entertain the players.

Also,
“The variable entrance ball opening unit has a first drive unit [for example, a stepping motor SM provided in the common drive unit 234U of the first variable winning opening 234] and a second drive unit [for example, the second variable winning opening 234]. 235 common drive unit 235U],
The first drive section has a first drive force [for example, a rotational drive force] that drives the first movable section [for example, the door member 2341] between the first position and the third position. ],
The second driving section has a second driving force [for example, a rotational driving force] that drives the second movable section [for example, the door member 2351] between the second position and the fourth position. ],
The first drive unit is a stepping motor with an operating angle of less than 360 degrees [for example, 40 degrees],
The second drive unit is a stepping motor with an operating angle of less than 360 degrees [for example, 40 degrees],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first drive section switches between forward and reverse rotations at the upper and lower limits of the operating angle range of the first drive section, and the second drive section switches between forward and reverse rotations. The rotation in the opposite direction may be switched between the upper and lower limits of the operating angle range of the second drive unit.

Also,
“The variable entry ball opening unit includes a first drive unit [for example, the common drive unit 234U of the first variable winning opening 234] and a second drive unit [for example, the common driving unit 235U of the second variable winning opening 235]. and
The first drive unit includes the first drive section [for example, stepping motor SM] and a first drive force transmission section [for example, transmission arm AP],
The second drive unit includes the second drive section [for example, stepping motor SM] and a second drive force transmission section [for example, transmission arm AP],
The first movable part changes its position [for example, advances or retreats] by being transmitted with the first driving force by the first driving force transmitting part,
The second movable part changes its position [for example, advances or retreats] by being transmitted with the second driving force by the second driving force transmitting part,
A common drive unit is used as the first drive unit and the second drive unit, respectively.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In addition,
"A first movable part [for example, door member 2341],
a second movable part [for example, door member 2351],
A first drive unit [for example, a stepping motor SM provided in the common drive unit 234U of the first variable prize opening 234],
A second drive unit [for example, a stepping motor SM provided in the common drive unit 235U of the second variable prize opening 235],
A game machine comprising:
The first driving section generates a first driving force [e.g., rotational driving force] that drives the first movable section,
The second driving section generates a second driving force [for example, rotational driving force] that drives the second movable section,
The first drive unit is a stepping motor with an operating angle of less than 360 degrees [for example, 40 degrees],
The second drive unit is a stepping motor with an operating angle of less than 360 degrees [for example, 40 degrees],
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

moreover,
“A first drive unit [for example, common drive unit 234U of the first variable prize opening 234],
A second drive unit [for example, common drive unit 235U of the second variable prize opening 235],
Equipped with
The first drive unit includes the first drive section [for example, stepping motor SM] and a first drive force transmission section [for example, transmission arm AP],
The second drive unit includes the second drive section [for example, stepping motor SM] and a second drive force transmission section [for example, transmission arm AP],
The first movable part changes its position [for example, advances or retreats] by being transmitted with the first driving force by the first driving force transmitting part,
The second movable part changes its position [for example, advances or retreats] by being transmitted with the second driving force by the second driving force transmitting part,
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

Further, the first drive section switches the rotation in the forward direction and the reverse direction at the upper and lower limits of the range of the operating angle (hereinafter referred to as "first operating angle") of the first drive section. The second drive section switches between forward and reverse rotation at the upper and lower limits of the range of the operating angle (hereinafter referred to as "second operating angle") of the second drive section. There may be.

In addition, the first driving force transmission section and/or the first movable section operate within an operating range corresponding to the first operating angle range, and the second driving force transmission section The part and/or the second movable part may operate within an operating range corresponding to the range of the second operating angle. That is, the regulating part that regulates that the first driving force transmitting part and/or the first movable part operates beyond the upper limit of the range of the first operating angle also There is no regulating part that restricts the second driving force transmission part and/or the second movable part from operating beyond the lower limit of the range of the second operating angle. There may be an embodiment in which there is no so-called mechanical end, in which there is neither a regulating part that regulates movement nor a regulating part that regulates movement beyond the lower limit of the second operating angle range.

Also,
“The variable ball entrance unit has a deceleration means [for example, the second rear rib 23r3 and/or the second front rib 23f3] that reduces the speed of the game ball,
The deceleration means is a means for improving the rate of ball entry into the first variable ball entry opening,
The deceleration means is a means for reducing the rate of ball entry into the second variable ball entry port,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the ball entry rates of the two variable ball entry ports, the first variable ball entry port and the second variable ball entry port, can be made different by a common deceleration means.

Also,
“The first variable ball entrance opening [for example, the first variable winning opening 234] is located upstream of the second variable ball entrance opening [for example, the second variable winning opening 235] in the rolling direction of the game ball. It is a variable ball entrance located at
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In addition, the first movable part may be provided upstream of the second movable part in the rolling direction of the game ball.

Also,
“The speed reduction means [for example, the second rear rib 23r3 and/or the second front rib 23f3] is configured to move the game ball in the rolling direction more than the first variable ball entrance opening [for example, the first variable winning opening 234]. It is a means located on the upstream side,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The deceleration means is a means located upstream in the rolling direction of the game ball than the second variable ball entrance opening [for example, the second variable winning opening 235],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``When the first movable part [for example, the door member 2341] is in the first position [for example, the position advanced to the front side], the game ball can roll on the first movable part. and
When the second movable part [for example, the door member 2351] is in the fourth position [for example, the position advanced to the front side], the game ball can roll on the second movable part. be,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“When the first movable part [for example, the door member 2341] is in the third position [for example, the position retreated to the rear side], the game ball does not roll on the first movable part. It is possible and
When the second movable part [for example, the door member 2351] is in the second position [for example, the position retreated to the rear side], the game ball cannot roll on the second movable part. is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 73 to 107. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 73 to 107 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 73 to 107, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 107, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 73 to 107.
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described using FIG. 73. Note that this figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine in which a player can earn a profit when a predetermined condition is met, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, and a ball storage tray door 108. A device 110 and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the player side).

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member in a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (such as an island facility) provided at a game machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge part 112, and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base body. . Further, the main body 104 is formed into a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk at a store (gaming parlor) in which this pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close this main body 104, and a main body open sensor 1041 is provided to detect when the main body 104 is opened.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge part 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely. This is a door member with an opening. A clerk at the game parlor can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 is also provided to detect when the front frame door 106 is opened. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U are provided on the front side. is installed. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door body. Note that a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 at the front of the Pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be openable and closable. This ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pushing a release lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a ball storage dish door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage dish door 108 is opened. The ball storage tray door 108 includes a ball storage tray 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with a passageway for guiding the game balls to the firing device 110. , a ball extraction button 130 that allows the game balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 to be ejected from the ball storage tray 126 by the player's operation, and a ball removal button 130 that allows the game balls that have been guided to the firing device 110 by the player's operation to be ejected from the game board. A ball firing handle 134 that launches the ball into the game area 124, a performance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices according to the player's operation, and a button lamp 138 that is built into the performance button 136 and causes the performance button 136 to emit light. , and a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game parlor. Although not shown in FIG. 73, a return operation button is also provided on the right side of the ball lending operation button 140 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance. Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 in which a cross key and a decision button are arranged is also provided.

The firing device 110 includes a firing rod 146 that is attached below the main body 104 and rotates when the ball firing handle 134 is operated by the player, and a firing mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , is provided. This firing device 110, while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, releases the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). This corresponds to an example of a firing means.

FIG. 74 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 73 seen from the back side.

The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has a ball tank 150 which has an opening opening upward and is used to temporarily store game balls. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding balls falling through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The dispensing device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. This dispensing device 152 is detachable and connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when attached to a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and descended into the payout device 152, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Accordingly, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that conveys the game ball by applying a driving force to the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor that detects the passing of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, it sends either a high or low signal. The other signal, either high or low, is output to the payout control section. The game balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach a ball storage tray 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fulfillment of the granting conditions, the game value (game balls) in an amount corresponding to the granting conditions is awarded (paid out) to the player using this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit that performs control processing for the overall game, and a control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub-board case 162 that houses a first sub-board 160 constituting a first sub-control unit that performs the above operations, and a second sub-control unit that performs control processing related to production based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 constituting the game ball, a payout control section that performs control processing regarding the payout of game balls, and an error cancellation switch 168 that cancels errors by operation of a game clerk. A payout board case 172 that houses the board 170, a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit that performs control processing regarding the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices. and a power supply board 182 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off according to the operation of a game store clerk, and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A case 184 and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are provided.

Further, on the main board 156, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and an accessory ratio/setting display 196 are provided. When the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to a setting change mode in which at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities can be set. can. In the setting change mode, the current settings are displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the settings by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the configuration may be such that the settings can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and placed inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. The accessory ratio/setting display 196 has 2-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged above and below, and a 1-digit 7-segment LED on the right side. (YH) and continuous role object ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current settings. The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a single-color red LED, but it may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. Note that at least a part of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200 so as to be visible to the player.

Further, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162.

FIG. 75(a) is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes called the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and when viewed from the front, the left hand is sometimes called the left and the right hand is sometimes called the right. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the higher one being referred to as the top and the lower one being referred to as the bottom. Although not shown in FIG. 75, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side is sometimes called the front side or front side, and the back side is called the rear side or back side. There are cases.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front side, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted as the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104, but for example, the left side 200L of the game board 200 in the front view is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 in the front view (hinge part 112 side), and the left side part 200L in the front view is inserted here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the right side 200R of the game board 200 in front view is pressed and set against the main body 104 while rotating the game board 200 with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. With such a structure, workability can be improved. There are cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a transparent game board 201 serving as a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which game balls can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104. In the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the shot game ball.

Areas other than the gaming area 124 of the gaming board 200 may be referred to as non-gaming areas. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Furthermore, at least the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the game ball launch intensity is maximized can be called the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of a production device or the like within the game area 124. The game area 124 is called a downstream area in that game balls flow down during a game, and the non-gaming area is sometimes called a non-drift area in that game balls do not flow down during a game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a downstream area, but the area where the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a presentation device or the like may be called a non-flow area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged approximately in the center of the gaming area 124. Note that a main control lamp board 207 is provided below the gaming area 124.

FIG. 75(b) is an enlarged view of the main control lamp board 207.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), the main control lamp board 207 includes a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol holding lamp 216. , a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, a high accuracy medium lamp RK, an electric support medium lamp RD, a right-hand hit display lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR are arranged. ing. Note that, hereinafter, the ordinary pattern may be referred to as a "normal pattern" and the special pattern may be referred to as a "special pattern".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative patterns and various displays used for production, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and a production display area 208d. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the performance display area 208d displays images used for performance. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display, a reel (drum) display, a leaf display, a plasma display, and a projector.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), the ordinary figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying ordinary figures, and is constituted by two vertical LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are each composed of eight LEDs in two stages, upper and lower.

The normal pattern holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of normal pattern fluctuation games (details will be described later) that are on hold, and allows the normal pattern fluctuation games to be held up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). There is. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure variable games, and makes it possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. In addition, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and makes it possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special symbol variable games. .

Further, the high probability medium lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a jackpot is likely to occur, or a high probability state. The electric support lamp RD indicates that the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shortened and that the door member 2320 (see FIG. 76) of the electric tulip (electronic chew) described later is in the electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time. This is a lamp for. The right-hand hitting display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a state where he or she can obtain benefits by playing right-handed, in a jackpot game state, a variable probability state, and an electric support state. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when the jackpot is won.

Further, one special 1 start chucker 23 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. The first starting chucker 23 has a cover plate 231 in the front.

FIG. 75(c) is a diagram showing the back side of the cover plate 231 of the special 1 starting chucker 23 as seen from diagonally below and to the right.

The first special starting chucker 23 has a first special figure starting opening 230 between the cover plate 231 and the game board 201. A game ball released from the rotating body unit 28, a small portion of which can be seen near the bottom center in Fig. 75(a), can enter the first special figure starting port 230, but it is not guaranteed that 100% of the game ball will enter. do not have. That is, as shown in FIG. 75(c), the rotating body unit 28 is provided with a starting port side guide path 288 and out discharge ports 289L and 289R on both sides thereof. The exit opening 2881 of the starting port side guideway 288 is located directly above the first special pattern starting port 230, but at a position vertically spaced from the first special pattern starting port 230 by at least one game ball. It is located. Therefore, the game ball released from the exit opening 2881 may deviate from side to side and may not enter the first special figure starting port 230. In addition, it may be configured such that the game ball released from the exit opening 2881 enters the first special figure starting port 230 100%.

When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 74 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4 balls) of balls are stored as prize balls. At the same time as discharging it onto the tray 126, a special symbol variation game using the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), a first ball passage 2681 and a second ball passage 2682 extend from the left side directly above the rotating body unit 28, only a portion of which is shown. Details of the rotating body unit 28, the first ball passage 2681, and the second ball passage 2682 will be described later.

Further, on the right side of the first special figure starting opening 230 shown in FIG. 75(a), a second variable winning opening 235, which serves as a second attacker, is arranged. In the second attacker, the second door member 2351 rotates toward the front side using the lower edge as a rotation axis. Furthermore, one general winning hole 226 is arranged on the upper part of the second attacker, and two general winning holes 226 are arranged diagonally on the left side of the special 1 starting chucker 23. When a ball enters the general winning hole 226, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball and, assuming that the ball has won in the general winning hole 226, drives the payout device 152 and awards a predetermined number of balls (for example, 4 balls). The balls are discharged into the ball storage tray 126 as balls. The players can freely take out the balls discharged into the ball storage tray 126, and with these configurations, prize balls are paid out to the players based on winnings. The balls that entered the general winning hole 226 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Furthermore, in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 75(a), a first attacker unit is arranged on the right side, and an electric distribution unit is arranged on the left side. The first attacker unit is covered by a transparent lower right transparent plate 2591, and is normally visible through the lower right transparent plate 2591, but it is not shown as such in FIG. 75(a). do not have. Furthermore, the electric sorting unit is also covered by a transparent left transparent plate 2691, and would normally be visible through the left transparent plate 2691, but this is not shown in FIG. 75(a). Note that both the first attacker unit and the electric sorting unit are units that can partially transmit light on the back side.

Further, above the game area 124, a first three-dimensional film presentation body 271 and a second three-dimensional film presentation body 272 are arranged. The first three-dimensional film presentation body 271 is provided to overlap the second three-dimensional film presentation body 272, and in FIG. 75(a), the two appear to be integrated. The first three-dimensional film presentation body 271 and the second three-dimensional film presentation body 272 will be described in detail later.

Further, on the right side of the game area 124, a third three-dimensional film presentation body 273 is arranged. More than half of the third three-dimensional film presentation body 273 is covered by a transparent lower right transparent plate 2591 and a transparent upper right transparent plate 2592. Further, the first attacker unit whose back side is partially transparent is arranged between the third three-dimensional film production body 273 and the upper right transparent plate 2592. Normally, the third three-dimensional film production body 273 would be visible through the transparent plates 2591, 2592 and the first attacker unit 25, but this is not shown in FIG. 75(a).

Further, on the left side of the game area 124, a fourth three-dimensional film presentation body 274 is arranged. More than half of the fourth three-dimensional film production body 274 is covered by a part of the transparent game board 201 and the transparent left transparent plate 2691. Moreover, an electric distribution unit 26 (see FIG. 76) whose back side is partially transparent is arranged between the fourth stereoscopic film presentation body 274 and the left transparent plate 2691. Originally, a part of the transparent game board 201, the left transparent board 2691, and the fourth 3D film presentation body 274 could also be seen through the electric distribution unit 26, but in FIG. 75(a), this is not possible. Not shown. The third three-dimensional film presentation body 273 and the fourth three-dimensional film presentation body 274 will also be described in detail later.

Furthermore, a substantially circular LED light-emitting element 278 is arranged diagonally at the lower left of the third three-dimensional film element 273. A plurality of LEDs 2781 are provided on the outer periphery of the LED light emitting element 278, and the LED light emitting element 278 is an element that emits light in a radial direction. The LED light-emitting element 278 is better than each of the three-dimensional film elements such as the first three-dimensional film element 271, the second three-dimensional film element 272, the third three-dimensional film element 273, and the fourth three-dimensional film element 274. Although it is placed at the rear, the light emitted from the LED light emitting element 278 in the radial direction is diffused, and some light is directed forward. Therefore, these three-dimensional film presentation bodies 271 to 274 are irradiated with light from the side by the LED light emission presentation body 278. Note that the LED light-emitting element 278 is arranged in front of these three-dimensional film elements 271 to 274, so that these three-dimensional film elements 271 to 274 are irradiated with light from the front by the LED light-emitting element 278. You can also do this.

In addition, the game area 124 is provided with a disc-shaped ball hitting direction converting member called a windmill (not shown) and a plurality of game nails (not shown), and at the bottom of the inner rail 204 are An out port 240 is provided for guiding balls that have not won in any of the winning ports or starting ports to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging them to the game island side.

The balls contained in the ball storage tray 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball firing handle 134, and the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 cause the ball to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and enter the gaming area 124. Launch. The balls that have reached the upper part of the gaming area 124 flow downward while changing their traveling direction by the electric distribution unit 26, a hitting direction converting member (not shown), a game nail, etc., and enter various prize openings and starting openings. Either the player wins a prize or reaches the out port 240 without winning in any winning port or starting port. Note that the game board 200 may be provided with an out sensor. The out sensor is a sensor configured to be able to detect a game ball that has passed through the sensor of the winning opening, a game ball that has passed through the sensor of the starting opening, and a game ball that has entered the out opening. Alternatively, the sensor may be configured to be able to detect only a part of the winning opening, starting opening, and out opening.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a state in which the lower right transparent plate 2591, the upper right transparent plate 2592, and the left transparent plate 2691 are removed from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 75. In addition, in FIG. 76, the first 3D film production body 271, the second 3D film production body 272, the 3rd 3D film production body 273, and the 4th 3D film production body 274 are also removed, and the LED light emission production body 278 is also removed. ing. As a result, a frame 208f of the decorative pattern display device 208 is illustrated in FIG.

In FIG. 76, the first attacker unit 25 is shown on the right side, and the electric distribution unit 26 is also shown on the left side.

The first attacker unit 25 shown in FIG. 76 is provided in the right side area of the gaming area 124. When the game ball is hit to the right, the game ball passes through a first area 1241 and a second area 1242, which will be described later, and enters a right route 1243, and heads toward the right area. The right side route 1243 is covered by the upper right transparent plate 2592, and the general figure starting port 228 is arranged at the end where it branches into two and then merges. The normal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124, and one is arranged on the right side of the game board 200. It is set up. The ball that has passed through the normal game starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, but when it enters the ball, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one) are paid out, and the entered game ball is It is also possible to guide it to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharge it to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal pattern fluctuation game using the normal pattern display device 210.

A second special figure starting port 232 is arranged upstream of the first attacker unit 25. This second special figure starting port 232 has a door member 2320 that moves forward and backward with respect to the ball passage. The door member 2320 and the second special figure starting port 232 are sometimes called an electric tulip (electric chew). The ball detection sensor 2322 for the second special figure starting port 232 is disposed laterally on the downstream side of the door member 2320 extending forward. In the electric chew shown in FIG. 76, the door member 2320 is retracted, and even if a game ball enters the electric chew inlet 2323, it falls and does not reach the ball detection sensor 2322. On the other hand, the game ball that has passed through the electric chew inlet 2323 with the door member 2320 moved forward reaches the ball detection sensor 2322. The game ball that has reached the ball detection sensor 2322 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Game balls that have not entered the electric chew introduction port 2323 or game balls that have entered the electric chew introduction port 2323 but have fallen advance to an intermediate position of the first attacker unit 25.

At an intermediate position of the first attacker unit 25, a first variable prize opening 234 serving as a first attacker is arranged. In the first attacker, the first door member 2341 moves forward and backward with respect to the ball passage. The ball detection sensor 2342 for the first variable winning a prize opening is disposed facing upward and below the first door member 2341 that has advanced to the front side. In the first attacker shown in FIG. 76, the first door member 2341 has retreated, and the game ball that has flowed down to the intermediate position of the first attacker unit 25 falls and passes the ball detection sensor 2342, so that the ball is It is detected by the detection sensor 2342. The game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2342 is guided to the back side of the first attacker unit 25. On the back side of the first attacker unit 25, a V sorting device (not shown) is arranged, which directs the game balls that have passed the ball detection sensor 2342 to a V winning port (not shown) or to an out port. Sort it out. The first door member 2341 moves forward and backward according to the small winning game, and when the game ball enters the V winning hole, it becomes a V winning and the jackpot game starts. On the other hand, in a state where the first door member 2341 has advanced forward, it is difficult for the game ball to pass over the advanced first door member 2341 and to pass through the ball detection sensor 2342. The first door member 2341 is gradually inclined downward as it goes downstream in the direction of passage of game balls. Further, in the ball passage formed by the advanced first door member 2341, a plurality of deceleration ribs 234r protruding forward are provided at intervals. At the first door member 2341 that has advanced forward, the game ball is easier to flow down due to the inclination of the first door member 2341, but the game ball is caught on the deceleration rib 234r and remains on the first door member 2341 for a while. It may remain for some time. When the first door member 2341 retreats with the game balls staying on the first door member 2341, the game balls staying on the first door member 2341 fall all at once, and the first variable prize opening The ball detection sensor 2342 detects the ball. Therefore, compared to the case where the first door member 2341 retreats while the game ball is passing through the first door member 2341, the winning rate to the first variable winning opening 234 is improved, and the deceleration rib 234r increases the winning rate. It also serves as a means of improvement.

The game balls that have passed over the first door member 2341 that has advanced forward are discharged from the first attacker unit 25 through the vertical ball passage 251 without passing through the V sorting device (not shown). be done. The vertical ball passage 251 is provided with a plurality of deceleration ribs 251r along the passage. These plural deceleration ribs 251r also protrude forward.

The first attacker unit 25 described above is not provided with a game nail.

A part of the transparent game board 201 is interposed in front of the first attacker unit 25, and a plurality of game nails 238 are provided there, although not shown in FIG. 75. These game nails 238 may cause the game ball to head toward the general winning hole 226. Moreover, if the second door member 2351 of the second attacker is in an open state, a prize may be won in the second variable prize opening 235. Further, if the second door member 2351 of the second attacker is in a closed state, the second attacker may head toward the outlet 240.

The electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 76 is provided in the left side area of the gaming area 124. If the game ball is hit to the left, the game ball will advance from the first area 1241 or the second area 1242 to the left area. Left-handed hitting is the recommended way of hitting in the normal state (low probability state). Note that right-handed hitting is a recommended hitting method in a time-saving state (a high-probability state). The first region 1241 and the second region 1242 are adjacent regions, and the first region 1241 is on the downstream side in the ball launch direction. That is, the second region 1242 is a region farther from the return ball prevention piece 203 than the first region 1241. Therefore, when aiming at the first area 1241, it is necessary to fire the game ball with a stronger firing intensity than when aiming at the second area 1242. It is necessary to fire the game ball with a weaker firing strength than when aiming. However, even if a game ball is fired with a strong firing intensity, it may bounce off the wall 1241a that partitions the first area 1241 and enter the second area 1242. A ball passage 1245 extends from the first region 1241, and this ball passage 1245 is provided with a plurality of deceleration protrusions 1245p. Further, the second region 1242 is also provided with a plurality of deceleration protrusions 1242p.

A part of the transparent game board 201 is interposed between the ball path 1245 and the electric distribution unit 26, and a plurality of game nails 238 are provided there, although not shown in FIG. It is being Also, a part of the transparent game board 201 is interposed between the second area 1242 and the electric distribution unit 26, and there are also a plurality of game nails there, although not shown in FIG. 238 is provided. Hereinafter, the area where this part of the game board 201 is provided may be referred to as the distribution front area 125.

The game balls that have passed through the ball path 1245 and the game balls that have entered the second area 1242 enter the distribution front area 125. The distribution front region 125 branches into three routes: a right route 125R, a center route 125C, and a left route 125L. Each route is divided by game nails 238. Note that the game nail 238 may be made of metal or resin. The ball passage 1245 is connected to the right route 125R, and the second region 1242 is connected to the left route 125L. The central route 125C is a route provided in the lower half of the distribution front area 125, and is located between the right route 125R and the left route 125L. A game ball that has passed through the right route 125R or a game ball that has passed through the left route 125L may enter this central route 125C. Further, a game ball that had passed through the right route 125R may enter the left route 125L, and a game ball that had passed through the left route 125L may enter the right route 125R.

The electric distribution unit 26 is provided with roughly three ball paths. These three ball paths become a first ball path 2601, a second ball path 2602, and a third ball path 2603. Each route will be explained below.

First, the first ball path 2601 will be explained. The first ball route 2601 is the right ball route connected from the right route 125R. This first ball path 2601 is provided with a first upstream ball delay section 2651, a third ball direction change section 263, a first downstream ball delay section 2652, and a first ball direction change section 261 from the upstream side. Both the first upstream ball delay section 2651 and the first downstream ball delay section 2652 are provided in the vertical ball path, and are provided at locations where the moving speed of the game ball tends to be high. The first upstream ball delay section 2651 is for reducing the speed of movement of the game ball toward the third ball direction changing section 263, and the first downstream ball delay section 2652 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball toward the first ball direction changing section 261. This is to reduce the moving speed of the game ball. A detailed explanation of the first upstream ball delay section 2651 and the first downstream ball delay section 2652 will be given later.

The third ball direction changing section 263 includes a direction changing member 2631 and a motor (not shown). Note that the first ball direction changing section 261 has a direction changing member 2611 and a motor (not shown), the second ball direction changing section 262 has a direction changing member 2621 and a motor (not shown), and the fourth ball direction changing section 262 has a direction changing member 2621 and a motor (not shown). 264 includes a direction changing member 2641 and a motor (not shown). The following description of the third ball direction changing section 263 is also the same for direction changing sections (261, 262, 264) other than the third ball direction changing section 263.

The direction change member 2631 has a right inclined surface 263R and a left inclined surface 263L. The direction changing member 2631 is rotated by a motor (not shown) to change its posture between a rightward posture and a leftward posture. The rightward orientation is the orientation of the direction change member 2631 shown in FIG. 76, in which the right inclined surface 263R is inclined toward the lower right and the left inclined surface 263L is vertical. The leftward orientation is the orientation of the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth ball direction changing unit 264 shown in FIG. 76, in which the left inclined surface 263L is inclined toward the lower left and the right inclined surface 263R is vertical. The direction changing member 2631 uses random numbers to determine which posture and at what timing the direction changing member 2631 changes its posture. The speed of change (rotation speed) is also determined using random numbers, and sometimes the posture changes slowly and sometimes quickly. The posture of the direction change member 2631 and the manner in which the posture changes are visible to the player, but since the direction change member 2631 moves irregularly using random numbers, it is difficult to predict the posture of the direction change member 2631. It is impossible to fire a game ball. As shown in FIG. 76, when the direction changing member 2631 of the third ball direction changing section 263 is in the rightward orientation, the game ball flows down toward the lower right along the right inclined surface 263R. That is, the ball flows down toward the first downstream ball delay section 2652 and continues to move along the first ball path 2601. On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2631 of the third ball direction changing section 263 is in the leftward orientation, the game ball flows down toward the lower left along the left inclined surface 263L, deviates from the first ball path 2601, and moves toward the center. It enters the third ball path 2603.

As shown in FIG. 76, when the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing section 261 is in the rightward orientation, the game ball flows down toward the lower right along the right inclined surface 261R. A first guide port 2613 is opened at the lower right of the first ball direction changing section 261 . Therefore, when the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing section 261 is in the rightward orientation, the game ball is directed toward the first guiding port 2613. The game ball passes through the first guide port 2613, is guided to the back side of the electric distribution unit 26, and enters the first ball passage 2681. The first ball passage 2681 is divided into a transparent upstream passage 2681a and a similarly transparent downstream passage 2681b, and the game balls guided to the back side of the electric distribution unit 26 first flow down the upstream passage 2681a. Next, the game ball falls into the downstream passage 2681b at the downstream end of the upstream passage 2681a, and then flows down the downstream passage 2681b. The game ball falls from the downstream end of the downstream passage 2681b onto the rotating body unit 28, only a portion of which is visible in FIG. 76. Since the first ball passage 2681 is transparent, the game ball flowing down the first ball passage 2681 can be visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing section 261 is in the leftward orientation, the game ball flows down toward the lower left along the left inclined surface 261L. An out port 241 is provided at the lower left of the first ball direction changing section 261, and game balls that enter this out port 241 pass through a path 2604 (see FIG. 77) provided inside the electric distribution unit 26. Finally, it is discharged to the game island side.

Next, the second ball path 2602 will be explained. The second ball route 2602 is a left ball route connected from the left route 125L. This second ball path 2602 is provided with a second upstream ball delay section 2653, a fourth ball direction change section 264, a second downstream ball delay section 2654, and a second ball direction change section 262 from the upstream side. The fourth ball direction changing section 264 is provided side by side with the third ball direction changing section 263 in the first ball path 2601 with the third ball path 2603 in between. The second ball direction changing portions 262 are provided side by side in the first ball path 2601 with the first ball direction changing portion 261 and the third ball path 2603 interposed therebetween. Both the second upstream ball delay section 2653 and the second downstream ball delay section 2654 are provided in the vertical ball path, and are provided at locations where the moving speed of the game ball is likely to be high. The second upstream ball delay section 2653 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball toward the fourth ball direction changing section 264, and the second downstream ball delay section 2654 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball toward the second ball direction changing section 262. This is to reduce the moving speed of the game ball. A detailed explanation of the second upstream ball delay section 2653 and the second downstream ball delay section 2654 will also be described later.

As shown in FIG. 76, when the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth ball direction changing section 264 is in the leftward orientation, the game ball flows down toward the lower left along the left inclined surface 264L. That is, the ball flows down toward the second downstream ball delay section 2654 and continues to move along the second ball path 2602. On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth ball direction changing section 264 is in the rightward orientation, the game ball flows down toward the lower right along the right inclined surface 264R, deviates from the second ball path 2602, and moves toward the center. The ball enters the third ball path 2603.

As shown in FIG. 76, when the direction changing member 2621 of the second ball direction changing section 262 is in the rightward orientation, the game ball flows down toward the lower right along the right inclined surface 262R. A second guide port 2623 is opened at the lower right of the second ball direction changing portion 262 . Therefore, when the direction changing member 2621 of the second ball direction changing section 262 is in the rightward orientation, the game ball is directed toward the second guiding port 2623. The game balls pass through the second guide port 2623, are guided to the back side of the electric distribution unit 26, enter the transparent second ball passage 2682, and flow down the second ball passage 2682. The game ball falls into the rotating body unit 28 from the downstream end of the second ball passage 2682. Since the second ball passage 2682 is also transparent, the game ball flowing down the second ball passage 2682 can be visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, when the direction changing member 2621 of the second ball direction changing section 262 is in the leftward orientation, the game ball flows down toward the lower left along the left inclined surface 262L, and then directly below the second ball direction changing section 262. reach. Directly below the second ball direction changing section 262 cannot be reached via the right, but only via the left. An out port 242 is provided directly below the second ball direction changing section 262, and the game ball that enters the out port 242 passes through a path 2604 (see FIG. 77) provided inside the electric distribution unit 26. Finally, it is discharged to the game island side.

Next, the third ball path 2603 will be explained. In FIG. 76, in order to distinguish the third ball path 2603 from the first ball path 2601 and the second ball path 2602, the third ball path 2603 is hatched downward to the left. The third ball route 2603 is a central ball route connected from the center route 125C. In addition, as described above, there are cases where a game ball enters the third ball path 2603 due to the direction changing member 2631 of the third ball direction changing section 263 in a leftward orientation, or when the game ball enters the third ball direction changing section 264. A game ball may enter due to the direction change member 2641 in the rightward orientation. This third ball path 2603 is provided with a general prize opening 227 on the upstream side, that is, on the upstream side of the position where the game ball enters by the direction changing members 2631 and 2641. The game balls that have entered this general prize opening 227 are guided to the back side of the electric distribution unit 26 and are removed from the third ball path 2603. A detailed explanation of the general winning hole 227 provided in the third ball path 2603 will be given later. Further, a production switch 269 is provided in the third ball path 2603 on the downstream side, that is, on the downstream side of the position where the game ball enters by the direction changing members 2631 and 2641. The production switch 269 is a gate-like ball detection sensor, and game balls that have flown down the third ball path 2603 without entering the general prize opening 227 on the upstream side always pass through. When the game ball passes through this performance switch 269, a certain performance is started. The game balls that have passed through the production switch 269 are discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124. The game balls discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124 are only the game balls that have passed through this third ball path 2603. That is, neither the game balls that have entered the first ball path 2601 nor the game balls that have entered the second ball path 2602 are discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124. Incidentally, instead of the effect switch 269, a general figure start opening 228 called a gate or a through chucker may be provided. In this case, the regular figure starting port 228 is provided in each of the right side area and the left side area.

The electric distribution unit 26 described above is not provided with game nails.

A part of the transparent game board 201 is interposed between the electric sorting unit 26 and the outlet 240, and a plurality of game nails 238 are provided there, although not shown in FIG. It is being Furthermore, the two general winning holes 226 mentioned above are arranged.

Next, the rotating body unit 28, only a portion of which is visible near the lower center in FIG. 75(a), will be described in detail.

FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the rotating body unit 28 seen from the back side of the game board. In FIG. 77, the back left side of the page is the front side (player side), and the right side is the back side (back side).

FIG. 77 shows a first ball passage 2681 (upstream passage 2681a and downstream passage 2681b) and a second sphere passage 2682 extending from the back side of the electric distribution unit 26 toward the rotating body unit 28. A downstream end 2682L of the second ball passage 2682 opens directly above the central portion of the rotating body unit 28. On the other hand, the downstream end 2681L of the first ball passage 2681 (downstream passage 2681b) opens directly above the outer peripheral portion of the rotating body unit 28. Further, the second ball passage 2682 is located on the back side of the first ball passage 2681.

Furthermore, the length of the second ball passage 2682 is longer than the length of the first ball passage 2681 (the combined length of the upstream passage 2681a and the downstream passage 2681b).

In addition, the first ball passage 2681 is not provided with a game nail, but the upstream passage 2681a of the first ball passage 2681 is provided with one deceleration rib r1 and the delay means d1, and the downstream passage 2681b is provided with one deceleration rib r1 and a delay means d1. , a plurality of deceleration ribs r2 are provided. The deceleration ribs r1 and r2 are ribs extending in the vertical direction and protrude into the ball passage. Further, the plurality of deceleration ribs r2 are provided alternately on the opposing walls. On the other hand, the second ball path 2682, which is longer than the first ball path 2681, is also not provided with a game nail, but is provided with one deceleration rib r3 and delay means d2. When the game ball collides with the deceleration ribs r1, r2, r3, the moving speed of the game ball decreases. The delay means d1, d2 are cylindrical sections with a diameter larger than the width of the ball passage. The lower ends of the delay means d1 and d2 are provided with openings through which game balls fall. The game ball that has reached this delay means d1 performs a circular movement along the cylindrical inner circumferential surface, and eventually falls from the opening at the lower end. The moving speed of the game ball is also reduced by the delay means d1 and d2. Considering the number of deceleration ribs, the relatively short first ball path 2681 can reduce the moving speed of the game ball more than the relatively long second ball path 2682. As a result, the time it takes from the electric distribution unit 26 to reach the rotating body unit 28 through the first ball passage 2681 and the time required to reach the rotating body unit 28 from the electric distribution unit 26 through the second sphere passage 2682 The time is getting closer.

Further, in FIG. 77, a path 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the rotating body unit 28 shown in FIG. 77. 78(a) and 78(c) are perspective views of the rotating body unit 28 when viewed diagonally from above, with the diagonally lower left side of the page being the front side (player side), and the diagonally upper right side being the rear side. (back side).

As shown in FIG. 78(a), the rotor unit 28 has a cylindrical upper cover 281, an outer guide surface 282, and a pair of ball receiving ports 2831 and 2832 arranged inside the outer guide surface 282. . A pair of ball receiving ports 2831 and 2832 are arranged at positions 180 degrees opposite each other, each having a fan-like shape, and the height of which is approximately the same as that of the upper cover 281. The rotating body unit 28 includes a motor 28M, and a rotating shaft 28A (see FIGS. 78(b) and 78(c)) rotated by the motor 28M is located at the center of the rotating body unit 28. The pair of ball receiving ports 2831 and 2832 are fixed to this rotating shaft 28A by a base plate (not shown), and when the motor 28M rotates, they rotate about the rotating shaft 28A. The base plate (not shown) is covered from above by a pair of inclined plates 2833, 2834, and when the motor 28M rotates, the pair of inclined plates 2833, 2834 also rotate together with the pair of ball receiving ports 2831, 2832. The pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 cover the center portion of the rotating body unit 28 and are inclined toward the outer circumferential side. That is, the inclined plate 2833 located on the left side shown in FIG. 78(a) is inclined downward as it goes to the left side, and the inclined plate 2834 located on the right side is inclined downward as it goes to the right side. An outer peripheral guide surface 282 is provided further below the lowest position of the pair of downwardly inclined inclined plates 2833 and 2834. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen onto the pair of inclined plates 2833, 2834 rolls on the inclined plates 2833, 2834 according to the inclination of the inclined plates 2833, 2834, and is guided to the outer peripheral guide surface 282.

FIG. 78(b) shows a state in which the cylindrical upper cover 281, a pair of ball receiving holes 2831, 2832, a base plate (not shown), and a pair of inclined plates 2833, 2834 are removed from the rotor unit 28. It is a perspective view when viewed from the front, and the front left side of the page is the front side (player side).

As shown in FIG. 78(b), the outer peripheral guide surface 282 has an opening 2821 on the front side. The outer peripheral guide surface 282 is a surface inclined downward toward the opening 2821, and the opening 2821 is at the lowest position. Further, portions 2822 and 2823 of the outer peripheral guide surface 282 near the opening 2821 have a steep inclination angle. Further, a peak portion 2824 is provided on the outer peripheral guide surface 282 at a position 180 degrees opposite the opening 2821. This mountain portion 2824 is inclined on both sides from a slightly higher position 2825. The opening 2821 is connected to the starting port side guide path 288. As explained using FIG. 75(c), the exit opening 2881 of the starting port side guideway 288 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the first special figure starting port 230 in the vertical direction. The game ball on the outer circumferential guide surface 282 rolls on the outer circumferential guide surface 282 according to the inclination of the outer circumferential guide surface 282, and enters the starting port side guide path 288 from the opening 2821. The game ball that has entered the starting port side guiding path 288 passes through the starting port side guiding path 288, is released from the exit opening 2881 of the starting port side guiding path 288, and heads toward the first special figure starting port 230. However, there are cases where the game ball released from the exit opening 2881 deviates from side to side and does not enter the first special figure starting port 230.

FIG. 78(d) is a perspective view of the rotating body unit 28 when viewed from the lower front side, and the near side in the paper is the front side (player side).

This FIG. 78(d) also shows the outlet opening 2881 of the starting port side guiding path 288. Further, FIGS. 78(b) and 78(d) also show out exhaust ports 289L and 289R provided on both sides of the starting port side guideway 288.

Further, in FIG. 78(b), after the pair of ball receiving ports 2831 and 2832, the base plate (not shown), and the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 are removed, an out discharge surface 289 connected to the out discharge ports 289L and 289R is removed. is visible. The out discharge surface 289 is a surface that slopes downward toward the out discharge ports 289L and 289R. This out discharge surface 289 is a surface provided below the outer peripheral guide surface 282 by one game ball or more. The game balls that have entered the pair of rotating ball receiving ports 2831 and 2832 fall onto this out discharge surface 289, are discharged from the out discharge ports 289L and 289R to the gaming area 124, and reach the out port 240. However, the game balls discharged from the out discharge ports 289L and 289R may very rarely enter the first special figure starting port 230. Note that it may be configured such that the game balls discharged from the out outlet 289L, 289R enter the out outlet 240 100%.

Further, FIG. 78(b) and FIG. 78(d) show a starting winning ball guide path 284 provided below the exit opening 2881 of the starting port side guide path 288. The starting winning ball guide path 284 is a path bent approximately 90 degrees downward, with an upstream end opening forward and a downstream end opening downward. The ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 passes through the starting port route 233 of the special first starting chucker 23 shown in FIG. A ball detection sensor 2841 is provided on the other end side of the starting winning ball guide path 284 to detect a ball that has entered the first special symbol starting port 230. The game ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 2841 is finally discharged to the game island side.

FIG. 78(c) shows a state in which the outer circumferential guide surface 282 and the members constituting the out discharge ports 289L and 289R (out discharge surface 289, etc.) are further removed from the rotating body unit 28 shown in FIG. 78(b). FIG. 3 is a perspective view when viewed obliquely from above.

The rotor unit 28 is entirely made of a transparent member, and the game balls rolling on the outer guide surface 282 and the game balls flowing down the out discharge surface 289 may be visible. Such a rotating body unit 28 is provided with an LED board 285 on which a plurality of LEDs 2851 are mounted. The LED board 285 is covered with a lens plate (not shown) and is provided below the out-ejection surface 289. By emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 2851, the outer peripheral guide surface 282 and the out discharge surface 289 are illuminated from below, and together with the movement of the game ball, the performance effect is enhanced.

The rotating body unit 28 described above is not provided with any game nails.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the state of the electric distribution unit 26 and the state of the rotating body unit 28.

The state of the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 79(a) is the same as the state of the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. The ball is in a rightward orientation, and the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing section is also in a rightward orientation. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first ball path 2601 passes through the first guide port 2613, flows down the first ball path 2681, and falls onto the rotating unit 28. In the rotating body unit 28 shown in FIG. 79(a), both of the pair of ball receiving ports 2831 and 2832 are not directly below the downstream end 2681L of the first ball passage 2681, but are located away from the downstream end 2681L. state. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first ball passage 2681 falls onto the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834 and is guided to the outer peripheral guide surface 282. Then, it rolls on the outer peripheral guide surface 282, passes through the opening 2821 shown in FIG. 78(b), passes through the starting port side guide path 288, is released from the exit opening 2881, and is discharged from the first opening shown in FIG. 75(c). Head to the special figure starting gate 230.

On the other hand, in the fourth ball direction changing portion of the second ball path 2602, the direction changing member 2641 is in a leftward orientation, and in the second ball direction changing portion, the direction changing member 2621 is in a rightward orientation. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second ball path 2602 passes through the second guide port 2623 and flows down the second ball path 2682 to the center of the rotating body unit 28, that is, the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834. It falls upward and is again guided by the outer peripheral guide surface 282. Then, like the game ball that entered the first ball path 2601, it passes from the opening 2821 of the outer peripheral guide surface 282 shown in FIG. Go to the first special figure starting port 230 shown in c).

The state of the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 79(b) is the same as the state of the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. is in a rightward orientation, and the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing portion is also in a rightward orientation. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first ball path 2601 passes through the first guide port 2613, flows down the first ball path 2681, and falls onto the rotating unit 28. In the rotary body unit 28 shown in FIG. 79(b), one of the ball receiving ports 2832 of the pair of ball receiving ports 2831 and 2832 rotating in a 180-degree opposing positional relationship is located at the downstream end 2681L of the first ball passage 2681. It is located directly below. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the first ball passage 2681 passes through the ball receiving port 2832 and falls onto the out discharge surface 289 shown in FIG. is discharged.

On the other hand, in the fourth ball direction changing portion of the second ball path 2602, the direction changing member 2641 is in a leftward orientation, and in the second ball direction changing portion, the direction changing member 2621 is in a rightward orientation. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second ball path 2602 passes through the second guide port 2623 and flows down the second ball path 2682 to the center of the rotating body unit 28, that is, the pair of inclined plates 2833 and 2834. It falls upward and is guided by the outer peripheral guide surface 282. Then, it passes through the opening 2821 of the outer peripheral guide surface 282 shown in FIG. 78(b), passes through the starting port side guideway 288, is released from the exit opening 2881, and heads toward the first special figure starting port 230 shown in FIG. 75(c). . In the second ball path 2602, once the game ball reaches the second ball path 2682, it always passes through the starting port side guide path 288, is released from the exit opening 2881, and heads toward the first special symbol starting port 230. It turns out. That is, it is not affected by the state of the rotating body unit 28. In this way, when the state of the electric distribution unit 26 is such that the game ball is directed toward the second ball path 2602, that is, when the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth ball direction changing section is in the leftward orientation, When the direction change member 2621 of the second ball direction change part is in the right-facing position, if the number of reservations of special figure 1 is one less than the maximum number of reservations, the reservation of special figure 1 is full. It may also be possible to notify the user of the change. For example, in the customization setting, if it is set that the above-mentioned notification is performed using the ball firing handle 134, the above-mentioned notification is performed by the ball firing handle 134 vibrating. In addition, a ball detection sensor is provided in front of the second ball path 2602, and when a game ball passes through this ball detection sensor with the number of special drawings 1 reserved being one less than the maximum number of reservations, the above-mentioned notification is sent. You may also do this.

In the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 79(c), the third ball direction changing portion in the first ball path 2601 is in a state where the direction changing member 2631 is in the rightward posture, but the first ball direction changing portion is in a state where the direction changing portion is The member 2611 is in a leftward orientation. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first ball path 2601 enters the out port 241 provided at the lower left of the first ball direction changing section 261, and enters the out port 241 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26, shown in FIG. It passes along the path 2604 shown and is finally discharged to the game island side.

Further, in the fourth ball direction changing portion in the second ball path 2602, the direction changing member 2641 is in a leftward orientation, but in the second ball direction changing portion, the direction changing member 2621 is also in a leftward orientation. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the second ball path 2602 enters the out port 242 provided directly below the second ball direction changing section, and this game ball also enters the out port 242 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26. It passes through the path 2604 and is finally discharged to the game island side.

In the electric distribution unit 26 shown in FIG. 79(d), the third ball direction changing portion in the first ball path 2601 is in a state where the direction changing member 2631 is in a leftward orientation. Therefore, the game ball leaves the first ball path 2601 and enters the third ball path 2603 in the center.

Further, in the fourth ball direction changing portion in the second ball path 2602, the direction changing member 2641 is in a rightward orientation. Therefore, the game ball leaves the second ball path 2602 and enters the third ball path 2603 in the center.

As described above, the game ball that has entered the third ball path 2603 passes through the production switch 269 shown in FIG. 76 and is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124.

Note that a plurality of deceleration ribs 26r1 protruding forward are provided in the first ball path 2601, the second ball path 2602, and the third ball path 2603. Further, in the downstream vertical portion of the third ball path 2603, deceleration ribs 26r2 protruding in the left-right direction are alternately arranged.

Furthermore, the distance from the fourth ball direction changing part (direction changing member 2641) to the third ball path 2603 is longer than the distance from the third ball direction changing part (direction changing member 2631) to the third ball path 2603 (see arrow 3d). (see arrow 4d) is longer. By varying the distances in this way, the time it takes for the game ball to head to the third ball path 2603 and the manner of rolling can be changed between the third ball direction changing part (direction changing member 2631) and the fourth ball direction changing part (direction changing member 2631). You can enjoy each of the two ball direction changing parts such as member 2641). Note that the distance from the fourth ball direction changing part (direction changing member 2641) to the third ball path 2603 is longer than the distance from the third ball direction changing part (direction changing member 2631) to the third ball path 2603 (see arrow 3d). The distance (see arrow 4d) may be shorter. That is, the distance from the third ball direction changing part (direction changing member 2631) to the third ball path 2603 (see arrow 3d), and the distance from the fourth ball direction changing part (direction changing member 2641) to the third ball path 2603. It is sufficient if the distances (see arrow 4d) are different.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the flow of the game ball as a result of hitting left-handed.

Below, although some of the explanations may overlap with the previous explanations, I will summarize the previous explanations and explain them once again.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state). When the game ball is hit to the left, the game ball enters the first area 1241 or the second area 1242. In the positional relationship between the first area 1241 and the second area 1242, if you fire with a relatively strong firing intensity, you can aim at the first area 1241, and if you fire with a relatively weak firing intensity, you can aim at the second area 1241. You can aim for. However, even if the game ball is fired with a relatively strong firing intensity, the game ball may bounce off the wall 1241a (see FIG. 76) that partitions the first area 1241 and enter the second area 1242. obtain. Note that even if you intend to hit the ball right-handed, you may end up hitting the ball left-handed due to insufficient firing strength, or even if you intend to hit the ball left-handed, the firing strength may be too strong and you end up hitting the right-handed ball.

A game ball that has entered the first area 1241 will proceed to the end on the right route 125R in the front area 125, enter the left route 125L from the middle of the right route 125R, and enter the center route 125C from the middle of the right route 125R. There are cases where it gets into the. In addition, the game ball that has entered the second area 1242 will proceed to the end on the left route 125L in the distribution front area 125, enter the right route 125R from the middle of the left route 125L, and enter the right route 125R from the middle of the left route 125L to the center. There are cases where it enters route 125C.

When the game ball advances on the right route 125R, it enters the first ball path 2601 of the electric distribution unit 26, and at the third ball direction changing section 263, the game ball is directed toward the first ball direction changing section 261. or directed to the third ball path 2603. When the game ball is directed to the first ball direction changing section 261, the game ball still follows the first ball path 2601, and in the first ball direction changing section 261, the game ball is directed to the first ball path 2681. Or, it is directed toward the out port 241. The first ball direction changing section 261 can also be seen as means (first sorting means) for distributing game balls into the right direction (direction of the first ball path 2681) and the left direction (direction of the out port 241). When the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681, the game ball is directed to the first special figure starting port 230 or to the out port 240 in the rotating body unit 28.

When the game ball advances on the left route 125L, it enters the second ball path 2602 of the electric distribution unit 26, and at the fourth ball direction changing section 264, the game ball is directed toward the second ball direction changing section 262. or directed to the third ball path 2603. When the game ball is directed to the second ball direction changing section 262, the game ball still follows the second ball path 2602, and in the second ball direction changing section 262, the game ball is directed to the second ball path 2682. Or, it is directed toward the out port 242. The second ball direction changing section 262 can also be seen as means (second sorting means) for distributing game balls into the right direction (the direction of the second ball path 2682) and the left direction (the direction of the out port 242). When the game ball is directed toward the second ball passage 2682, the game ball is directed toward the first special figure starting port 230 in the rotating body unit 28.

In the rotating body unit 28, even if the game ball is directed towards the first special figure starting port 230, the game ball does not necessarily win the first special figure starting port 230, and the first special figure starting port In some cases, it may come off the starting port 230 and reach the out port 240.

When the game ball advances along the central route 125C, it may enter the third ball path 2603 of the electric distribution unit 26 and win a prize in the general winning slot 227. If the game ball does not win in the general winning slot 227, the game ball advances along the third ball path 2603 and passes through the performance switch 269. Further, even if the game ball is directed to the third ball path 2603 in the third ball direction changing section 263, the game ball is directed to the third ball path 2603 in the fourth ball direction changing section 264. Even if there is, the game ball advances along the third ball path 2603 and passes through the production switch 269. The game balls that have passed through the production switch 269 are discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124. The game ball discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the gaming area 124 may win in either of the two general winning holes 226, 226, and if it does not win in either of the general winning holes 226, The output port 240 is reached. Here, although the electric distribution unit 26 had only one general winning opening 227, after passing through the electric distribution unit 26, there were two general winning openings 226, 226, considering the number of general winning openings. It can be said that the probability of winning a prize in the general prize opening is higher after passing through the electric distribution unit 26. The number of prize balls is the same whether it is the general winning hole 227 in the electric distribution unit 26 or the two general winning holes 226 after passing through the electric distribution unit 26.

In addition, when the game ball advances on the first ball path 2601, at the stage of falling to the rotating body unit 28, the game ball is directed to the first special figure starting port 230 or to the out port 240. . The rotating body unit 28 uses a pair of rotating ball receiving ports 2831 to transport game balls in the direction of the starting port side guide path 288 (direction of the first special figure starting port 230) and the direction of the out discharge surface 289 (direction of the out port 240). It can also be seen as a means for distributing game balls in the direction of the starting port side guideway 288 (direction of the first special figure starting port 230), and a state in which the direction of movement of the game ball is directed toward the starting port side guide path 288 (direction of the first special figure starting port 230) It can also be seen as a ball direction changing means that can be changed to a state in which the ball is directed in the direction (direction of the out port 240). On the other hand, when the game ball advances on the second ball path 2602, the game ball is always directed toward the first special figure starting port 230. However, when the game ball follows the second ball path 2602, there is a lower possibility that the game ball will reach the rotating body unit 28 than when the game ball follows the first ball path 2601. For example, when a game ball advances on the first ball path 2601, at the stage of falling to the rotating body unit 28, the game ball has a 50% probability of being directed toward the first special symbol starting port 230; is directed to the output port 240 with a probability of . On the other hand, in the first ball direction changing section 261 in the first ball path 2601, the game ball is directed toward the first ball path 2681 with a probability of 50%, and directed toward the out port 241 with a probability of 50%. Therefore, when the game ball advances on the first ball path 2601, the game ball will be directed to the first special symbol starting port 230 with a probability of 25%. On the other hand, when the game ball advances on the second ball path 2602, if it reaches the rotating body unit 28, the game ball is directed toward the first special symbol starting port 230 with a probability of 100%. However, in the second ball direction changing section 262 in the second ball path 2602, the game ball is directed toward the second ball path 2682 with a probability of 25%, and directed toward the out port 242 with a probability of 75%. Therefore, even when the game ball advances on the second ball path 2602, the game ball will be directed toward the first special symbol starting port 230 with a probability of 25%. In other words, whether the game ball travels along the first ball path 2601 or the second ball path 2602, the probability that the game ball will be directed toward the first special symbol starting port 230 is the same. . However, if we look only at the rotating body unit 28, as mentioned above, the game ball that has passed through the second ball direction changing section 262 is more likely to pass through the starting hole than the game ball that has passed through the first ball direction changing section 261. It is easy to be guided to the side taxiway 288. In this example, the third ball direction changing section 263 upstream of the first ball direction changing section 261 determines the probability of directing the game ball to the first ball direction changing section 261 and the probability that the third ball direction changing section 263 upstream of the second ball direction changing section 262 directs the game ball to the first ball direction changing section 261. The probability that the fourth ball direction changing section 264 directs the game ball toward the second ball direction changing section 262 is the same. In the electric distribution unit 26, the motor of each direction change member is controlled so that the probability described above is achieved per unit time (while the random number table prepared in advance makes one round). According to the example explained above, even if the game ball enters the first area 1241, the game ball does not necessarily follow the first ball path 2601, and even if the game ball enters the second area 1242, the game ball does not necessarily advance along the first ball path 2601. Although the ball does not necessarily follow the second ball path 2602, by aiming at the first area 1241, the game ball can reach the rotating body unit 28 with a relatively high probability, but the first special figure start The probability of winning 230 points is relatively low. On the other hand, by aiming at the second area 1242, the game ball can only reach the rotating body unit 28 with a relatively low probability, but if it reaches the rotating body unit 28, it will reach the first special figure starting port 230. The probability of winning is relatively high. The player can enjoy selecting which area to aim for, either the first area 1241 or the second area 1242. Moreover, the game balls that have entered the first area 1241 and the game balls that have entered the second area 1242 are visible to the player until they reach the electric distribution unit 26 or the back side of the game board 201. You can enjoy watching it roll.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of a game explanation displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 81 shows the decorative pattern display device 208 from (a) to (f). In each decorative pattern display device 208, a combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" is displayed as a mini pattern at the upper left of the display area. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 2081 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. Furthermore, the control state (gaming state) here is a normal gaming state (normal pattern low probability state), and each decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "left-handed hit" at the upper center, and We encourage you to strike. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, a reserved icon display area 2082 for the special drawing 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 2081. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 in the normal game state, the display area of the reserved icon of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 2802, hold icons h11 and h12 representing the hold of the special figure 1 are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(a), a diagram showing a first area 1241 and a second area 1242 is displayed at the bottom right of the display screen, and when a game ball is hit to the left, the two areas where the game ball flows down are displayed. It introduces that there are two routes. Specifically, these two routes include a route such as the first region 1241 → right route 125R → first ball path 2601 → third ball direction changing part 263 → first ball direction changing part 261 (hereinafter referred to as "first route"). ), and the route such as second area 1242 → left route 125L → second ball path 2602 → fourth ball direction changing part 264 → second ball direction changing part 262 (hereinafter referred to as "second route"). Become.

Also in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(b), a diagram representing the first area 1241 and the second area 1242 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and which area of the first area 1241 or the second area 1242 is displayed. It is explained that there is no difference in the profits of the players even if they aim for the same. That is, as described above, whether the game ball travels along the first ball path 2601 or the second ball path 2602, the probability that the game ball is directed toward the first special symbol starting port 230 is explains that they are the same.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(c), a diagram representing the rotating body unit 28 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and an explanation of the rotating body unit 28 is displayed. In other words, when the game ball reaches the rotary body unit 28, the first special figure starting port is more likely to be reached via the second ball route 2602 (second route) than via the first ball route 2601 (first route). It is explained that the chances of winning 230 will be doubled. As mentioned above, in the first route, the game ball is guided to the starting port side guideway 288 only with a 50% probability, and in the second route, the game ball is guided to the starting port side guideway 288 with a 100% probability. be done. In addition, even if you are guided to the starting entrance side taxiway 288, it does not necessarily mean that you will win at the first special drawing starting opening 230, and in rare cases, you will deviate from the first special drawing starting opening 230 and reach the out exit 240. In some cases.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(d), a diagram representing a first area 1241 and a second area 1242 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and the first area 1241 is surrounded by a line. As an explanation about the first area 1241, it is displayed that if the player aims to make the game ball reach the rotating body unit 28, he should aim at the first area 1241. In FIG. 81(d), only an explanatory display regarding the first area 1241 is displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(e), a diagram representing the first area 1241 and the second area 1242 is displayed at the bottom right of the display screen, and the second area 1242 is surrounded by a line. . Then, as an explanation about the second area 1242, it is displayed that if you aim to win the first special symbol starting hole 230, you should aim at this second area 1242. In FIG. 81(e), only an explanatory display regarding the second area 1242 is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(f), a diagram showing the first area 1241 and the second area 1242 is also displayed at the lower right of the display screen. In this decorative pattern display device 208, the most detailed explanation display is displayed for the first area 1241 (first route) and the second area 1242 (second route).

The explanation display described above may be displayed only when there are no special drawings on hold (for example, during demonstration display). Alternatively, the explanation display may also be displayed during the jackpot game. For example, an explanation display may be displayed during the ending performance of a jackpot game. Further, the explanation display may be displayed not only during the ending effect during the jackpot game but also at a relatively convenient time.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing another example of the game explanation displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

The explanatory display explained using FIG. 81 is an example in which the symbol variation of the special symbol is performed while the display is stopped, but the example shown in FIG. 82 is an example that is performed during the symbol variation of the special symbol.

The control state (gaming state) in FIGS. 82(a) to 82(c) is a normal gaming state (normal pattern low probability state). characters are displayed.

In FIG. 82(a), the symbol of the special pattern is changing, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the changing display of the decorative pattern in a large size in the center of the screen, and also displays the mini pattern that is changing in the upper left. . Further, a variable icon h10 is displayed in the variable icon display area 2081. In this example, the detailed explanation display explained using FIG. 81(f) is displayed as a ticker-like display 2083 in which characters flow toward the left on top of the fluctuating display of decorative patterns displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. is displayed.

In FIG. 82(b), the symbol variation of the special pattern that was performed in FIG. 82(a) has ended, and the combination of decorative symbols "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen. . Further, at the upper left of the display area, a combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" is also displayed as a mini pattern. Note that the display of the fluctuation icon h10 has disappeared. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(b) displays a continuation of the explanatory display displayed in FIG. 82(a). That is, the telop-like display 2083 is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 82(c), the symbol variation of the special symbol has started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(c), a variable display of decorative patterns is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and a mini pattern that is changing is also displayed in the upper left. Further, the pending icon is displayed in a shifted manner, and the variable icon h10 is displayed in the variable icon display area 2081. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(c) displays a continuation of the explanation display displayed in FIG. 82(b). That is, the telop-like display 2083 is continuously displayed.

As explained above, the explanation display (tutorial display) may continue to be displayed even if the symbol is changing or the symbol is stopped across multiple fluctuations.

The control state (gaming state) in FIGS. 82(d) to 82(f) is also a normal gaming state (normal pattern low probability state). characters are displayed.

In FIG. 82(d), the symbol of the special pattern is changing, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the changing display of the decorative pattern in a large size in the center of the screen, and also displays the mini pattern that is changing in the upper left. . Further, a variable icon h10 is displayed in the variable icon display area 2081. In this example, the conversation preview 2084 is started while the symbols are changing. The conversation preview 2084 is a type of advance preview, and the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the characters appearing. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(d), a princess character with the second highest jackpot reliability appears, and normally the word "chance" is displayed, but here, The explanatory display described using FIG. 81(a) is displayed instead.

In FIG. 82(e), the symbol variation of the special pattern that was performed in FIG. 82(a) has ended, and the combination of decorative symbols "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen. . Further, at the upper left of the display area, a combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" is also displayed as a mini pattern. Note that the display of the fluctuation icon h10 has disappeared. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(e), the conversation preview 2084 has disappeared and the explanation display has also disappeared.

In FIG. 82(f), the symbol variation of the special symbol has started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(f), a variable display of decorative patterns is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and a mini pattern that is changing is also displayed in the upper left. Further, the pending icon is displayed in a shifted manner, and the variable icon h10 is displayed in the variable icon display area 2081. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(f), the character of the lord with the highest reliability of winning the jackpot appears, and normally the characters "It's extremely hot" are displayed, but here , the explanation display explained using FIG. 81(e) is displayed instead.

As explained above, the explanation display may be displayed as part of the conversation preview. Furthermore, the conversation preview may be a preview of a symbol change display that is currently being performed, instead of a pre-read preview. Further, the form of the preview in which the explanation is displayed is not limited to the conversational preview, but may be a step-up notice, a cut-in notice, or the like.

Next, a modification of the means for changing the movement of game balls will be described, centering on the electric distribution unit 26 described above. In the following description, components having the same names as those described above will be described with the same reference numerals used up until now.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a first modification of the example shown in FIG. 80. Here, differences from the example shown in FIG. 80 will be mainly explained, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 83, the distribution front region 125 where the game nail 238 is provided is removed from the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. Therefore, the first ball path 2601 of the electric distribution unit 26 is connected from the first area 1241 without branching, and the game ball that enters the first area 1241 is connected to the first ball path 2601 of the electric distribution unit 26. The route 2601 will definitely be followed. In addition, the second area 1242 is connected to the second ball path 2602 of the electric distribution unit 26 without branching, and the game ball that enters the second area 1242 is routed through the second ball path 2602 of the electric distribution unit 26. It will definitely proceed to 2602.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 83, the third ball direction changing section 263 and the fourth ball direction changing section 264 are also removed, and the third ball path 2603 is also eliminated. Therefore, the first ball direction changing section 261 and the second ball direction changing section 262 are provided side by side. Further, the game ball that has entered the first region 1241 is directed to the first ball path 2681 or to the out port 241 in the first ball direction changing section 261. The game ball that has entered the second region 1242 is directed to the second ball passage 2682 or to the out port 242 in the second ball direction changing section 262.

Even with the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 83, in the first ball direction changing section 261, the game ball is directed toward the first ball path 2681 with a 50% probability, and with a 50% probability directed towards. The game ball flowing down the first ball passage 2681 is directed toward the first special figure starting port 230 with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, in the second ball direction changing section 262, the game ball is directed toward the second ball path 2682 with a probability of 25%, and directed toward the outlet 242 with a probability of 75%. The game ball flowing down the second ball passage 2682 is directed toward the first special figure starting port 230 with a probability of 100%. Therefore, even with the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 83, whether the game ball travels along the first ball path 2601 or the second ball path 2602, the game ball The probability of being directed to the first special figure starting port 230 is the same (25%). The means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 83 has a simpler configuration than the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 80, and the flow of the game ball is easier for the player to understand. Note that even in the first modification example shown in FIG. 83, even if the game ball is directed toward the first special figure starting port 230 in the rotating body unit 28, the game ball is It is not always possible to win a prize, and there are cases where the prize is missed from the first special symbol start opening 230 and reaches the out opening 240.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a second modification of the example shown in FIG. 80. Here again, the explanation will focus on the differences from the example shown in FIG. 80, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

In the second modified example shown in FIG. 84, there is a distribution front area 125, and the game ball that has entered the first area 1241 may proceed on the right route 125R to the end, or on the left route 125L or the center route 125C from the middle. It may get in. Furthermore, the game ball that has entered the second area 1242 may proceed along the left route 125L to the end, or may enter the right route 125R or the center route 125C from the middle.

When the game ball advances along the central route 125C, the game ball enters the third ball path 2603 of the electric distribution unit 26 and may win in the general winning slot 227. If the game ball does not win in the general winning slot 227, the game ball advances along the third ball path 2603, passes through the performance switch 269, and is then discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124.

Furthermore, in the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 84, the first ball direction changing section 261 and the second ball direction changing section 262 are removed from the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. ing.

When the game ball advances on the right route 125R, the game ball is directed to the first ball path 2681 or the third ball path 2603 in the third ball direction changing section 263 of the electric distribution unit 26. . When the game ball is directed to the first ball passage 2681, the game ball is directed to the first special figure starting port 230 or to the out port 240 in the rotating body unit 28.

When the game ball advances on the left route 125L, the game ball is directed to the second ball path 2682 or the third ball path 2603 in the fourth ball direction changing section 264 of the electric distribution unit 26. . When the game ball is directed toward the second ball passage 2682, the game ball is directed toward the first special figure starting port 230 in the rotating body unit 28.

In the third ball direction changing section 263 or the fourth ball direction changing section 264, the game ball directed toward the third ball path 2603 is moved from the middle of the third ball path 2603 (downstream side of the general prize opening 227) to the third ball direction changing section 264. After flowing down the ball path 2603 and passing through the production switch 269, it is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26 to the game area 124.

In the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 84, in the third ball direction changing section 263, the game ball is directed toward the first ball path 2681 with a 50% probability, and the third ball is directed with a 50% probability. Directed to route 2603. The game ball flowing down the first ball passage 2681 is directed toward the first special figure starting port 230 with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, in the fourth ball direction changing unit 264, the game ball is directed toward the second ball path 2682 with a probability of 25%, and directed toward the third ball path 2603 with a probability of 75%. The game ball flowing down the second ball passage 2682 is directed toward the first special figure starting port 230 with a probability of 100%. Therefore, even with the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 84, whether the game ball travels along the first ball path 2601 or the second ball path 2602, the game ball The probability of being directed to the first special figure starting port 230 is the same (25%). The means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 84 is similar to the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. 83, and has a different structure compared to the means for changing the movement of the game ball shown in FIG. It is simple and the flow of game balls is easier for players to understand. Note that even in the second modification example shown in FIG. 84, even if the game ball is directed toward the first special pattern starting port 230 in the rotary body unit 28, the game ball is directed to the first special pattern starting port 230. It is not always possible to win a prize, and there are cases where the prize is missed from the first special symbol start opening 230 and reaches the out opening 240.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a modification of the third ball direction changing section 263 and the first ball direction changing section 261.

The direction changing member 2631 of the third ball direction changing section 263 and the direction changing member 2611 of the first ball direction changing section 261 shown in FIG. 85(a) are both replaced with a fixing member made of resin. This resin fixing member is also provided with right inclined surfaces 263R, 261R and left inclined surfaces 263L, 261L, respectively. The direction changing members 2631 and 2611 shown in FIG. 85(a) are fixedly arranged rather than rotating, but the right inclined surfaces 263R and 261R shown in FIG. 85(a) are always inclined toward the lower right. The left inclined surfaces 263L and 261L are always inclined toward the lower left. The game ball is directed leftward or rightward depending on how it hits the direction changing members 2631, 2611.

Both the direction change member 2631 of the third ball direction change part 263 and the direction change member 2611 of the first ball direction change part 261 shown in FIG. 85(b) are replaced with three game nails made of resin. These three game nails 239 made of resin are integrally molded with the base plates 2632, 2612 of the direction change members 2631, 2611. Therefore, the angle of the game nail cannot be adjusted. The three game nails 239 are located at the vertices of the triangle, and the game ball is directed leftward or rightward depending on how it hits these three game nails 239.

Note that metal game nails may be used instead of resin game nails.

Further, the direction changing members explained using FIG. 85 were those of the third ball direction changing part 263 and the first ball direction changing part 261, but the fourth ball direction changing part 264 and the second ball direction changing part 262 may be used.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example in which the distribution front area 125 has been changed. The changes will be mainly explained below.

In the distribution front region 125 shown in FIG. 86, a first center route 125C1 and a second center route 125C2 are prepared in addition to a right route 125R and a left route 125L. The right route 125R branches into a first central route 125C1, and the left route 125L branches into a second central route 125C2. However, the first central route 125C1 and the second central route 125C2 are not connected in the middle, and the game ball that had passed through the right route 125R never entered the left route 125L or passed through the left route 125L. There is no case where the game ball enters the right route 125R.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 86, the ball passage 1245 is connected to the right route 125R, and the second region 1242 is connected to the left route 125L. Further, the right route 125R is connected to a first ball route 2601, and the left route 125L is connected to a second ball route 2602. The first central route 125C1 is connected to the third ball path 2603, and the second central route 125C2 is connected to the fourth ball path 2605. It should be noted that a general winning hole 227 is also provided in the fourth ball path 2605. The fourth ball path 2605 joins the third ball path 2603 at a location where the fourth ball direction changing section 264 is provided. That is, the game ball directed to the right by the fourth ball direction changing unit 264 enters the third ball path 2603, and the game ball that has passed through the fourth ball path 2605 also enters the third ball path 2603, The game ball directed to the left by the ball direction changing unit 263 also enters the third ball path 2603.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example in which the upstream portion of the third ball path 2603 in the electric distribution unit 26 has been changed. The changes will be mainly explained below.

The third ball route 2603 shown in FIG. 87 includes a winning route 2603W that enters the general winning opening 227, a left detour route 2603L that does not enter the general winning opening 227 and flows down the left side of the general winning opening 227, and a general winning opening. 227 is provided with a right detour route 2603R that flows down the right side of the general winning opening 227 without winning. The prize-winning route 2603W is an easy route to follow if approached straight from the central route 125C.

Further, although the first ball path 2601 and the second ball path 2602 were provided side by side with the third ball path 2603 in between, they may be provided so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

In the above description,
"A first ball direction changing means for changing the moving direction of the game ball [for example, the first ball direction changing section 261 shown in FIG. 83],
a second ball direction changing means for changing the moving direction of the game ball [for example, the second ball direction changing unit 262 shown in FIG. 83];
Equipped with
The first ball direction changing means moves the game ball along a first route [for example, the route toward the out port (here, the out port 241) or the route along the route 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26]. means that can change the direction to the first state [for example, the state in which the direction changing member 2611 is facing left],
The first ball direction changing means directs the game ball to a second route [for example, a route toward the guide port (here, the first guide port 2613) or a route passing through the starting port side guide path 288]. means that can change the state [for example, the state in which the direction change member 2611 is facing right],
The second ball direction changing means moves the game ball along the first route [for example, the route toward the out port (here, the out port 242) or the route along the route 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26. ] is a means capable of changing to a second state [for example, a state in which the direction changing member 2621 is in a leftward orientation],
The second ball direction changing means directs the game ball to the second route [for example, the route toward the guiding port (here, the second guiding port 2623) or the route passing through the starting port side guiding path 288]. It is a means that can change to the fourth state [for example, the state in which the direction change member 2621 is facing to the right].
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

Since there is a possibility that the game ball will pass through either of the two routes toward either of the two ball direction changing means, the player should not be able to see the rolling state of the game ball that is changed by each ball direction changing means. Even if one of the ball direction changing means is dirty and it is difficult for the game ball to go to the desired route, the player can play the game with the expectation that the game ball will go to the other ball direction changing means.

Note that the first route may be a route extending from the exit to the back side of the game board. This first route may be a route that is invisible to the player.

Further, the second route may be a route (first ball passage 2681, second ball passage 2682) toward the fifth ball direction changing means (for example, the rotating body unit 28). Alternatively, the second route may be a route toward the winning means. This second route may be a route at least partially visible to the player. Note that if the player passes through the second route, he/she will definitely win in the winning means, or even if he/she passes through the second route, he/she may not win in the winning means.

Also,
``The second route is a route where the player is more likely to have an advantage as the game ball passes than the first route [for example, the player can win prize balls, or can win more prize balls] , can get a starting prize, etc.],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first route is a route toward the outlet [for example, the outlet 241, 242],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first route may be a route extending from the outlet (for example, the outlet 241, 242).

Also,
``The second route is a route toward the winning area [e.g., the first special figure starting gate 230].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In addition, the game nail [for example, the metal game nail 238] does not need to be provided between the second route and the prize entry area.

Also,
"The first ball direction changing means and the second ball direction changing means are provided side by side,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“A firing means [e.g., firing device 110],
a first region provided upstream of the first ball direction changing means [for example, the first region 1241 shown in FIG. 83];
a second region provided upstream of the second ball direction changing means [for example, the second region 1242 shown in FIG. 83];
Equipped with
The first ball direction changing means is a means for the game ball to reach after passing through the first area,
The second ball direction changing means is a means for the game ball to reach after passing through the second area,
The firing means is capable of firing a game ball into either the first area or the second area;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

It becomes possible for a player to play a game by firing a game ball with the aim of passing the game ball through a ball direction changing means of his choice, or to play a game by appropriately changing the ball direction changing means aimed at during the game. .

Note that the first ball direction changing means may be a means by which the game ball that passes through the first area always reaches the ball.

Further, the second ball direction changing means may be a means by which the game ball that passes through the second area always reaches the ball.

Also,
“No game nail [for example, metal game nail 238] is provided between the first region and the first ball direction changing means,
A game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238] is not provided between the second region and the second ball direction changing means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``In the case where the game ball is directed to the second route [for example, the route passing through the starting port side guideway 288], and when the game ball is directed to the second route [for example, the route passing through the out-ejection surface] a fifth ball direction changing means [for example, the rotary body unit 28] that may direct the game ball to the route passing through 289;
a first ball passage [for example, first ball passage 2681] through which the game ball directed to the second route by the first ball direction changing means flows down toward the fifth ball direction changing means;
a second ball path [e.g., second ball path 2682] through which the game ball directed to the second route by the second ball direction changing device flows down toward the fifth ball direction changing device;
A game machine characterized by being equipped with. ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first ball passage is not provided with a game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238],
The second ball passage is also not provided with a game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238],
A game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238] is not provided between the first ball path and the fifth ball direction changing means,
A game nail [for example, a metal game nail 238] is not provided between the second ball path and the fifth ball direction changing means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A first ball direction changing unit that changes the moving direction of the game ball [for example, the first ball direction changing unit 261],
a second ball direction changing means for changing the moving direction of the game ball [e.g., second ball direction changing section 262];
Equipped with
The first ball direction changing means directs the game ball to a second route [for example, a route toward the guide port (here, the first guide port 2613) or a route passing through the starting port side guide path 288]. means that can be changed by a first percentage [e.g., 50%];
The second ball direction changing means directs the game ball toward the second route [for example, the route toward the guiding port (here, the second guiding port 2623) or the route passing through the starting port side guiding path 288]. means that can be changed by a second percentage [e.g., 25%],
The first ratio is higher than the second ratio,
The second route [for example, the route toward the guide port or the route passing through the starting port side guide path 288] is the game ball that passes through the first ball direction changing means [for example, the route toward the starting port side with a 50% probability. The game ball that passes through the second ball direction changing means [for example, passes through the route that passes through the starting port side guideway 288 with a 100% probability] than the game ball that passes through the route that passes through the guiding path 288]. It is an easy route,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

The player can enjoy watching the rolling behavior of the game ball changed by each ball direction changing means, and even if one ball direction changing means is dirty and the game ball is difficult to go to the desired route, the game ball can be moved to the other ball direction changing means. You can play the game with the expectation that the game ball will go towards you.

In addition, in the above-mentioned game machine, a game ball that goes to the second route via the second ball direction changing means goes to the second route via the first ball direction changing means. It is configured so that it passes through the second route more easily than the ball.

The second route may be a route (first ball passage 2681, second ball passage 2682) toward the fifth ball direction changing means (for example, the rotating body unit 28).

Further, a third ball direction changing means [e.g., third ball direction changing section 263] provided upstream of the first ball direction changing means is provided, and the first ball direction changing means [e.g. The first ball direction changing section 261] may be a means through which the game ball that has passed through the third ball direction changing means may pass. Further, a fourth ball direction changing means [e.g., fourth ball direction changing section 264] provided upstream of the second ball direction changing means is provided, and the second ball direction changing means [e.g. The second ball direction changing section 262] may be a means through which the game ball that has passed through the fourth ball direction changing means may pass. Furthermore, the first ball direction changing means is a means that does not allow the game ball to pass through the fourth ball direction changing means, and the second ball direction changing means is a means for preventing the game ball from passing through the fourth ball direction changing means. It may be a means in which the game ball that has passed through the direction changing means does not pass therethrough.

Also,
``The distance from the first ball direction changing means to the second route [for example, the distance including the length of the first ball path 2681] and from the second ball direction changing means to the second route. The distance [for example, the distance including the length of the second ball passage 2682] is different [for example, it differs because the second ball passage 2682 is longer than the first ball passage 2681],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

You can enjoy the time it takes for the game ball to go to the second route and how it rolls for each of the two ball direction changing means.

Also,
"A first delay means that is provided between the first ball direction changing means and the second route and is capable of slowing down the moving speed of the game ball [for example, one deceleration rib R1 and a delay means" means d1 and a plurality of reduction ribs r2];
A second delay means that is provided between the second ball direction changing means and the second route and is capable of slowing down the moving speed of the game ball [for example, one deceleration rib R3 and the delay means] d2] and
Equipped with
the number of the first delay means and the number of the second delay means are different;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“When the game ball is directed to the second route [for example, the route passing through the starting port side guideway 288], and when the game ball is directed to a route other than the second route [for example, the route passing through the out discharge surface 289] A fifth ball direction changing means [for example, the rotating body unit 28] that may direct the ball,
The fifth ball direction changing means directs the game ball that has passed through the first ball direction changing means [for example, the first ball direction changing section 261] to the second route [for example, the game ball If the game ball falls onto the pair of inclined plates 2833, 2834], or if the ball is directed to a route other than the second route [for example, if the game ball falls into the ball receiving openings 2831, 2832], there may be a certain method. be,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The fifth ball direction changing means is a means for directing the game ball that has passed through the second ball direction changing means [for example, the second ball direction changing section 262] to the second route. Good too.

Further, the guiding means (for example, the rotary body unit 28) is provided for guiding the game ball to the second route and for guiding the game ball to a route other than the second route, and the guiding means may be a means for guiding the game ball that has passed through the first ball direction changing means to the second route or to a route other than the second route. . Furthermore, the guiding means may be a means for guiding the game ball that has passed through the second ball direction changing means to the second route.

Also,
``The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
A game machine comprising a second detection means [for example, a ball detection sensor 2841 shown in FIG. 78(d)] capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the second route. ”
Also explained.

You can enjoy the way the game ball rolls toward the second detection means.

Further, even if the first ball direction changing means is in a state where the game ball is directed to the second route, the game ball does not always pass through the second route, and the second detection By providing a means, it may be possible to notify the player of the passage of the game ball through the second route (for example, payout of a prize ball due to winning or output of a payout sound).

Also,
“The first ball direction changing means moves the game ball along a first route [for example, a route toward the out port (here, the out port 241) or a route along a route 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26. ] [For example, the direction change member 2611 shown in FIG. 79(c) is in a leftward orientation].
The second detection means is a means that cannot detect the game ball that has passed through the first route.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

If a special ball (ball with string, ball with oil, small ball, etc.) for the purpose of cheating passes through the first route, the special ball will not be detected by the second detection means. In some cases, evidence of fraudulent activity can be easily confirmed when inspecting the gaming machine due to scratches or dirt in the area after passing through the first route.

Note that the second route may be a route in which the player is more likely to have an advantage as the game ball passes than the first route.

Further, the embodiment may include a first detection means [for example, an out sensor] capable of detecting the game ball that has passed through the first route, and further, the first detection means may be configured to detect the game ball that has passed through the first route. It may be possible to use means that makes it impossible to detect game balls that have passed through this route. By doing this, if a special ball (ball with string, ball with oil, small ball, etc.) for the purpose of cheating passes through the second route, the special ball will be detected by the first detection means. Since this is not detected, evidence of fraudulent activity may be easily confirmed when inspecting the game machine due to scratches or dirt in the area after passing through the second route. Note that the first detection means may be provided at the exit end of the path 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26, or may be provided at the gutter where out balls gather on the back side of the game board 200. It may be something that has been given.

Also,
``When the first ball direction changing means is in a state of directing the game ball toward the second route, and the second ball direction changing means is also in a state of directing the game ball toward the second route. There is [for example, FIGS. 79(a), (b), (d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Regardless of which ball direction changing means the game ball passes through, it may be possible to direct the game ball to the second route.

Note that at a certain first timing, the state of the first ball direction changing means and the state of the second ball direction changing means may become a state that directs the game ball toward the second route. .

Also,
“A firing means [e.g., firing device 110],
a first region [e.g., first region 1241] provided upstream of the first ball direction changing means;
a second region [e.g., second region 1242] provided upstream of the second ball direction changing means;
Equipped with
The first ball direction changing means is a means that the game ball that has passed through the first area may reach,
The second ball direction changing means is a means that the game ball that has passed through the second area may reach,
The firing means is capable of firing a game ball into either the first area or the second area;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

It becomes possible for a player to play a game by firing a game ball with the aim of passing the game ball through a ball direction changing means of his choice, or to play a game by appropriately changing the ball direction changing means aimed at during the game. .

Also,
``There is a case where the game ball that has passed through the first area does not reach either the first ball direction changing means or the second ball direction changing means [for example, when it passes through the third ball path 2603]. It is configured as follows,
There may be a case where the game ball that has passed through the second area does not reach either the first ball direction changing means or the second ball direction changing means [for example, when it passes through the third ball path 2603]. is composed of
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A third ball direction changing means for changing the moving direction of the game ball [for example, the third ball direction changing unit 263],
a fourth ball direction changing means for changing the moving direction of the game ball [for example, the fourth ball direction changing unit 264];
A fourth route through which the game ball can pass [for example, central route 125C],
Equipped with
The third ball direction changing means directs the game ball to a third route [for example, a route downstream of the general prize opening 227 of the third ball path 2603] [for example, in FIG. 79(d) ) is a means capable of changing the state of the direction changing member 2631 shown in
The fourth ball direction changing means is a means that can change the state of directing the game ball toward the third route [for example, the state of the direction changing member 2641 shown in FIG. 79(d)],
The fourth route is a route through which the game ball can pass without passing through any of the third ball direction changing means and the fourth ball direction changing means,
The game machine characterized in that the third route is a route that can be reached by a game ball that has passed through the fourth route. ”
explained.

Since the game ball heads to the third route regardless of whether or not it passes through either of the two ball direction changing means, the way the game ball rolls up to the third route is controlled by each ball direction changing means. In some cases, the player can enjoy watching the game ball change, and in some cases, the player can also enjoy watching the rolling behavior of the game ball that does not go through each ball direction changing means.

Also,
“The third route is a route in which there are cases where the game ball that has passed through the fourth route does not arrive [for example, when it enters the general winning slot 227].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

There are cases where you can enjoy the way the game ball rolls after passing through the fourth route.

Also,
``Equipped with an entrance [for example, general prize opening 227] provided between the fourth route and the third route,
The game ball that has passed through the fourth route may enter the entrance.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

There are cases where you can enjoy the way the game ball rolls after passing through the fourth route.

The entrance may be an entrance where a lottery is held when a game ball enters (a special game starting gate or a regular game starting gate), or an entrance where a prize ball is generated when a game ball enters. It may be a winning opening), or it may be an entrance opening (out opening) in which no prize ball is generated even if a game ball enters.

Furthermore, the game ball that has entered the entrance and passed through the entrance may head toward the third route. That is, the entrance may be of a gate type.

Moreover, a plurality of entrances may be provided between the fourth route and the third route, or multiple types of entrances may be provided.

Also,
``A game machine comprising a plurality of routes [for example, a first ball route 2601 and a second ball route 2602] between the fourth route and the third route. ”
Also explained.

There are cases where you can enjoy the way the game ball rolls after passing through the fourth route.

Also,
"Comprising a first region [e.g., first region 1241] provided upstream of the third ball direction changing means,
The third ball direction changing means is a means in which the game ball that has passed through the first area reaches the ball [for example, when traveling along the right route 125R to the end],
The fourth route is a route in which the game ball that has passed through the first area arrives [for example, when entering from the middle of the right route 125R],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The player may enjoy knowing where the game ball will travel before the third route.

Also,
"Comprising a second region [e.g., second region 1242] provided upstream of the fourth ball direction changing means,
The fourth ball direction changing means is a means in which the game ball that has passed through the second area reaches the ball [for example, when traveling along the left route 125L to the end],
The fourth route is a route in which the game ball that has passed through the second area arrives [for example, when entering from the middle of the left route 125L],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The player may enjoy knowing where the game ball will travel before the third route.

Also,
"Equipped with a first ball direction changing means [e.g., first ball direction changing section 261] provided on the downstream side of the third ball direction changing means,
The first ball direction changing means is a means through which the game ball that has passed through the third ball direction changing means may pass [for example, FIGS. 79(a), (b), (c)],
The first ball direction changing means is a means that does not allow the game ball to pass toward the third route [for example, FIG. 79(d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``Comprising a second ball direction changing means [e.g., second ball direction changing section 262] provided on the downstream side of the fourth ball direction changing means,
The second ball direction changing means is a means through which the game ball that has passed through the fourth ball direction changing means may pass [for example, FIGS. 79(a), (b), (c)],
The second ball direction changing means is a means that does not allow the game ball to pass toward the third route [for example, FIG. 79(d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first ball direction changing means is a means capable of changing the state in which the game ball is directed to a first route [for example, a route toward the out port (here, the out port 241)],
The first ball direction changing means is a means that can change the state in which the game ball is directed to a second route [for example, a route passing through the starting port side guideway 288],
The second ball direction changing means is a means capable of changing the state in which the game ball is directed toward the first route [for example, the route toward the out exit (here, the out exit 242)],
The second ball direction changing means is a means capable of changing the state in which the game ball is directed to the second route [for example, the route passing through the starting port side guideway 288],
The first route is a route heading toward the outlet [for example, the outlet 241, 242],
The second route is a route toward the winning area [for example, the first special figure starting opening 230],
The third route is a route that goes to a region [for example, a partial region of the transparent game board 201] where game nails [for example, game nails 238] are provided.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first route may be a route extending from the outlet (for example, the outlet 241, 242) [for example, a route passing through the route 2604 provided inside the electric distribution unit 26]. The second route may be a route toward the fifth ball direction changing means (for example, the rotating body unit 28) (a route toward the guide port (first guide port 2613, second guide port 2623), or a route toward the first guide port 2613, second guide port 2623), ball passage 2681, second ball passage 2682). The third route may be a route toward a gaming area [for example, gaming area 124]. Further, when the game ball that has passed through the third route reaches an entrance [for example, general prize opening 226] provided in the game area [for example, a part of the transparent game board 201] The player may be configured to It may be configured as follows.

In the above description,
“A first region [e.g., first region 1241] into which the game ball is likely to enter when the game ball is launched with a first ejection intensity [e.g., relatively strong ejection intensity];
a second region [for example, second region 1242] into which the game ball is likely to enter when the game ball is fired at a second firing intensity [for example, relatively weak firing strength];
a first sorting means (e.g., first ball direction changing unit 261) through which game balls entering from the first area can pass;
a second sorting means (e.g., second ball direction changing section 262) through which game balls entering from the second area can pass;
Equipped with
The first distribution means may distribute game balls in a first direction [for example, right direction (direction of first ball path 2681)],
The second sorting means may sort the game balls in a second direction [for example, the right direction (direction of the second ball path 2682)],
In the case where the first sorting means sorts the game balls in the first direction [for example, this occurs with a probability of 50%], the second sorting means sorts the game balls in the second direction. Although the second direction [for example, winning with a 100% probability] is more likely to occur than the first direction [for example, winning with a 50% probability], It is a direction in which it is easy to win a prize with a certain prize winning means [for example, the first special figure starting opening 230],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, the player can arbitrarily select whether to aim at the first area or the second area. In addition, there is a second route where it is difficult to be sorted into the direction where it is easy to win a prize using the certain winning method, but if it is sorted, there is a high probability of winning, and a second route where it is easy to be sorted into the direction where it is easy to win the prize using the certain winning method. , a first route that is less likely to win a prize using the certain winning means than the second route, can be selected according to the player's preference.

Note that the first sorting means may sort the game balls in a direction different from the first direction [for example, in the left direction (direction of the outlet 241)].

Further, the second sorting means may sort the game balls in a direction different from the second direction [for example, the left direction (direction of the out port 242)].

Also,
``The first area is an area into which a game ball shot in a recommended hitting manner in a certain game state [for example, a normal state] may enter,
The second area is an area into which a game ball shot in a recommended hitting manner in the certain gaming state (for example, normal state) may enter.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, a game ball shot in a recommended manner in a certain game state may enter the first area or the second area. In other words, by executing the recommended hitting method in a certain gaming state, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the first area or the second area.

A player can select the first area or the second area in a common gaming state called the certain gaming state. That is, a player can arbitrarily select a route in one gaming state.

Also,
"The game ball that has entered the first area reaches the first distribution means [for example, first ball path 2601 → third ball direction changing section 263 → first ball path 2601 → first ball direction changing section" 261] includes a third area [for example, the distribution front area 125] to pass through before
In the third area, the game ball that has entered the second area reaches the second distribution means [for example, second ball path 2602 → fourth ball direction changing section 264 → second ball path 2602 → It is also the area that the ball passes through before the second ball direction changing part 262].
The game ball that has entered the first area reaches the second distribution means from the third area [for example, second ball path 2602 → fourth ball direction changing section 264 → second ball path 2602 → second ball path] 2 ball direction changing part 262],
A game ball that has entered the second area reaches the first distribution means from the third area [for example, first ball path 2601 → third ball direction changing section 263 → first ball path 2601 → first ball path] 1 ball direction changing part 261],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the game ball that has passed through the first area may change direction in the third area so as to go toward the second distribution means (rather than the first distribution means), and The game ball that has passed through the area may change direction in the third area so as to head toward the first distribution means (rather than the second distribution means).

While selecting one area, the rolling direction of the game ball may change accidentally, and it may be possible to confirm the same flow of the game ball as when entering the other area.

Also,
“The first area and the second area are adjacent areas [for example, areas adjacent in the left and right direction],
A game ball fired with the first firing intensity may enter the second area,
The game ball fired with the second firing intensity may enter the first area,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

While aiming at one area, there are cases where the rolling direction of the game ball changes accidentally, and it is possible to confirm the same flow of the game ball as when aiming at the other area.

Also,
``Equipped with a fifth distribution means [for example, the rotating body unit 28] provided in front of the certain prize winning means [for example, the first special figure starting port 230],
The fifth distribution means is a means through which game balls distributed in the first direction by the first distribution means (for example, game balls flowing down the first ball passage 2681) pass,
The fifth distribution means is a means through which game balls distributed in the second direction by the second distribution means (for example, game balls flowing down the second ball passage 2682) pass,
The game balls sorted in the second direction by the second sorting means [for example, 100% reached the starting port side guideway 288] are sorted in the first direction by the first sorting means. The fifth allocating means guides the game ball to the certain prize winning means [for example, it passes through the starting port side guiding path 288] than the game ball that has arrived at the starting port side guiding path 288 with a 50% probability. ] easily,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the guiding means is provided in front of the certain prize winning means [for example, the rotating body unit 28], and the guiding means is configured to move the game balls sorted in the first direction by the first sorting means. [For example, the game balls flowing down the first ball passage 2681] are the means through which the game balls [for example, the second The game balls flowing down the ball path 2682] are the means through which the game balls distributed in the second direction by the second distribution means [for example, 100% of the game balls have reached the starting port side guiding path 288] , the game balls distributed in the first direction by the first distribution means [for example, reach the starting port side guiding path 288 with a 50% probability] are directed to the certain winning means by the guiding means. It may be configured such that it is easy to be guided (for example, to pass through the starting port side guide path 288). The guiding means directs game balls sorted in the second direction by the second sorting means to game balls sorted in the second direction by the second sorting means, than game balls sorted in the first direction by the first sorting means. It is easy to lead to the certain winning means.

Further, the probability that the guiding means guides the game balls sorted in the first direction by the first sorting means to the certain winning means is higher than the probability that the guiding means guides the game balls sorted in the first direction by the first sorting means. The probability of guiding the game balls sorted in the second direction to the certain winning means is higher. That is, the probability of winning a prize in the certain prize winning means from the guiding means is higher than that of the game balls distributed in the first direction by the first distribution means. Game balls distributed in different directions are more expensive.

In the end, it is only necessary to pay attention to the guiding means, so even if a plurality of routes are provided, the winning route can be shown in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

Also,
``The advantage of the player who entered the game ball into the first area and the advantage of the player who entered the game ball into the second area do not change [For example, if the game ball enters the first special The probability of being directed to the starting port 230 is the same in both cases at 25%],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The distribution control design of the first distribution means, the distribution control design of the second distribution means, and the absence of nails near the first distribution device and the second distribution device, respectively. Although the design is the same in some respects, there may be slight differences due to individual differences. However, it is not to the extent that players can experience it.

Note that even if the probability that a game ball that enters the first area wins a prize in the certain winning means is the same as the probability that a game ball that enters the second area wins a prize in the certain winning means. good. The same here means almost the same, considering that extremely rare events occur. In other words, the meaning includes substantially the same.

Also,
``Equipped with display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
The display means is means for displaying an explanatory display regarding at least one of the first area and the second area [for example, FIGS. 81(a), (b), (d) to (f)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the display means displays an explanation that the advantage of the player who has entered the game ball into the first area is the same as the advantage of the player who has entered the game ball into the second area. [For example, the explanatory display shown in FIG. 81(b)] may be displayed.

Furthermore, although the display means is more likely to occur in the first case than in the second case, the second direction is a direction in which it is easier to win a prize in a certain winning means than the first direction. It may also be possible to display an explanatory display regarding this [for example, an explanatory display shown in FIG. 81(f)].

Further, the display means may display an explanatory display regarding both the first area and the second area [for example, the explanatory display shown in FIG. 81(f)], Of the area and the second area, an explanatory display regarding only the first area [for example, the explanatory display shown in FIG. 81(d)] may be displayed, or only the second area may be displayed. It may also be possible to display an explanatory display [for example, the explanatory display shown in FIG. 81(e)].

Furthermore, a third sorting means is disposed between the first area and the first sorting means, through which game balls entering from the first area can pass [for example, a third ball direction changing means]. 263]. The third sorting means may sort the game balls into a direction toward the first sorting means and a direction away from the first sorting means. Further, a fourth sorting means is disposed between the second area and the second sorting means, through which game balls entering from the second area can pass [for example, a fourth ball direction changing means]. 264]. The fourth sorting means may sort the game balls into a direction toward the second sorting means and a direction away from the second sorting means. By providing the third allocating means and the fourth allocating means, it is possible to finely adjust the amount of game balls directed to the certain winning means.

In addition, another winning area (for example, a second special figure starting opening 232) is provided near the first special figure starting opening 230, and a starting opening side guideway 288, the first special figure starting opening 230 and other winning areas are provided. A new sorting device (for example, a sorting unit 291 shown in FIGS. 92(b) and 92(c) described later) may be provided between the areas. With this new sorting device, further sorting may be performed between the first special figure start opening 230 and other winning areas. In addition, a V winning area is provided in place of the first special figure starting opening 230, and a new distribution device provided between the starting opening side guideway 288 and the V winning area allows the V winning area and other areas ( For example, further distribution may be performed between the output ports). In addition, a first grand prize opening is provided in place of the first special figure starting opening 230, and a new distribution device installed between the starting opening side guideway 288 and the first grand prize opening allows the first grand prize opening Further distribution may be made between the area and other areas (for example, the second grand prize opening). Here, there may be a mode in which there is a chance of winning a V prize when passing through the first grand prize opening, but there is no chance of winning a V prize even when passing through the second grand prize opening. Furthermore, a grand prize opening is provided in place of the first special drawing opening 230, and a new distribution device provided between the starting opening side guideway 288 and the grand prize opening allows the area between the grand prize opening and other areas ( For example, the prizes may be further distributed among the general winning slots. The general winning hole referred to here corresponds to a general winning hole that increases the number of prize balls in addition to winning in the big winning hole during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, it is also possible to apply the present invention to blade accessories in so-called two types of machines. In other words, an accessory (for example, a pair of (blade member), the area where the first movable member moves and the game ball can enter is called the first area 1241, and the area where the second movable member moves and the game ball can enter is called the 1st area 1241. 2 area 1242. In place of the first special figure starting opening 230, a V winning area is provided. By doing this, in a game state where an accessory including a first movable member and a second movable member is movable, if you aim to move the first movable member, there is a high probability that it will be guided to the rotary body unit 28, but V The probability of winning a prize in the winning area is low, and if you aim to move the second movable member, the probability of guiding the player to the rotating body unit 28 is low, but the probability of winning a prize in the V winning area becomes high. However, even if the game ball enters the first area 1241 and follows the first ball path 2601, or even if the game ball enters the second area 1242 and follows the second ball path 2602, The probability that the game ball is directed to the V winning area is the same.

The electric distribution unit 26 is not provided with a game nail, and the rotary body unit 28 is not provided with a game nail. Moreover, no game nail is provided between the exit opening 2881 of the starting port side guide path 288 and the first special figure starting port 230. Therefore, the game nail is not included in the route such as the first ball path 2601 → third ball direction changing part 263 → first ball direction changing part 261 → first ball path 2681 → rotating body unit 28 → first special figure starting port 230. This means that it is not set up. In addition, the game nail is also on the route such as second ball path 2602 → fourth ball direction changing part 264 → second ball direction changing part 262 → second ball path 2682 → rotating body unit 28 → first special figure starting port 230. This means that it is not set up. As shown in FIG. 76, a game nail is provided in the distribution front area 125, but even if there is a game nail, it will end up in the third ball direction changing part 263 or the fourth ball direction changing part 264. Once guided, the probability that the game ball will be directed toward the first special symbol starting port 230 is the same regardless of which route it passes, so it can be said that the structure allows the player to play the game with peace of mind. Further, even if the electric distribution unit 26 is hit through the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 73), there is no effect on the direction change of the game ball at each ball direction change section. Furthermore, even if the rotating body unit 28 is hit through the transparent plate member 118, the guidance of the game balls in the rotating body unit 28 will not be affected. From these facts, the player's hitting action is meaningless, and it can be expected that the player who realizes this will stop hitting.

Next, the general prize opening 227 provided in the third ball path 2603 at a position upstream of the position where the game ball enters by the direction change members 2631, 2641 will be described in detail.

FIG. 88(a) is a partially enlarged perspective view when the third ball path 2603 is sectioned in the vertical direction, but the hatching of the cut surface is omitted. In FIG. 88(a), the front right side of the page is the front side, and the back left side of the page is the rear side. Further, FIG. 89 is a partially enlarged side view when the third ball path 2603 is sectioned in the vertical direction, but the hatching of the cut surface is omitted. In FIG. 89, the right side of the paper is the front side, and the left side of the paper is the rear side.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, no game nails are provided in the third ball path 2603. 88 and 89 show an entrance 2603s of the third ball path 2603 connected to the end of the central route 125C (see FIG. 89). In the entrance 2603s, the front wall 2603f portion is inclined downward toward the rear side, and the rear wall 2603b portion is inclined downward toward the front side, and the game ball is placed at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction in the third ball path 2603. You will be guided.

88 and 89 also show a front wall 2603f and a rear wall 2603b that form the third ball path 2603 of the electric distribution unit 26. The general prize opening 227 is an opening provided in the rear wall 2603b. That is, the general winning a prize opening 227 is opened toward the rear side (inner side). The upper end portion 227a of the edge defining the general winning hole 227 protrudes downward. Moreover, it can be said that the general winning hole 227 is opened diagonally upward.

FIG. 88(b) is a diagram showing a cross-sectional shape of the third ball path 2603 when the entrance 2603s portion of the third ball path 2603 is sectioned in the horizontal direction.

In FIG. 88(b), the upper side of the figure is the front side and the lower side of the figure is the rear side. As shown in FIG. 88, in a portion of the rear wall 2603b between the entrance 2603s and the general prize opening 227, a protrusion 2603t extending in the vertical direction and protruding forward is formed. In FIG. 88(b), the game ball B is shown by a solid line and a chain line. The game ball B shown by the solid line is the game ball B that is in contact with the protrusion portion 2603t. On the other hand, the game ball B' shown by the one-dot chain line is a game ball that is closer to the right rear side. In the third ball path 2603 shown in FIG. 88(b), dust Du is accumulated at the rear right corner. The game ball B' shown by the one-dot chain line hits the protrusion 2603t and cannot completely come to the right rear corner of the third ball path 2603, so that contact with the dust Du is avoided, and the game ball is exposed to dust. adhesion is prevented.

The protrusion portion 2603t is provided with a sloped portion SL1 that slopes downward toward the front side on the entrance 2603s side, and the game ball is directed further to the front side by this sloped portion SL1. A sloped portion SL2 that slopes downward toward the rear side is provided on the general winning opening 227 side of the protrusion portion 2603t. This inclined portion SL2 continues to the edge defining the general winning a prize opening 227. Furthermore, a protrusion 2603p is formed on the front wall 2603f at a position facing the general winning opening 227. This protrusion 2603p is provided with a guide curved surface CS that guides the game ball toward the general prize opening 227. The guide curved surface CS is composed of a curved surface facing the general winning a prize opening 227. A path toward the general winning hole 227 is formed in the third ball path 2603 by the inclined portion SL2 following the edge defining the general winning hole 227 and the guide curved surface CS provided on the protrusion 2603p. This route is a route that goes diagonally downward from above the general winning opening 227 toward the general winning opening 227. FIG. 88(a) shows the game ball B that has flown down to the front of this path, and solid line arrows representing the movement of the game ball B along this path. The game ball that has entered the general winning hole 227 travels toward the rear (inner side) and then falls downward as indicated by the dotted arrow. The game ball that has fallen downward is detected by a ball detection sensor (not shown). When this ball detection sensor detects a game ball, it is assumed that a prize has been won in the general prize opening 227, and the payout device 152 is driven to place a predetermined number of balls (for example, 4 balls) into the ball storage tray 126 as prize balls. Discharge. The ball that entered the general winning hole 227 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the process until the game ball enters the general prize opening 227 provided in the middle of the third ball path 2603, and the state in which the game ball cannot enter. FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view of the third ball path 2603 taken in the vertical direction, and is a diagram schematically representing the structure shown in FIGS. 88 and 89 for easy understanding, with the left side of the paper facing the front side. The right side of the paper will be the back side.

FIG. 90(a) shows a game ball B entering the third ball path 2603 from the entrance 2603s of the third ball path 2603. In this FIG. 90(a), the rear wall 2603b and the protruding portion 2603t shown in FIGS. 88 and 89 are shown as one body, but the game ball B flows down along the front wall 2603f due to the slope of the slope portion SL1. It's easier to do. When the game ball B flows down along the front wall 2603f, the moving direction of the game ball B is easily directed to the rear (backward side) by the guide curved surface CS provided on the protrusion 2603p. When the projection 2603p comes into contact with a passing game ball, it changes the movement of the game ball.

Note that the game ball B may not only flow down along the front wall 2603f but also flow down along the rear wall 2603b. In this case, like the game ball B'' shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. access is blocked.

FIG. 90(b) shows how the game ball B flows down along the front wall 2603f and reaches the guide curved surface CS provided on the protrusion 2603p. The guide curved surface CS is provided at a position facing the general winning opening 227. Further, the guide curved surface CS is provided at a position spaced apart from the general winning a prize opening 227. Furthermore, the guide curved surface CS is provided at a position closer to the player than the general prize winning opening 227. When the game ball B has an appropriate momentum, it enters the general winning hole 227 from the guide curved surface CS as indicated by the arrow A. On the other hand, if the game ball B does not have enough momentum, it will move in the direction of falling from the guide curved surface CS, as indicated by arrow B. The game ball B that has advanced in the direction of falling from the guide curved surface CS passes through the production switch 269 shown in FIG. 76 and is discharged from the electric distribution unit 26.

FIG. 90(c) shows the game ball B riding on the lower end portion of the edge defining the general winning hole 227. The game ball B shown in FIG. 90(c) has reached the general winning hole 227, and then goes from the general winning hole 227 to the rear side (back side) as shown by the arrow in FIG. 90(c). Proceed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 90(d), the momentum of the game ball B is slightly insufficient, and before the game ball B gets on the lower end of the edge that defines the general winning hole 227, it collides in front of it. Then, the ball flows down the third ball path 2603 as indicated by the arrow.

In the above explanation, it has been explained that depending on the momentum of the game ball B, a player may or may not win a prize in the general winning hole 227, but the momentum of the game ball B is related to the moving speed of the game ball. Furthermore, the moving direction of the game ball B and the state of the moving game ball (for example, spin state, etc.) also affect winnings in the general winning hole 227.

FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a modification of the third ball path 2603, and is a cross-sectional view when the third ball path 2603 is cut in the vertical direction, with the left side on the paper being the front side and the right side on the paper being the rear side. Become. In the following description, redundant descriptions will be omitted, and there will be occasions when the description will focus on the characteristic parts of the modified example. In addition, components having the same names as those described above will be described using the same reference numerals as used up until now. Moreover, in FIG. 91, in order to clearly illustrate the general winning a prize opening 227, it is shown by an arrow.

FIG. 91(a) is an example in which the protrusion 2603p is removed from the front wall 2603f. As mentioned above, the protrusion 2603p changes the movement of the game ball when it comes into contact with the passing game ball, but even without this protrusion 2603p, the momentum (moving speed) of the game ball B and the game ball change. Depending on the moving direction of B and the state of the moving game ball, it may enter the general winning hole 227.

Note that the third ball path 2603 itself may be replaced with one having an inverted conical circumference whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side. When the game ball B flows down (flowing down in a spiral shape) while going around its circumferential surface, it becomes easier to enter the general winning hole 227. In this case, when the inverted conical peripheral surface comes into contact with a game ball passing upstream from the position where the general prize winning hole 227 is provided, the movement of the game ball changes.

Further, a structure having the same structure as the second upstream ball delay section 2653 (see FIG. 76), which will be described in detail later, may be provided between the entrance 2603s of the third ball path 2603 and the general prize opening 227. In this case, a force to move the game ball in the circumferential direction is applied to the game ball passing upstream from the position where the general winning hole 227 is provided, and the movement of the game ball changes laterally.

FIG. 91(b) is an example in which the upper end portion 227a projecting downward among the edges defining the general winning a prize opening 227 is not provided. The general winning opening 227 shown in FIG. 91(a) was an opening provided diagonally with respect to the third ball path 2603 (see the arrow shown in FIG. 91(a)), but as shown in FIG. 91(b) The general winning hole 227 is an opening provided in parallel to the third ball path 2603 (see the arrow shown in FIG. 91(b)). Even with such a general winning hole 227, depending on the momentum (moving speed) of the game ball B, the moving direction of the game ball B, and the state of the moving game ball, it may enter the general winning hole 227. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 91(b), since the protrusion 2603p is provided, the movement of the game ball is changed, making it easier to enter the general winning hole 227.

FIG. 91(c) is an example in which the protrusion 2603p is removed from the example shown in FIG. 91(b), as in the example shown in FIG. 91(a). Depending on the momentum (moving speed) of the game ball B, the moving direction of the game ball B, and the state of the moving game ball, it may also enter the general winning hole 227 shown in FIG. 91(c). The third ball path 2603 shown in FIG. 91(c) is such that the game ball B flowing upstream from the general winning hole 227 is more likely to flow downstream of the third ball path 2603 than entering the general winning hole 227. It may be a route. On the other hand, the third ball path 2603 shown in FIGS. 88 to 90 may also be a ball path where the game ball B is more likely to flow downstream of the third ball path 2603 than to enter the general prize opening 227. The third ball path 2603 shown in FIGS. 88 to 90 is configured such that the guide curved surface CS of the protrusion 2603p is made large, so that the game ball B flowing upstream from the general winning opening 227 flows downstream of the third ball path 2603. The ball path may be set so that it is easier to enter the general winning hole 227 than the downstream direction.

In addition, here too, the same structure as the second upstream ball delay section 2653 (see FIG. 76) may be provided between the entrance 2603s of the third ball path 2603 and the general prize opening 227. Furthermore, when installing the pachinko machine 100 itself on an island facility, the tilt of the entire pachinko machine 100 in the front and back direction can be adjusted, and in this case, the pachinko machine 100 can be installed with the upper part tilted toward the rear. If you do so, it will be easier to enter the general prize opening 227. Adjustment of the longitudinal inclination of the pachinko machine 100 when installed in this island facility can be applied to the examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 90 and others.

Although the general winning opening 227 was an opening through which the game ball entered toward the rear (backward side), the technique described here is also applicable to an opening through which the game ball enters toward the front.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing another example in which a game ball entrance opening toward the rear side (inner side) is provided in the middle of the ball path.

FIG. 92(a) is a cross-sectional view of the third ball path 2603 taken in the vertical direction, with the left side in the paper being the front side and the right side in the paper being the rear side. The third ball path 2603 shown in FIG. 92(a) is also not provided with a game nail, and this third ball path 2603 is provided with two general winning holes 227. That is, another general winning opening 227 is provided with the same structure further downstream of the same structure as the general winning opening 227 shown in FIG. 90. Also between the upstream general winning opening 227 and the downstream general winning opening 227, a sloped part SL1 is provided on the rear side, making it easier for the game ball B to flow down along the front wall 2603f.

Note that an out port may be provided in place of the general winning port 227 on the downstream side. Furthermore, one or more general winning holes 227 may be provided further downstream than the general winning hole 227 on the downstream side, and three or more winning holes may be provided in the third ball path 2603.

FIG. 92(b) shows a sorting unit 291 that distributes game balls to a first channel 2301 in which a first special figure starting port 230 is provided and a second channel 2321 in which a second special figure starting port 232 is provided. FIG. 3C is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA' of the sorting unit 291 shown in FIG. In FIG. 92(b), the front side of the page is the front side, and the back side of the page is the back side. Further, in FIG. 92(c), the left side of the paper is the front side, and the right side of the paper is the rear side. Note that in FIG. 92(c), each entrance port is indicated by an arrow in order to be easily illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 92(b) and 92(c), no game nails are provided in either the first channel 2301 or the second channel 2321. Further, as shown in FIG. 92(b), the distribution unit 291 has a distribution section 2912 that distributes the game balls entering from the unit entrance 2911 to the left and right channels. The distribution section 2912 changes the distribution attitude depending on the weight of the game balls. The distribution unit 291 has a transparent or semi-transparent portion where the unit entrance 2911, the distribution section 2912, and the out ports 243, 244 are provided, so that the player can visually see how the distribution section 2912 distributes the game balls B. It is possible. Since the distribution unit 2912 changes the distribution attitude depending on how the game ball hits and the movement of the game ball (for example, spin, etc.), it is impossible to predict the attitude of the distribution unit 2912 and fire the game ball. In the distribution unit 291, the left channel becomes the first channel 2301, and the right channel becomes the second channel 2321.

Note that the distributing section 2912 may be rotated left and right by a motor, and in this case, the distributing section 2912 may be rotated by a random number using a random number like the direction changing member 2631 described using FIG. Just make it a regular movement.

As shown in FIG. 92(c), the distribution unit 291 is provided on the front surface of the game board 201. The second flow path 2321 of the sorting unit 291 has a second special figure starting port 232 (see solid line arrow) that opens upward and an out port 244 that opens rearward (rear side). It is provided. The out port 244 is located near the front side of the game board 201, and the game balls that have entered the out port 244 head toward the back side of the game board 201. Further, the downstream side of the second flow path 2321 from the position where the second special figure starting port 232 is provided may be made opaque to make it invisible to the player, but this part may also be made transparent or translucent so that the game It may be made visible to the person.

The position of the second special figure starting port 232 may be a position on the bottom wall 2321b of the second flow path 2321 (for example, see the arrow of the two-dot chain line). The starting port 232, like the out port 244, opens toward the rear (inner side). Further, the out port 244 is located above the second special figure starting port 232. In addition, the position of the out port 244 and the position of the second special figure starting port 232 may be reversed, and in this case, the second special figure starting port 232 will be located above the out port 244. .

Whether it is the second special figure starting port 232 indicated by the solid line arrow or the second special figure starting port 232 indicated by the two-dot chain arrow, it is provided in the middle of the extending direction of the second flow path 2321. It is something that On the other hand, the out port 244 is provided in a direction that intersects with the extending direction of the second flow path 2321 (in this case, a substantially orthogonal direction), and more specifically, is provided in the front-rear direction. be. A ball detection sensor 2322 is provided at the downstream end of the second flow path 2321 to detect a game ball that has passed through the second special figure starting port 232.

Although the second flow path 2321 has been described above using FIG. 92(c), the same applies to the first flow path 2301.

Further, the configuration of the second special figure starting port 232 and the out port 244 explained using FIG. 92(c) may be applied to the special figure 1 starting chucker 23 shown in FIG. 75(c). That is, the first special pattern starting port 230 shown in FIG. 75(c) is configured as the second special pattern starting port 232 shown in FIG. 92(c), and the exit opening 2881 of the starting port side guideway 288 and the first special pattern starting port The out port 244 shown in FIG. 92(c) may be configured to have an interval of one game ball or more between the starting port 230 and the starting port 230. In this case, both the left and right gaps of one game ball or more provided between the exit opening 2881 of the starting port side guide path 288 and the first special figure starting port 230 are eliminated. For example, blocked by a wall. In this configuration, the game balls discharged from the out outlet 289L, 289R shown in FIG. 75(c) reach the out outlet 240 shown in FIG. 75(a) with a probability of 100%. However, leave one of the left and right gaps of one game ball or more provided between the exit opening 2881 of the starting port side guideway 288 and the first special figure starting port 230, and It may also be a mode that allows the game balls to come in and out.

FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the game ball is moved laterally in the middle of the ball path and then enters the entrance for the game ball that opens toward the rear (inner side). In FIG. 93, the front side of the page is the front side, and the back side of the page is the back side. Also, in FIG. 93, the entrance port 2606W is indicated by an arrow in order to be easily illustrated.

FIG. 93(a) is a diagram showing an example of a ball path arranged by rotating the third ball path 2603 described using FIG. 90 by 90 degrees.

A ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 93(a) is also not provided with a game nail. At the entrance 2606s of this ball path 2606, the right side wall 2606R slopes downward toward the inside of the passage longer than the left side wall 2606L. Therefore, the game ball B tends to lean toward the left side wall 2606L.

A game ball entry port 2606W is opened in the middle of the right side wall 2606R. This entrance 2606W may be a general winning opening, a big winning opening, a special figure starting opening, or an out opening. The entry port 2606W is opened laterally. Among the edges defining the entrance 2606W, the upper end portion 2606a projects downward. Further, the right side wall 2606R is provided with a sloped portion SL3 connected to the upper end portion 2606a. Note that the entrance port 2606W can also be said to open diagonally upward to the left.

On the other hand, a protrusion 2606p is formed on the left side wall 2606L at a position facing the entrance 2606W. This protrusion 2606p is provided with a guide curved surface CS that guides the game ball toward the entrance 2606W. The guide curved surface CS is composed of a curved surface facing the entrance 2606W. A path toward the entrance 2606W is formed in the ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 93(a) by the slope SL3 following the edge defining the entrance 2606W and the guide curved surface CS provided on the protrusion 2606p. There is. This route is a route that goes diagonally downward from above the entrance 2606W toward the entrance 2606W.

When the game ball B flows down along the left side wall 2606L, the moving direction of the game ball B is easily directed to the right side by the guide curved surface CS provided on the projection 2606p. When the projection 2606p comes into contact with a passing game ball, it changes the movement of the game ball.

Note that the game ball B may not only flow down along the left side wall 2606L but also flow down along the right side wall 2606R. In this case, it collides with the upper end portion 2606a and is prevented from entering the entrance 2606W. The game ball B that has not entered the entrance 2606W advances downstream of the ball path 2606.

At the back of the entrance 2606W (bottom right in FIG. 93(a)), there is provided an entrance area 2606E with a space larger than one game ball. In this approach area 2606E, a downstream path 2606K is formed toward the rear side. The flow path 2606K opens in the game board 201 and becomes a path through which the game balls B flow down to the back side of the pachinko machine 100. The game ball that has entered the entrance 2606W enters the downstream path 2606K, is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the downstream path 2606K, and is then discharged to the game island side. A ball detection sensor for detecting game balls is provided on the downstream path 2606K.

FIG. 93(b) is a diagram showing an example in which the protrusion 2606p shown in FIG. 93(a) is removed and a plurality of convex portions 2606T are provided instead.

The right side wall 2606R of the ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 93(a) is provided with a protrusion 2606T that protrudes inside the ball path, one on the upstream side of the entrance port 2606W and one on the downstream side of the entrance port 2606W. It is being On the other hand, one convex portion 2606T is provided on the left side wall 2606L of the ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 93(b) at a position facing the entrance 2606W. In the ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 93(a), convex portions 2606T are provided alternately on the right side wall 2606R and the left side wall 2606L along the downstream direction of the game ball. The game ball B is directed diagonally downward to the left by the convex portion 2606T provided on the upstream side of the right side wall 2606R. In this way, if there is a protrusion 2606T provided on the left side wall 2606L where the game ball B is heading, the game ball B will be directed diagonally downward to the right by the protrusion 2606T. If there is an entrance 2606W where the game ball B heads in this way, the game ball B may enter the entrance 2606W. The plurality of convex portions 2606T shown in FIG. 93(b) change the movement of the game ball B when it comes into contact with the game ball B passing through.

In addition, in the ball path 2606 shown in FIG. 93(b), the upper end portion 2606a that protrudes downward among the edges defining the entrance port 2606W is also removed, and the entrance port 2606W is formed by an opening ( (see arrow shown in FIG. 93(b)). Even with such an entrance 2606W, the movement of the game ball is changed by the plurality of convex portions 2606T, making it easier to enter the entrance 2606W.

FIG. 93(c) is an example in which the plurality of convex portions 2606T are removed from the example shown in FIG. 93(b). Depending on the momentum (moving speed) of the game ball B, the moving direction of the game ball B, and the state of the moving game ball, it may also enter the entrance 2606W shown in FIG. 93(c). Further, a structure having the same structure as the second upstream ball delay section 2653 (see FIG. 76) may be provided between the entrance 2606s and the entrance 2606W of the ball path 2606.

In the above description,
"A first ball path through which game balls pass [for example, third ball path 2603, first flow path 2301, second flow path 2321, ball path 2606],
A first winning opening provided in the middle of the first ball path [for example, general winning opening 227, first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232, entry opening 2606W],
Equipped with
The first prize opening is opened in the wall surface [for example, the rear wall 2603b, the game board 201],
In some cases, the game ball that enters the first ball path enters the first winning hole [for example, FIG. 90(c)], and sometimes passes through the first winning hole and enters the first winning hole. The configuration is such that there are cases where the opening reaches the downstream side of the position where the opening is provided [for example, FIG. 90(d)].
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

By providing the first prize opening in the middle of the first ball path, the gaming area can be made compact and the area other than the gaming area can be enlarged.

Note that the first spherical passage may be a passage partitioned by a wall surface, or may be a passage formed by a wall surface.

The wall surface may be a front surface of a game board.

The first prize opening may be formed in the ball passage unit [for example, the electric distribution unit 26, the distribution unit 291], or may be opened in the game board.

The first winning hole may be a variable winning hole or a general winning hole. Further, it may be a special figure starting opening or a regular figure starting opening.

The first winning hole may be one that dispenses prize balls when a prize is won, and may be one that, when entered, is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine and then ejected to the game island side, or a gate. It may also be something that remains in the gaming area even after entering.

Also,
``Equipped with a second ball path formed by game nails [for example, right route 125R, center route 125C, and left route 125L in the distribution front area 125],
The first ball path is a ball path in which no game nails are provided,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the winning rate of the first winning opening does not change due to external factors (for example, adjustment of the gaming nails by the gaming parlor), both experts and amateurs can play the game equally.

In addition, the second ball path may be provided with a metal game nail, and the first ball path may be a ball path in which no metal game nail is provided. That is, the first ball passage may be provided with a game nail made of resin. Note that the resin game nail may be formed integrally with the game board or the ball passage unit.

Alternatively, the game nail may be made of resin.

Also,
``Protrusion 2603p, same structure as second upstream ball delay section 2653, convex portion 2606T'' are provided,
It is configured such that a game ball in contact with the change imparting means is more likely to win a prize in the first prize opening than a game ball not in contact with the change imparting means;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The player can enjoy watching the flowing direction of the game ball change by the change imparting means.

In addition, the first ball passage is provided with a change imparting means that changes the movement of the game ball when it comes into contact with a game ball passing upstream from the position where the first winning opening is provided. It may be.

Also,
“The change imparting means is provided at a position away from the first winning opening [for example, a position upstream from the first winning opening],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Depending on the power and direction of the game ball that has left the change imparting means, the player can enjoy watching the game ball enter the first prize opening or flow downstream of the first ball path.

Also,
``The change imparting means is provided at a position facing the first prize opening [for example, a position on a wall surface facing the wall surface],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The player can enjoy predicting where the game ball will flow, the direction of which has been changed by the change imparting means.

Also,
“The change imparting means is provided at a position closer to the player [e.g., the position of the front wall 2603f] than the first prize opening [e.g., the opening (227) provided on the rear wall 2603b]. be,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The area in the direction of the surface facing the player in the gaming area can be made compact.

Also,
“The first ball path is formed in a ball path unit [e.g., electric distribution unit 26, distribution unit 291],
The ball passage unit is at least partially transparent or translucent so that the first prize opening is visible to the player.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

A player can visually observe the game ball entering the first prize opening through the ball passage unit.

Note that the game ball passing through the first ball path may be configured to be visible.

The first prize opening may be formed in the ball passage unit, or may be opened in the game board.

The ball passage unit may be partially transparent or translucent, or may be entirely transparent or translucent.

Also,
“The first prize opening is opened in the front and back direction,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The first winning opening may be opened toward the front side (front side, player side) or may be opened toward the back side (rear side).

Also,
``A second winning opening provided on the downstream side of the first ball passage [for example, the general winning opening 226 shown in FIG. 76, provided between the electric distribution unit 26 and the out opening 240] Prepare,
The first winning hole and the second winning hole are general winning holes with the same number of prize balls [for example, 4 balls],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the game ball flowing down the upstream side of the first ball path may more easily flow down the downstream side of the first ball path than entering the first winning opening [for example, as shown in FIG. 91(c) ) the third ball path 2603].

The game ball flowing down the upstream side of the first ball path may enter the first prize opening more easily than the game ball flowing down the downstream side of the first ball path [for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 to 90] 3rd sphere path 2603 shown].

There may be a third winning opening [for example, the general winning opening 227 on the downstream side shown in FIG. 92(a)] between the first winning opening and the downstream end of the first ball path.

The change imparting means may be a ball delaying means [for example, one having the same structure as the second upstream ball delaying section 2653] capable of slowing down the moving speed of the game ball.

The game ball flowing down the upstream side of the first ball path may flow down the downstream side of the first ball path more easily than entering the first winning opening [for example, as shown in FIG. 91(c) 3rd sphere path 2603 shown].

The game ball flowing down the upstream side of the first ball path may enter the first prize opening more easily than the game ball flowing down the downstream side of the first ball path [for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 to 90] 3rd sphere path 2603 shown].

There may be a third winning opening [for example, the general winning opening 227 on the downstream side shown in FIG. 92(a)] between the first winning opening and the downstream end of the first ball path.

The change imparting means may be a ball delaying means [for example, one having the same structure as the second upstream ball delaying section 2653] capable of slowing down the moving speed of the game ball.

Next, the first upstream ball delay section 2651, first downstream ball delay section 2652, second upstream ball delay section 2653, and second downstream ball delay section 2654 shown in FIG. 76 will be described. As described above, the first upstream ball delay section 2651 and the first downstream ball delay section 2652 are arranged in the first ball path 2601, and the second upstream ball delay section 2653 and the second downstream ball delay section 2654 are arranged in the second ball path 2601. The second upstream sphere delay section 2653 will be explained here as an example, since the structure is the same except for the arrangement position.

FIG. 94(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second upstream ball delaying section 2653 and the fourth ball direction changing section 264 taken along a vertical plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The cross section of the fourth ball direction changing portion 264 is hatched.

The second upstream ball delay section 2653 has a cylindrical ball passage section 2653A. A game ball passes inside this ball passage portion 2653A. Therefore, the ball passage section 2653A forms a part of the second ball path 2602. The inner circumferential surface of this ball passage portion 2653A is provided with an R surface 2653b, an inverted conical surface 2653c whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a cylindrical surface 2653d having the same inner diameter. The upstream end of the R surface 2653b constitutes the upstream end of the ball passage section 2653A, and the inverted conical surface 2653c is connected to the downstream end of the R surface 2653b. Further, the cylindrical surface 2653d is connected to the downstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c, and the downstream end of the cylindrical surface 2653d constitutes the downstream end of the spherical passage portion 2653A. In other words, the width of the inner peripheral surface is narrower on the downstream side than on the upstream side. The width referred to here is the length in one direction perpendicular to the passing direction of the game ball (direction from top to bottom in FIG. 94(a)), but the inner circumferential surface is annular. Therefore, the length is the same in all directions as long as they are orthogonal. That is, the width referred to here is the inner diameter of the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. 94(a). In addition, when the length of the inner circumferential surface differs depending on the direction, the width is defined as the direction in which the length is the shortest. The width W1 of the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c is narrower than the width W2 of a portion of the second ball path 2602 connected to the second upstream ball delay portion 2653. Furthermore, the width W3 at the downstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c is narrower than the width W1 at the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c. Furthermore, the width W4 of the downstream end of the second upstream sphere delaying portion 2653 (width of the downstream end of the cylindrical surface 2653d) is narrower than the width W1 of the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c. In this way, the width of each part is important in relation to the width of other parts, but as an example, the width W1 at the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c is 12.5 mm, and in the second spherical path 2602, The width W2 of the part connected to the second upstream ball delay section 2653 is 13.0 mm, the width W3 of the downstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c is 11.5 mm, and the width of the downstream end of the second upstream ball delay section 2653 (cylindrical surface 2653d The width (width at the downstream end) W4 may be 11.5 mm. Further, the width of the cylindrical surface 2653d is 11.5 mm. Note that the cylindrical surface 2653d is an adjustment allowance for making the height (passage length) of the ball passage portion 2653A more than a certain value, and can be omitted if a certain value can be secured only with the inverted conical surface 2653c. .

FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the second upstream ball delay section 2653 viewed diagonally from above. In FIG. 95, the front left side of the page is the front side (player side).

The second upstream ball delay section 2653 is separate from the electric distribution unit 26. That is, it is removably attached to the second ball path 2602. In the second upstream ball delay portion 2653, locking portions 2653L and 2653R extending on both sides in the lateral direction of the ball passage portion 2653A are locked to the rear wall 2603b of the electric distribution unit 26. Note that the second ball path 2602 is defined on the rear side by the rear wall 2603b. Since the second upstream ball delay section 2653 is removable, there are fewer parts to be replaced when the second upstream ball delay section 2653 becomes dirty or damaged. Furthermore, the second upstream ball delay section 2653 can be reused in other pachinko machines 100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 94(a), a ball behavior stabilizing section 266 that forms a part of the second ball path 2602 is located downstream of the second upstream ball delay section 2653. A slight vertical gap 2653s is provided between the downstream end of the second upstream ball delaying section 2653 and the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266. The width W5 at the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266 is wider than the width W4 at the downstream end of the second upstream ball delaying section 2653, but wider than the width W1 at the upstream end of the inverted conical surface 2653c in the second upstream ball delaying section 2653. is narrow. Like the inverted conical surface 2653c, the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is also a portion formed with an inverted conical inner peripheral surface whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and the width W6 of the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is , the width is narrower than the width of any part of the ball passage section 2653A in the second upstream ball delay section 2653. Furthermore, it can be said that the width W6 of the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is the narrowest among the portions of the second ball path 2602 upstream of this downstream end. The width W6 of the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. In other words, the second ball path 2602 is most constricted at the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266. The width W5 of the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 may be 12.0 mm. Further, the width W6 of the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 may be 11.3 mm, which is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball (11 m). The widths (W1 to W6) of each part described above may have other values as long as the ratio relationship is the same.

The inclination angle of the inner circumferential surface of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266 that reduces the diameter toward the downstream side is larger than the inclination angle of the inverted conical surface 2653c of the second upstream ball delay section 2653 that reduces the diameter toward the downstream side. It's an angle. The angle of inclination here refers to the angle of inclination with respect to the vertical axis.

After passing through the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266, the ball path branches to the left and right, the path on the left becomes the second ball path 2602, and the path on the right connects to the third ball path 2603 (see FIG. 76). The route becomes route 2607. Both the path on the left (second ball path 2602) and the path on the right (connection path 2607) have a width wider than the diameter of the game ball (11 m), and the game ball can pass through both paths without difficulty. It is possible. Therefore, ball clogging is less likely to occur. A fourth ball direction changing section 264 is arranged directly below the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266, with a branch between the left path (second ball path 2602) and the right path (communication path 2607) in between. . Further, these passages (2602, 2606) are provided with a deceleration rib 26r1 at the center portion in the width direction.

On the other hand, on the second ball path 2602, on the upstream side of the second upstream ball delay section 2653, a ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 that protrudes forward is provided. The part of the second ball path 2602 where the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 is provided is a curved path facing left, and the ball trajectory changing rib is placed along the widthwise center of this path. 26r3 is provided. The shape of the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 is also a curved shape.

Next, the trajectory of the game ball flowing down the second ball path 2602 will be explained. FIG. 94(b) is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the game ball in the second upstream ball delay section 2653. FIG. 94(c) is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the game ball in the ball behavior stabilizing section 266. FIG. 94(d) is a diagram schematically showing the trajectory of the game ball that has passed through the ball behavior stabilizing section 266.

The game ball that has entered the second ball path 2602 contacts the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3. When the game ball comes into contact with the curved ball trajectory changing rib 26r3, the trajectory tends to change outward, that is, to the left, and the game ball is easily subjected to spin. The game ball whose trajectory changes to the left and is spun comes into contact with the left side portion of the inner circumferential surface of the second upstream ball delay section 2653, and then starts to move around along the inner circumferential surface. That is, the inverted conical surface 2653c of the second upstream ball delay section 2653 is moved in a spiral manner toward the downstream side (see FIG. 94(b)). The game ball travels a longer distance by moving in a spiral than if it falls straight, and as a result, the speed of movement decreases. The game ball stays in the second upstream ball delay section 2653 while moving in a spiral shape, albeit for a short time.

In the gap 2653s provided between the downstream end of the second upstream ball delaying section 2653 and the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266, the inner circumferential surface along which the spirally moving game ball moves is interrupted, The spiral movement of the game ball is easily completed. Further, since the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266 is slightly wider than the downstream end of the second upstream ball delaying section 2653, the continuity of the spiral is interrupted here as well, and the spiral movement tends to end. After completing the spiral movement, the game ball advances diagonally downward while colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266, which has an inverted conical shape whose diameter is gradually reduced. The ball behavior stabilizing section 266 eliminates the moment that tends to cause the game ball, which has been moving in the circumferential direction, to move outward, and attempts to direct the game ball directly downward. At the narrowest downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266, the behavior of the game ball is suppressed and stabilized with the image of the game ball getting stuck. For example, the behavior of the game ball that was moving rattling while colliding with the inner circumferential surface of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 suddenly stops (see FIG. 94(c)).

Eventually, the game ball passes through the ball behavior stabilizing section 266 and falls onto the direction changing member 2641 of the fourth ball direction changing section 264. That is, the game ball B falls straight downward from the narrowest downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266 and comes into contact with the direction changing member 2641 (see FIG. 94(d)). When the game ball contacts the left inclined surface 264L of the direction change member 2641, it flows down the left path (second ball path 2602). On the other hand, when the game ball contacts the right inclined surface 264R of the direction change member 2641, it flows down the right path (communication path 2607).

The trajectory of the game ball from the second upstream ball delay section 2653 to the fourth ball direction changing section 264 in the second ball path 2602 has been described above, but the ball direction changes from the other ball delay sections (2651, 2652, 2654). The same applies to the trajectory of the game ball over the portions (261 to 263).

Note that both the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 and the direction changing member 2641 have the same function in the sense of changing the moving direction of the game ball, but the direction changing member 2641 is more effective than the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3. To greatly change the direction of movement of the game ball. Further, the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 is fixed and not a movable member, but the direction changing member 2641 is a movable member. That is, the state of the ball trajectory changing rib 26r3 does not change, but the state of the direction changing member 2641 changes, and the moving direction of the game ball also changes according to the change in state.

Next, a modification of the ball delay section will be described. Again, the second upstream sphere delay section 2653 will be described as an example, and components having the same names as those described above will be described with the same reference numerals used up until now.

FIG. 96 is a partial sectional view showing a modification of the ball delay section. This partial sectional view is a sectional view showing a part of the downstream side of the second upstream ball delaying section 2653 when the second upstream ball delaying section 2653 is sectioned along a vertical plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction. The cross section of the delay portion 2653 is hatched.

In the second upstream ball delay section 2653 shown in FIG. 94, a cylindrical surface 2653d having the same inner diameter as the downstream portion of the inverted conical surface 2653c whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side is provided on the downstream side. In the second upstream ball delay section 2653 shown in FIG. 96(a), the cylindrical surface 2653d is omitted, and the inverted conical surface 2653c extends to the downstream end of the second upstream ball delay section 2653. That is, a surface perpendicular to the inner circumferential surface of the second upstream ball delay section 2653 is not provided.

Furthermore, although the inverted conical surface 2653c whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side is a flat surface, the second upstream sphere delay section 2653 shown in FIG. 96(b) has an outwardly convex surface whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side. An outer curved surface 2653e that is a curved surface is formed up to the downstream end of the second upstream ball delay section 2653. Also on this outer curved surface 2653e, the game ball rotates along the outwardly convex curved surface. In the second upstream ball delay section 2653 shown in FIG. 96(c), an inner curved surface 2653f, which is an inwardly convex curved surface whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side, is formed up to the downstream end of the second upstream ball delay section 2653. ing. Also on this inner curved surface 2653f, the game ball rotates along the curved surface that is convex inward.

In the second upstream ball delay portion 2653 shown in FIG. 96(d), a threaded groove 2653g is formed on an inverted conical surface whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side. The thread groove 2653g is a groove connected in a spiral shape, and the game ball can easily move around the thread groove 2653g.

FIG. 97 is a sectional view showing a modification of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266. This cross-sectional view shows the cross-sectional shape of the downstream end (the narrowest part) of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 in the horizontal direction, and in FIG. 97, the cross-section of the game ball B is also shown in each figure. has been done. In this FIG. 97, the lower side is the front side (player side). Note that, here as well, components having the same names as those described above will be described with the same reference numerals used up until now.

First, FIG. 97(a) shows the ball behavior stabilizing part 266 shown in FIG. 94. The entire periphery of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266 shown in FIG. 94 is covered with a wall. A front wall 2603f is shown on the front side of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266. Note that both the wall constituting the ball behavior stabilizing section 266 and the front wall 2603f are transparent, and the player can visually recognize the game ball passing through the ball behavior stabilizing section 266.

The ball behavior stabilizing section 266 shown in FIG. 97(b) has an open front side and is composed of left and right side walls 266L, 266R and a rear wall 266B. The inner dimension of the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 is such that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-back direction, and the length in the left-right direction corresponds to the width, and is, for example, 11.3 mm. The ball behavior stabilizing section 266 shown in FIG. 97(b) stabilizes the behavior of the game ball only in one direction, the left and right direction.

The ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 97(c) has its front side closed by another plate member 266F', and the ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 97(d) has the left and right side walls 266L. , 266R and a front wall 266F integrally formed with the rear wall 266B. In both the ball behavior stabilizing part 266 shown in FIG. 97(c) and the ball behavior stabilizing part 266 shown in FIG. 97(d), the inner dimensions are the same in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, and the inner dimensions are the same in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. The behavior of the game ball is stabilized by two directions.

The ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 97(e) is open on the front side and has an arcuate rear wall 266B' connecting the left and right side walls 266L and 266R. The arc of the arc-shaped rear wall 266B' becomes a circular hole in a circle with a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11.3 mm). The ball behavior stabilizing portion 266 shown in FIG. 97(e) restrains the rear half of the game ball B. As described in the explanation in FIG. 91(c), when the pachinko machine 100 itself is installed on an island facility, the inclination of the entire pachinko machine 100 in the front-rear direction can be adjusted. If the pachinko machine 100 is installed with the top tilted to the rear, the rear half of the game ball B will fit into the arc-shaped rear wall 266B' shown in FIG. 97(e), and the behavior of the game ball will change. Stabilize.

The ball behavior stabilizing section 266 shown in FIG. 97(f) closes the front side of the ball behavior stabilizing section 266 shown in FIG. 97(e) with a separate member 266F'', and as a result, the ball behavior shown in FIG. 97(a) is It has the same configuration as the stable part 266.

In the above description,
"Ball delay means capable of slowing down the moving speed of the game ball [for example, first upstream ball delay section 2651, first downstream ball delay section 2652, second upstream ball delay section 2653, second downstream ball delay section 2654" ]and,
Ball behavior stabilizing means capable of stabilizing the behavior of a moving game ball [e.g., ball behavior stabilizing section 266];
Ball direction changing means for changing the moving direction of the game ball [for example, first ball direction changing section 261 to fourth ball direction changing section 264],
Equipped with
The ball behavior stabilizing means stabilizes the behavior of the game ball that has passed through the ball delaying means,
The ball direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball that has passed through the ball behavior stabilizing means.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

A game ball that moves toward the ball direction changing means while changing the moving speed of the game ball to prevent the game ball from stopping or firing the game ball at a timing when the game ball is directed toward the ball direction changing means. By stabilizing the behavior of the game ball, the accuracy of changing the direction of the game ball in the ball direction changing means can be increased.

Note that the ball direction changing means may be a ball sorting means for sorting the moving direction of the game balls.

Also,
“The ball delay means is provided in the ball path forming portion [for example, the rear wall 2603b of the electric distribution unit 26],
The ball delay means is separate from the ball path forming section,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By making it separate from the ball passage forming section, even if the ball delaying means is damaged or soiled, fewer parts need to be replaced. Moreover, when it is desired to attach the ball delaying means of different performance to another game machine, the ball passage forming portion can be reused.

The ball behavior stabilizing means is provided in the ball passage forming section, and the ball behavior stabilizing means may be separate from the ball passage forming section.

Also,
``The ball delaying means is such that the width of the part through which the game ball passes is narrower on the downstream side [for example, 11.5 mm] than on the upstream side [for example, 12.5 mm],
The width refers to the length in one direction perpendicular to the passing direction of the game ball.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to come into contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delay means, and to delay the moving speed of the game ball that comes into contact with it.

Also,
``The ball delaying means is configured with an inverted conical surface [for example, an inverted conical surface 2653c] whose diameter gradually decreases toward the downstream side through which the game ball passes.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The game ball that has come into contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delaying means heads toward the downstream side while circulating along the wall surface. That is, it moves toward the downstream side while moving in a spiral shape. By doing this, the moving speed of the game ball can be slowed down. If the timing at which the game ball contacts the wall surface constituting the ball delay means is delayed, the time the game ball travels downstream while circulating along the wall surface becomes shorter, and the rate at which the moving speed of the game ball is reduced decreases. do. Furthermore, if the game ball does not come into contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delay means, the moving speed of the game ball does not decrease. As described above, the degree to which the moving speed of the game ball decreases is not fixed, and the moving speed of the game ball becomes random. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being stopped and the game ball from being launched at the same timing as the ball direction changing means.

Note that a part of the wall surface constituting the ball delaying means (the inner wall of the portion of the ball delaying means through which the game ball passes) may extend vertically downward.

The ball delaying means may have a portion through which the game ball passes, which may be configured with a curved surface that is convex inward from the upstream side toward the downstream side, or a curved surface that is convex outward from the upstream side toward the downstream side. It may be composed of a curved surface.

A thread groove may be formed in a wall surface constituting the ball delay means.

Also,
``The ball behavior stabilizing means has a width at its narrowest part [e.g., the downstream end] that is narrower than a width at the narrowest part [e.g., 11.5 mm] of the ball delaying means [e.g., the downstream end]. [For example, 11.3 mm],
The width refers to the length in one direction perpendicular to the passing direction of the game ball.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The outward force applied to the game ball by the ball delaying means (the force due to the centrifugal force generated by the ball going downstream while circulating along the wall surface constituting the ball delaying means) constitutes the ball behavior stabilizing means. This can be suppressed by the game ball colliding with the wall. That is, the above-mentioned outward force changes into a downward force when the game ball collides with the wall surface constituting the ball behavior stabilizing means. Thereby, the behavior of the game ball can be stabilized.

Note that the length (width) of the ball behavior stabilizing means in the left-right direction may be narrower than the length (depth) of the ball behavior stabilizing means in the front-rear direction. That is, the ball behavior stabilizing means may have a rectangular cross-sectional shape.

The length (width) of the ball behavior stabilizing means in the left-right direction may be the same as the length (depth) of the ball behavior stabilizing means in the front-rear direction. That is, the spherical behavior stabilizing means may have a square cross-sectional shape.

The cross-sectional shape of the ball behavior stabilizing means may be U-shaped, U-shaped, or circular.

Also,
"The ball direction changing means is provided directly below the downstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the game ball that has passed through the ball behavior stabilizing means falls vertically and comes into contact with the ball direction changing means, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the change in the moving direction of the game ball provided by the ball direction changing means.

Also,
``Providing a ball trajectory changing means [e.g., ball trajectory changing rib 26r3] on the upstream side of the ball delaying means,
The ball trajectory changing means causes a game ball moving toward the ball delaying means to come into contact with a wall surface constituting the ball delaying means [for example, a wall surface on the left side of the inner peripheral surface of the second upstream ball delaying section 2653]. It changes the trajectory of the game ball so that it becomes easier to play.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The game ball is likely to come into contact with the wall surface constituting the ball delaying means, and the moving speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down by the ball delaying means.

Note that the ball direction changing means has a greater influence on the game ball than the ball trajectory changing means. That is, while the ball direction changing means largely changes the direction of the moving game ball, the ball trajectory changing means only slightly changes the direction of the moving game ball.

Also,
"A gap [for example, gap 2653s] is provided between the downstream end of the ball delaying means and the upstream end of the ball behavior stabilizing means,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the ball behavior stabilizing means may be provided at a position separated from the ball delaying means. Alternatively, the ball behavior stabilizing means may be provided at a position in contact with the ball delaying means.

Also,
``In the path through which the game ball whose movement direction has been changed by the ball direction changing means [for example, the left path (second ball path 2602) or the right path (connection path 2607) shown in FIG. 94]'' A game machine characterized by being provided with a deceleration rib (for example, deceleration rib 26r1) that protrudes and can slow down the moving speed of the game ball. ”
Also explained.

Next, the first three-dimensional film effect 271, the second three-dimensional film effect 272, the third three-dimensional film effect 273, and the fourth three-dimensional film effect 274 will be explained.

FIG. 98 shows removing various members that overlapped with the first 3D film effect 271, the second 3D film effect 272, the third 3D film effect 273, and the fourth 3D film effect 274 from the game board 200. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 98, a first three-dimensional film presentation body 271 and a second three-dimensional film presentation body 272 are arranged at the top. Further, a third three-dimensional film presentation body 273 is arranged on the right side, and a fourth three-dimensional film presentation body 274 is arranged on the left side. The first three-dimensional film presentation body 271 is provided to overlap the second three-dimensional film presentation body 272.

Further, FIG. 98 shows a decorative pattern display device 208. The decorative pattern display device 208 is capable of displaying images by modulating light using a liquid crystal composition. A portion of the right end of this decorative pattern display device 208 is covered by a portion of the left side of the third three-dimensional film presentation body 273 disposed on the right side.

Furthermore, FIG. 98 also shows a substantially circular LED light emitting element 278. As described above, the LED light emitting element 278 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 2781 on the outer periphery, and each of the three-dimensional film effects 271 to 274 is irradiated with light from the side by the LED light emitting element 278. Note that each of the three-dimensional film production bodies 271 to 274 may be irradiated with light from the front by an LED light-emitting production body 278. Further, a member may be provided to cover the LED light emitting element 278 from the front, and at least a part of the member may be covered by a part of the third three-dimensional film element 273.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a state in which the first three-dimensional film effect body 271 and the third three-dimensional film effect body 273 are removed from the state shown in FIG. 98.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the first three-dimensional film production body 271 alone. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the first three-dimensional film production body 271 when viewed from the right side, and FIG. 100(b) is a schematic perspective view of the first three-dimensional film production body 271 when viewed from above. It is a diagram.

The first three-dimensional film presentation body 271 is formed by vacuum forming or pressure forming a resin film (for example, polystyrene resin) with a thickness of about 0.01 mm, and has a flat plate portion 2711 and a three-dimensional portion 2712. Of the flat plate portion 2711 and the three-dimensional portion 2712, at least the three-dimensional portion 2712 is transparent. Note that transparency may be transparent or semitransparent (the same applies in this specification). Further, the three-dimensional portion 2712 may be entirely transparent, or only a portion thereof may be transparent.

FIG. 100(c) is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a transparent portion and an opaque portion in the three-dimensional portion 2712.

In FIG. 100(c), the 7-segment numbered portion is the opaque region npe, and the region surrounded by the opaque region npe is the transparent region per. Note that the inside of the impermeable part npe may be made into a permeable part per.

The matters regarding the first three-dimensional film presentation body 271 described above are also the same for the other three-dimensional film presentation bodies 272 to 274. Further, the three-dimensional film presentation body may be formed using a material depending on the weight and strength, and is not limited to a resin film with a thickness of about 0.01 mm, but also a film with a thickness of less than 0.1 mm, a film with a thickness of 0.01 mm, etc. It may be formed using a sheet of 1 mm to less than 0.8 mm, a plate of 0.8 mm or more, or the like.

FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the second three-dimensional film production body 272 when viewed from the slightly right side.

The three-dimensional portion 2722 of the second three-dimensional film presentation body 272 is provided with a mounting portion 2723 on which the three-dimensional portion 2712 of the first three-dimensional film presentation body 271 is placed. The entire front surface 2724 of the mounting portion 2723 shown in FIG. 101 is transparent and flat, but the entire surface or a portion thereof may have an uneven shape imitating a lens. Also, double-sided tape is pasted on the side surface 2725 of the mounting portion 2723, and the three-dimensional portion 2712 of the first three-dimensional film presentation body 271 is fixed to the mounting portion 2723 by this double-sided tape. By using transparent double-sided tape, light can be illuminated from the sides.

FIG. 102 is a perspective view showing how the three-dimensional portion 2712 of the first three-dimensional film effect body 271 is fixed to the mounting portion 2723 of the second three-dimensional film effect body 272.

In FIG. 102, the first three-dimensional film effects 271 to the fourth three-dimensional film effects 274 are shown, but in order to distinguish the second three-dimensional film effects 272, the colors are different from the other three-dimensional film effects. They are shown differently. In a portion of the second three-dimensional film presentation body 272 that is not overlapped by the first three-dimensional film presentation body 271, the second three-dimensional film presentation body 272 is visible when viewed from the front. Further, as shown in FIG. 102, the part surrounded by the one-dot chain line in the first three-dimensional film production body 271 is a part that does not overlap with the second three-dimensional film production body 272, and the second three-dimensional film production body 271 is located on the rear side. The effect body 272 does not exist.

Further, as shown in FIG. 102, the second three-dimensional film effect body 272 and the fourth three-dimensional film effect body 274 are connected to the lower left edge 2726 of the second three-dimensional film effect body 272 and the upper edge 2741 of the fourth three-dimensional film effect body 274. are placed in contact with each other. That is, the second three-dimensional film presentation body 272 and the fourth three-dimensional film presentation body 274 are arranged adjacent to each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 100, the flat plate portion 2711 of the first three-dimensional film presentation body 271 is provided with screw holes 271N and positioning holes 271H on the left and right sides, respectively. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99, the game board back base 200b is provided with one set of a screw receiving tube 200bP and a positioning protrusion 200bT on each side. The left positioning projection 200bT is inserted into the left positioning hole 271H for positioning, and the right positioning projection 200bT is inserted into the right positioning hole 271H for positioning. When the alignment is completed, screws can be inserted into the left screw hole 271N and the left screw receiving tube 200bP, and screws are tightened. Further, screws can be inserted into the right screw hole 271N and the right screw receiving tube 200bP, and the right side is also screwed. In this way, the first three-dimensional film presentation body 271 is screwed to the game board back base 200b.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 101, the flat plate portion 2721 of the second three-dimensional film presentation body 272 is also provided with screw holes 272N and positioning holes 272H on the left and right sides, respectively.

Each of the three-dimensional film effects 271 to 274 is placed above the lens. FIG. 102 shows a part of the upper lens 2752, a part of the right lens 2753, and a part of the left lens 2754. Any of these lenses 2752 to 2754 refracts light from the rear side and diffuses or focuses it on the front side. Each of these lenses 2752 to 2754 is provided with a light diffusing section. However, the lens may be simply a transparent plate.

The upper lens 2752 is provided with a screw receiving hole and a positioning protrusion on each of the left and right sides. As shown in FIG. 102, the left positioning protrusion is inserted into the left positioning hole 272H of the second 3D film production body 272 for positioning, and the right positioning protrusion is used to position the right side of the second 3D film production body 272. It is inserted into the hole 272H and aligned. When the alignment is completed, screws can be inserted into the left screw hole 272N of the second three-dimensional film production body 272 and the left screw receiving hole provided in the upper lens 2752, and screws are fastened. In addition, screws can be inserted into the right screw hole 272N of the second three-dimensional film presentation body 272 and the right screw receiving hole provided in the upper lens 2752, and the right side is also screwed. In this way, the second three-dimensional film presentation body 272 is screwed to the upper lens 2752. In FIG. 102, screws 271S screwing the first 3D film effect body 271 to the back base 200b of the game board and screws 272S screwing the second 3D film effect body 272 to the upper lens 2752 are shown. has been done. Also shown are a positioning protrusion 200bT provided on the back base 200b of the game board and a positioning protrusion 2752T provided on the upper lens 2752. As shown in FIG. 102, the positioning means (positioning protrusion 200bT) and fixing means (screws 271S) of the first three-dimensional film production body 271 and the positioning means (positioning protrusion 2752T) and fixation means ( The position in the front-rear direction is different from that of the screw 272S). That is, the positioning means (positioning projections 200bT) and fixing means (screws 271S) of the first three-dimensional film production body 271 are better than the positioning means (positioning protrusions 2752T) and fixation means (screws 272S) of the second three-dimensional film production body 272. It is located on the front side. By doing this, the presentation means are arranged with depth.

Next, the mounting structure of the 3D film performance body will be explained using the third 3D film performance body 273 as an example, but the matters described below may be the same for other 3D film performance bodies, or may be similar to the 3D film performance body 273. This is a matter that can be applied.

FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting structure of the third three-dimensional film production body 273. In FIG. 103, the front left side is the front side, and the back right side is the rear side.

FIG. 103 shows, from the front, the third three-dimensional film production body 273, the right lens 2753, the right lens mounting base 2763, and the right LED board 2773.

The third three-dimensional film production body 273 has a flat plate portion 2731 provided with three screw holes 273N and two positioning holes 273H.

The right lens 2753 is provided with six screw receiving holes 275H1 to 275H6, two positioning projections 275T, and three screw holes 275N.

The right lens mounting base 2763 is also transparent, and the right lens mounting base 2763 is provided with four screw receiving tubes 276P1 to 276P4 and four screw holes 276N.

A plurality of LEDs 277L are arranged in a matrix on the right LED board 2773, and four notches 277C and four screw holes 277N are provided.

The two positioning protrusions 275T of the right lens 2753 are inserted into the two positioning holes 273H of the third three-dimensional film presentation body 273, respectively, and the positioning is performed. When the alignment is completed, each of the three screw holes 273N of the third three-dimensional film production body 273 and the three screw holes 275H1, 275H5, 275H6 of the six screw holes 275H1 to 275H6 provided in the right lens 2753 are inserted. The third three-dimensional film production body 273 is screwed to the right lens 2753. The third three-dimensional film presentation body 273 is screwed with the upper left end portion protruding from the right lens 2753 to the left. FIG. 103 shows three machine screws 273S used for screw fastening. Further, on the right lens 2753 shown in FIG. 103, the area covered by the third three-dimensional film production body 273 screwed is indicated by hatching downward to the right. Further, in FIG. 103, a region connecting the positions of these three machine screws 273S is shown by a dotted line. The center of gravity of the third three-dimensional film presentation body 273 is located outside the area indicated by the dotted line.

The right lens mounting base 2763 is to which the right lens 2753 and a part of the upper lens 2752 are attached, and the three screws of the right lens 2753 are attached to three screw receivers 276P2 to 276P4 among the four screw receivers 276P1 to 276P4. The holes 275N are aligned and screwed. FIG. 103 also shows three screws 275S1 to 275S3 used for screwing the right lens 2753. Of these three screws 275S1 to 275S3, only the upper screw 275S1 is covered by the third three-dimensional film production body 273 screwed, as shown by hatching downward to the right. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98, the two screws 275S2 and S275S3 at the bottom are visible, but the one screw 275S1 at the top is not visible. Note that FIG. 99 in which the third three-dimensional film production body 273 is removed shows its screw 275S1. In addition, the three screw receiving holes 275H2 to 275H4 from the bottom provided at the right end of the right lens 2753 are not used at all, and as shown by the downward hatching to the right, the third three-dimensional film is fixed with screws. It is covered by the presentation body 273 and is not visible as shown in FIG. Furthermore, among the four screw receiving tubes 276P1 to 276P4, the screw hole 276P1 located at the uppermost position closest to the upper lens 2752 is aligned with the screw hole of the upper lens 2752 (not shown here). Screws are fastened.
The screws used for this screw fixing are also covered by the screwed third 3D film production body 273 and are not visible as shown in FIG. 98, but in FIG. 99 with the third 3D film production body 273 removed , the screw is shown as screw 275S4.

The right lens mounting base 2763 and the right LED board 2773 are screwed to a frame plate, not shown here. That is, the right lens mounting base 2763 allows four screws 276S to be inserted into the four screw holes 276N. These four screws 276S pass through the notch 277C of the right LED board 2773 and are fixed to a frame plate (not shown). Further, the right LED board 2773 is screwed to a frame plate (not shown) by inserting four screws 277S into the four screw holes 277N, and using these four screws 277S.

The right LED board 2773 is covered by a light diffusion section provided on the right lens 2753. On the other hand, the third 3D film production body 273 covers the light diffusion part, and the light emission production by lighting and blinking of the LED 277L mounted on the right LED board 2773 can be visually recognized through the third 3D film production body 273. .

In addition, although each is fixed with a screw here, it may be fixed with a transparent double-sided tape.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an LED board attached to a frame plate. Note that in this FIG. 104, the approximately circular LED light emitting element 278 shown in FIG. 98 has been removed.

FIG. 104 shows an upper LED board 2772, a right LED board 2773, and a left LED board 2774.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing each lens mounting base mounted on each of the LED boards 2772 to 2774. Note that in this FIG. 105 as well, the approximately circular LED light emitting element 278 shown in FIG. 98 is removed.

FIG. 105 shows an upper lens mounting base 2762, a right lens mounting base 2763, and a left lens mounting base 2764. The upper lens mounting base 2762 has almost the same shape as the upper LED board 2772 shown in FIG. 104, and overlaps the entire area of the upper LED board 2772. The right lens mounting base 2763 has almost the same shape as the right LED board 2773 shown in FIG. 104, and overlaps the entire area of the right LED board 2773. The left lens mounting base 2764 is longer downward than the left LED board 2774 shown in FIG. 104, and overlaps the entire area of the left LED board 2774.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing each lens mounted on each lens mounting base 2762-2764. In addition, in this FIG. 106 as well, the substantially circular LED light emitting element 278 shown in FIG. 98 is removed.

In FIG. 106, an upper lens 2752, a right lens 2753, and a left lens 2754 are shown.

The left lens 2754 covers not only the left lens mounting base 2764 but also the left end portion of the upper lens mounting base 2762 from the front side. Further, the upper lens 2752 covers not only the upper lens attachment base 2762 but also the upper left end portion of the right lens attachment base 2763 from the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the LED boards 2772 to 2774 have corresponding lens mounting bases 2762 to 2764, and the lens mounting bases 2762 to 2764 also have corresponding lenses 2752 to 2754. Here, "corresponding" refers to those that are placed directly above each other and have the largest number of overlapping areas. However, a part of the LED board may be covered with another lens. Also, in the three-dimensional portion 2732 of the third three-dimensional film production body 273 shown in FIG. 103, the upper left end portion has a lens (upper lens 2752) that is different from the lens (right lens 2753) disposed below the other portion. It is illuminated by the light that passes through it.

The light emitted by the LED mounted on the upper LED board 2772 passes through the upper lens mounting base 2762, passes through the upper lens 2752 and a part of the left lens 2754, and then reaches the first three-dimensional film production body 271 and the second three-dimensional film. The production body 272 is irradiated with light from the rear side by LEDs mounted on the upper LED board 2772. The light emitted by the LED mounted on the right LED board 2773 passes through the right lens mounting base 2763, passes through the right lens 2753 and a part of the upper lens 2752, and the third three-dimensional film production body 273 connects the right LED board. Light is emitted from the rear side by the LED mounted on the 2773. The light emitted by the LED mounted on the left LED board 2774 passes through the left lens mounting base 2764, passes through the left lens 2754, and a part of the third 3D film production body 273 and the second 3D film production body 272, Light is emitted from the rear side by the LED mounted on the left LED board 2774.

In the above description,
"A decorative body having a three-dimensional shape [for example, a first three-dimensional film effect body 271, a second three-dimensional film effect body 272, a third three-dimensional film effect body 273, a fourth three-dimensional film effect body 274],
a member [for example, right lens 2753] provided with a plurality of screw holes [for example, screw holes 275N, 275H1 to 275H6];
Equipped with
The decorative body covers screw holes (for example, screw receiving holes 275H2 to 275H4) that are not inserted with screws among the plurality of screw holes.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

If a trace of a hole connected to a screw hole through which a screw has not been inserted is found in the decorative body, the game store clerk can grasp that there is a possibility that the game machine has been illegally modified. Furthermore, when reusing the member for another game machine, it is possible to fix the member with screws even using a screw hole through which no screw is inserted, and the degree of freedom in the fixing position of the member can be increased.

Note that the decorative body may be formed by processing a resin sheet or film into a three-dimensional shape.

A portion of the member may not be covered by the decoration.

The decorative body is fixed to the member by a plurality of screws, and the center of gravity of the decorative body is located outside a region connecting the positions of the plurality of screws fixing the decorative body. It's okay.

The decorative body may be fixed with double-sided tape. For example, the decoration may be fixed to the member with double-sided tape.

The decorative body may be sandwiched and fixed between two or more other parts.

The decorative body may be fixed by two or more fixing methods (for example, screws, double-sided tape, clamping with other parts).

Also,
``Equipped with a screw [for example, screw 275S1, 275S4 shown in FIG. 99] for fixing an object different from the decorative body [for example, member (right lens 2753) or upper lens 2752],
The screw is covered with the decorative body [for example, the third three-dimensional film production body 273],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The appearance quality of the game machine can be improved.

Note that the object may be the member described above.

The screw may fix the member [eg, right lens 2753] to a certain structure [eg, right lens mounting base 2763].

Also,
"The member [for example, the right lens 2753] is screwed using some of the screw holes [for example, the screw hole 275N] among the plurality of screw holes.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The appearance quality of the game machine can be improved.

The member [for example, right lens 2753] may be fixed to the object [for example, right lens attachment base 2763] with a screw.

Also,
"The screw fixes a different item [e.g., upper lens 2752] from the member [e.g., right lens 2753] [e.g., 275S4 shown in FIG. 99].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The appearance quality of the game machine can be improved.

The item different from the member may be of the same type as the member, or may be of a different type.

Also,
"Equipped with a first effect means [for example, right LED board 2773] that can perform the first light emission effect,
The decorative body has at least a part of it that is transparent,
The member [for example, the right lens 2753] has at least a part of the light diffusion part that diffuses the transmitted light,
The first presentation means is covered by the light diffusion section,
The decoration body [for example, the third three-dimensional film production body 273] covers the light diffusion part,
The first light emitting effect [for example, the light emitting effect by lighting and blinking of the LED 277L mounted on the right LED board 2773] is visible through the decorative body,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the decorative body may cover the light diffusing portion so that the first light emitting effect can be visually recognized through the decorative body.

The first light emitting effect can be performed while hiding the screw hole with the decorative body.

The decorative body may be entirely transparent, or only a portion thereof may be transparent.

The member may be one that diffuses the light that is transmitted entirely, or may be one that diffuses the light that is only partially transmitted.

The first presentation means may be, for example, an LED board or a liquid crystal display.

The first light emitting effect may be an effect by lighting or blinking an LED, or may be an image display effect by modulating light using a liquid crystal composition.

The member may be, for example, a lens member.

Also,
``Equipped with a second production means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of performing a second light emission production,
The second effect means is one in which a part [for example, a part of the right end] is covered by a part [for example, a part of the left side] of the decoration body [for example, the third three-dimensional film effect body 273]. is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The second light emitting effect can be performed while hiding the screw hole with the decorative body.

Note that the second presentation means may be a liquid crystal display, and the second light emission presentation may be an image display presentation by modulating light using a liquid crystal composition.

Also,
``Equipped with a third effect means [e.g., LED light emitting effect body 278] capable of performing a third light emission effect,
The decorative body is irradiated with light from the front or side by the third light emitting effect,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The third light emitting effect can be performed while hiding the screw hole with the decorative body.

Note that at least a portion of the second member covering the third display means may be covered by a portion of the decorative body. That is, the entire second member covering the third display means may be covered by a part of the decoration, or only a part of the second member covering the third display means may be covered by the decoration. It may be partially covered by the decorative body.

Also,
"The decorative body [for example, the third three-dimensional film production body 273] has a flat plate part [for example, the flat plate part 2731] and a three-dimensional part [for example, the three-dimensional part 2732],
The flat plate portion is configured to attach the member [for example, the right lens 2753] is fixed with screws,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The flat plate part covers the screw holes (for example, screw receiving holes 275H2 to 275H4) through which screws are not inserted among the plurality of screw holes [for example, screw receiving holes 275H1 to 275H6],"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A first decorative body having a three-dimensional shape [for example, the first three-dimensional film production body 271],
a second decorative body having a three-dimensional shape [for example, the second three-dimensional film production body 272];
Equipped with
The second decorative body is at least partially covered by at least a portion of the first decorative body.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

By overlapping the first decorative body and the second decorative body, the decoration of the game machine can be made to have a more three-dimensional effect.

Note that the first decorative body may be formed by processing a resin sheet or film into a three-dimensional shape. The second decorative body may be a three-dimensionally processed resin sheet or film.

The first decorative body is fixed to the member by a plurality of screws, and the center of gravity of the first decorative body corresponds to the position of the plurality of screws fixing the first decorative body. It may be located outside the tied area. The second decorative body is fixed to the member by a plurality of screws, and the center of gravity of the second decorative body corresponds to the position of the plurality of screws fixing the second decorative body. It may be located outside the tied area.

The second decorative body may be entirely covered by the first decorative body, or it may be entirely covered by only a part of the first decorative body. It may be partially covered by the first decorative body, or it may be partially covered by only a part of the first decorative body. Good too.

The first decorative body may be fixed to a first member, and the first member may have a portion that does not overlap with the first decorative body. The second decoration may be fixed to a second member, and the second member may have a portion that does not overlap with the second decoration.

The position where the first decorative body is fixed to the first member may be in front of the position where the second decorative body is fixed to the second member (on the player's side).

A part of the first decorative body may have a similar shape to a part of the second decorative body.

The first decoration may be fixed to the second decoration with double-sided tape.

Also,
“The second decorative body has a portion that does not overlap with the first decorative body in the front-rear direction [for example, FIG. 102],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The first decorative body and the second decorative body are separated by a region where the first decorative body and the second decorative body overlap and a region where only the rear decorative body (the second decorative body) is visible. The combination can be made to have a more three-dimensional effect when viewed from an oblique direction than when viewed from the front.

Also,
“The first decorative body has a portion that does not overlap with the second decorative body in the front-rear direction [for example, the portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 102].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The difference between the first decorative body and the second decorative body is determined by the area where the first decorative body and the second decorative body overlap and the area where only the front decorative body (the first decorative body) is visible. The combination can be made to have a more three-dimensional effect when viewed from an oblique direction than when viewed from the front.

Also,
``Equipped with a third effect means [e.g., LED light emitting effect body 278] capable of performing a third light emission effect,
The first decorative body is irradiated with light from the front or side by the third light emitting effect,
The second decorative body is irradiated with light from the front or side by the third light emitting effect,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The combination of the first decorative body and the second decorative body provides a decoration with a sense of depth and three-dimensionality.

Also,
“The first decorative body is at least partially transparent [for example, FIG. 100],
The second decorative body is such that at least a portion [for example, the attachment portion 2723] is covered by a transparent portion of the first decorative body (hereinafter referred to as the “first portion”). There is [for example, Figure 101],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The combination of the first decorative body and the second decorative body can be made to have a more three-dimensional effect and depth.

The first decorative body may be entirely transparent, or only a portion thereof may be transparent.

The second decoration may be entirely covered by the first part, or only a part thereof may be covered by the first part. .

Also,
``Equipped with a fourth effect means [for example, upper LED board 2772] capable of performing a fourth light emission effect,
The part of the second decoration covered by the first part (hereinafter referred to as "second part") [for example, the attached part 2723] is transparent,
The fourth presentation means is covered by at least the second part,
The fourth light emitting effect is visible from the first part through the second part,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

A light emitting effect can be performed by the combination of the first decorative body and the second decorative body, which have a three-dimensional effect.

At least a portion of the second region may be transparent. That is, the second portion may be entirely transparent, or only a portion thereof may be transparent.

The fourth presentation means may be, for example, an LED board or a liquid crystal display. The fourth light emitting effect may be an effect by lighting or blinking an LED, or may be an image display effect by modulating light using a liquid crystal composition.

At least a portion of the second portion may have an uneven shape. That is, the second portion may have an uneven shape entirely, or only a portion thereof may have an uneven shape. Alternatively, at least a portion of the second portion may be planar. That is, the second portion may be entirely planar, or only a portion thereof may be planar. Further, the second portion may be formed in a shape imitating a lens. In the second portion, the shape may be formed on the entire portion or only on a portion of the portion.

Also,
"The first decorative body has an impermeable part (hereinafter referred to as the "third part") [for example, a part bordering characters, etc.],
The first part is a part surrounded by the third part,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

There are cases where the first part can be emphasized and made visible to the player.

Note that the second decorative body may have a transparent part and an opaque part surrounding the transparent part.

Also,
“The first decorative body has a first flat plate portion [for example, flat plate portion 2711] and a first three-dimensional portion [for example, three-dimensional portion 2712],
The first flat plate part is fixed to a first member [for example, the game board back base 200b],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The second decorative body has a second flat plate portion [for example, flat plate portion 2721] and a second three-dimensional portion [for example, three-dimensional portion 2722],
The second flat plate portion is fixed to a second member [for example, the upper lens 2752],
The first decorative body is also fixed to the second decorative body [for example, fixed with double-sided tape],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

FIG. 107 is a front view of an enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 100h shown in FIG. 107, a predetermined number of game media (eg, game balls) are circulated inside the game machine. That is, the game medium ejected from the ejection means 101h to the game area 102h can be discharged from the game area 102h and supplied to the ejection means 101h again. Further, a display means 103h for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 102h on the front of the game machine, and is shown in FIG. A ball storage tray 126 shown at 73 that can be touched by a player is not provided.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 100h shown in FIG. 107 is used by enclosing balls and circulating the enclosed balls within the pachinko machine. may be performed by credit.

The functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are not described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, those constituent elements may be included in other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent elements contained only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. Even when applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it stands as a cohesive technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 106 Front frame door 124 Game area B Game ball 200 Game board 208 Decorative pattern display device 23 Attacker unit 23r3 Rear second rib 23f3 Front second rib 231 Special figure 1 starting port (variable)
2311 Feather member 234 First variable prize opening 2341 Door member 235 Second variable prize opening 2351 Door member 61 Storage passage 611B Rearward protrusion 611F Forward protrusion 620 Shutter part 231U, 234U, 235U Common drive unit SM Stepping motor AP Transmission arm

Claims (1)

A game machine equipped with a variable ball entrance unit provided with a first variable ball entrance and a second variable ball entrance,
Equipped with a ball entrance,
The variable ball entrance unit has a first movable part and a second movable part,
The first variable ball entry opening allows the game ball to enter the ball more easily when the first movable part is at the third position than when the first movable part is at the first position;
The second variable ball entry opening allows the game ball to enter the ball more easily when the second movable part is at the fourth position than when the second movable part is at the second position,
The first movable part has a front end located further forward in the first position than in the third position,
The second movable part has a front end located further forward in the fourth position than in the second position,
The first variable ball entry hole is a variable ball entry hole located upstream in the rolling direction of the game ball than the second variable ball entry hole,
The ball entry port includes a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port,
The first ball entrance provides a gaming value to the player when the ball enters the opening,
The second ball entrance may be used to conduct a lottery when a ball is entered;
The first ball entry port is provided at a position where there is a possibility that the game ball may enter the ball while heading toward the second variable ball entry port without entering the first variable ball entry port. and is located at a different location from the above location.
A game ball that does not enter the second variable ball entry port is more likely to enter the second ball entry port than the out port;
A game machine characterized by:

Images